Manual PDF

TL IP/TDM
Equipment Specification
User manual
MN.00278.E - 005
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of Siae Microelettronica. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international
regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen dis-
played is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
HP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP–UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
Contents
Section 1.
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION 9
1 GENERAL INFORMATION & CONFIGURATION TREE................................................... 9

1.1 GENERAL.......................................................................................................... 9
1.2 FEATURES ........................................................................................................ 9
2 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM ........................................................................................22

2.1 FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM ...........................................................................22
2.2 BRU BLOCK......................................................................................................22
2.3 VENT BLOCK ....................................................................................................22
2.4 BB INTF-X BLOCK .............................................................................................22
2.5 COMMON BLOCK ..............................................................................................23
2.6 EXT-BB SHELF..................................................................................................23
2.7 BBINTF-Y BLOCK ..............................................................................................23
2.8 BB INTF (STM1E/O) ..........................................................................................33
2.9 MODULATION APPLIED ......................................................................................33
2.10 STM-1 .............................................................................................................33
2.11 WSR ...............................................................................................................33
2.12 WSS ...............................................................................................................33
2.13 DCC................................................................................................................34
2.14 LINE DPC.........................................................................................................34
2.15 RADIO DPC ......................................................................................................34
2.16 SW CONT ........................................................................................................34
2.17 BUILT-IN NATIVE IP SYSTEM..............................................................................36
2.18 LINK AGGREGATION .........................................................................................36
2.19 DATA RATE / RF ...............................................................................................36
2.20 AUX ................................................................................................................37
2.21 SYNC ..............................................................................................................37
2.22 TDPC WHEN SET SDH/ETHER TO SDH .................................................................40
2.23 TDPC WHEN SET SDH/ETHER TO ETHER ..............................................................40
2.24 MOD ...............................................................................................................40
2.25 TX ..................................................................................................................40
2.26 RX ..................................................................................................................41
2.27 DEM................................................................................................................41
2.28 BRU ................................................................................................................41
2.29 AUXILIARY SIGNAL (AUX)..................................................................................46
2.30 AUX SIGNAL INTERFACE....................................................................................46
2.31 RUC ................................................................................................................47
MN.00278.E - 005 1
3 RADIO FREQUENCY PLAN AND ANTENNA SYSTEM....................................................51
3.1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................51
3.2 SINGLE-FEED ANTENNA ....................................................................................52
3.3 DUAL-FEED ANTENNA .......................................................................................53
3.4 ANTENNA SYSTEM ............................................................................................54
3.5 APPENDIX-A - FREQUENCY PLAN/ANTENNA SYSTEM..............................................54
3.5.1 Frequency Plan .......................................................................................54
3.6 APPENDIX-B - PARAMETER SHEET .....................................................................94
3.6.1 Parameter Sheet.....................................................................................94
4 RF BRANCHING NETWORK .......................................................................................97

4.1 RF BRANCHING NETWORK .................................................................................97
4.2 BEF ................................................................................................................97
4.3 APPENDIX-A - FILTER CHAIN CONFIGURATION ................................................... 100
4.3.1 Filter chain configuration........................................................................ 100
4.4 APPENDIX-B - RF BRANCHING NETWORK........................................................... 102
4.5 APPENDIX-C - INSERTION LOSS OF LOSS EQUALIZED RF BRANCHING NETWORK ... 112
4.6 APPENDIX-D - TYPICAL BRU INSERTION LOSS BREAKDOWN ................................ 120
4.6.1 Loss breakdown for 4/8/11/13 GHz (No BEF is needed).............................. 120
4.6.2 Loss breakdown for 5/L6/U6/7/8/11 GHz (BEF is needed for innermost CH) .. 122
4.7 APPENDIX-E - TYPICAL BPF CHARACTERISTICS .................................................. 125
4.7.1 RF BPF specification for 40 MHZ CS system .............................................. 125
4.7.2 RF BPF specification for 28/29/29.65 mhz cs system.................................. 126
4.7.3 BPF inside TRMD in 844 Mhz band ........................................................... 127
4.8 APPENDIX-F - NET FILTER DISCRIMINATION (NFD) FOR ALL QAM ORDER
(IN ACCORDANCE WITH ETSI TR101 854 V1.1.1 (2000-09)) ................................ 129
5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION ................................................................................131

5.1 RF BAND ....................................................................................................... 131
5.2 MODULATION APPLIED .................................................................................... 132
5.2.1 Available QAM ...................................................................................... 132
5.2.2 When set SDH/Ether to SDH................................................................... 133
5.2.3 When set SDH/ Ether to Ether ................................................................ 133
5.3 TRANSFER RATE ............................................................................................. 134
5.3.1 When set SDH/ Ether to SDH.................................................................. 134
5.4 AUXILIARY SIGNAL ......................................................................................... 137
5.5 BASEBAND INTERFACE.................................................................................... 137
5.6 RPS SWITCHING CAPACITY.............................................................................. 138
5.7 OVERHEAD BYTE ACCESS FOR SDH .................................................................. 139
5.7.1 Overhead Byte Access ........................................................................... 139
5.7.2 Max. hops without Ext CLK ..................................................................... 139
5.7.3 SDH multiplexing structure..................................................................... 139
5.8 SYNCHRONOUS ETHERNET .............................................................................. 140
5.8.1 ECC .................................................................................................... 140
5.8.2 Max. hops without SSU .......................................................................... 140
5.8.3 Sync CLK Source .................................................................................. 140
5.8.4 CLK IN/OUT ......................................................................................... 140
5.8.5 CLK IN/OUT Port................................................................................... 140
5.9 TRANSMITTER ................................................................................................ 140
5.9.1 Output Power ....................................................................................... 140
5.9.2 HPA Backoff ......................................................................................... 141
5.9.3 TX Output Power Overdrive .................................................................... 141
2 MN.00278.E - 005
5.9.4 RF AMP Linearity Compensation .............................................................. 143
5.9.5 TX Local Carrier .................................................................................... 143
5.9.6 Radio Frequency Tolerance..................................................................... 143
5.9.7 TX LO Frequency Stability ...................................................................... 143
5.9.8 RF Spectrum Mask when SDH/Ether to SDH and Ether ............................... 143
5.9.9 Discrete CW components within spectrum mask when SDH/Ether to SDH
and Ether ............................................................................................ 144
5.9.10 Occupied Bandwidth for STM-1 when SDH/Ether to SDH and Ether ............. 144
5.9.11 Spurious Emission - External when SDH/Ether to SDH and Ether ................. 144
5.9.12 Dynamic Change of Modulation Order when SDH/Ether to Ether .................. 145
5.9.13 IF ....................................................................................................... 145
5.9.14 TX IF Input .......................................................................................... 145
5.9.15 TX RF Input.......................................................................................... 145
5.9.16 IF stability ........................................................................................... 145
5.9.17 RF Filter (BRU) ..................................................................................... 146
5.9.18 RF Filter (TRMD) ................................................................................... 146
5.9.19 844 MHz Filter ...................................................................................... 146
5.9.20 140 MHz Filter ...................................................................................... 146
5.9.21 ATPC................................................................................................... 146
5.9.22 MTPC .................................................................................................. 146
5.9.23 RF Output Return Loss........................................................................... 147
5.9.24 TX Output Connector Used ..................................................................... 147
5.10 RECEIVER...................................................................................................... 154
5.10.1 Noise Figure ......................................................................................... 154
5.10.2 RX Local Carrier.................................................................................... 154
5.10.3 Spurious Emission - External when SDH/Ether to SDH and Ether ................. 154
5.10.4 RX LO Frequency Stability ...................................................................... 154
5.10.5 CW spurious interference when SDH/Ether to SDH and Ether ...................... 155
5.10.6 Inter-Modulation ................................................................................... 155
5.10.7 Normal RSL.......................................................................................... 155
5.10.8 Maximum RSL ...................................................................................... 155
5.10.9 AGC Dynamic Range ............................................................................. 155
5.10.10RX/SD IF ............................................................................................ 155
5.10.11844 MHz stability ................................................................................. 156
5.10.12RF to IF interface ................................................................................. 156
5.10.13RF Filter (BRU) .................................................................................... 156
5.10.14RF Filter (TRMD) .................................................................................. 156
5.10.15844 MHz Filter ..................................................................................... 156
5.10.16140 MHz Filter ..................................................................................... 156
5.10.17RF Input Return Loss ............................................................................ 156
5.10.18RX/SD RF Input Connector Used ............................................................ 157
5.11 MODEM ......................................................................................................... 157
5.11.1 When set SDH/ Ether to SDH.................................................................. 157
5.11.3 Spectrum shaping ................................................................................. 158
5.11.4 Local carrier ......................................................................................... 158
5.11.5 140M Local frequency stability ................................................................ 158
5.11.6 Symbol Rate ........................................................................................ 158
5.11.7 ATDE................................................................................................... 158
5.12 DIGITAL PROCESSING (SDH INTERFACE) .......................................................... 158
5.12.1 BBINTF card (STM-1 electrical) ............................................................... 158
5.12.2 BBINTF card (STM-1 optical) .................................................................. 159
5.12.3 STM4O card (STM-4 optical) ................................................................... 159
MN.00278.E - 005 3
5.12.4 FE on GESW v1 10/100BASE-T/TX .......................................................... 159
5.13 DIGITAL PROCESSING (NATIVE IP ON SDH)....................................................... 160
5.13.1 GESW 1000BASE-T ............................................................................... 160
5.13.2 GESW 1000BASE-SX/LX ........................................................................ 160
5.14 DIGITAL PROCESSING (NATIVE IP ON RADIO).................................................... 160
5.14.1 FE on GESW v1 10/100BASE-T/TX .......................................................... 160
5.14.2 GESW 1000BASE-T ............................................................................... 161
5.14.3 GE SW 1000BASE-SX/LX........................................................................ 161
5.15 DIGITAL PROCESSING (RADIO TO RADIO) ......................................................... 161
5.16 OVERALL BER (WHEN SET SDH/ETHER TO SDH) ................................................. 162
5.16.1 Upfade ................................................................................................ 162
5.16.2 Downfade ............................................................................................ 162
5.16.3 Residual BER ........................................................................................ 162
5.17 OVERALL BER (WHEN SET SDH/ ETHER TO ETHER) ............................................. 166
5.17.1 Upfade ................................................................................................ 166
5.17.2 Downfade ............................................................................................ 166
5.17.3 Residual BER ........................................................................................ 168
5.18 OVERALL ....................................................................................................... 169
5.18.1 Signature When set SDH/ Ether to SDH ................................................... 169
5.18.2 Signature When set SDH/ Ether to Ether (Only reference) .......................... 170
5.18.3 QAM Order Change vs. RSL (typical)........................................................ 171
5.19 DFM.............................................................................................................. 171
5.19.1 System design parameter for STM-1 trunk line ......................................... 171
5.20 FUNCTION OF LICENSE KEY ............................................................................. 172
5.21 SYSTEM GAIN ................................................................................................ 172
5.22 IF-IF ............................................................................................................. 174
5.22.1 Amplitude-Frequency response ............................................................... 174
5.22.2 Delay .................................................................................................. 174
5.23 RF INTERFERENCE (WHEN SET SDH/ ETHER TO SDH) ......................................... 174
5.23.1 Co-channel - External ............................................................................ 174
5.23.2 First adjacent channel ........................................................................... 175
5.24 RF INTERFERENCE (WHEN SET SDH/ ETHER TO ETHER) REFERENCE ONLY............. 175
5.25 COUNTER-MEASURES TO FADING ..................................................................... 176
5.25.1 SD ...................................................................................................... 176
5.25.2 SD DADE ............................................................................................. 176
5.25.3 IF-IF characteristics .............................................................................. 177
5.25.4 Delay equalization from adjacent CHs ...................................................... 177
5.25.5 Adaptive Equalizer ................................................................................ 177
5.25.6 Radio Protection system (RPS)................................................................ 177
5.25.7 RPS for 1+1 Hot-Standby....................................................................... 177
5.25.8 XPIC function ....................................................................................... 177
5.25.9 XPIC DADE........................................................................................... 178
5.25.10LDPC FEC for STM-1 ............................................................................. 178
5.25.11LDPC FEC For Native IP......................................................................... 178
5.25.12ATPC .................................................................................................. 178
5.25.13MTPC ................................................................................................. 178
6 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION ...............................................................................179

6.1 EQUIPMENT CONSTRUCTION............................................................................ 179
6.2 RACK ............................................................................................................ 179
6.3 BRU .............................................................................................................. 180
6.4 TRMD SHELF .................................................................................................. 180
4 MN.00278.E - 005
6.5 EXT-BB SHELF................................................................................................ 180
6.6 BRU BLOCK.................................................................................................... 180
6.7 VENT BLOCK .................................................................................................. 181
6.8 TRMD BLOCK ................................................................................................. 181
6.9 BB INTF-X BLOCK ........................................................................................... 181
6.10 COMN BLOCK ................................................................................................. 181
6.11 OPTIONAL BB INTF-Y BLOCK ............................................................................ 183
6.12 FLEXIBLE SLOT ARRANGEMENT (FSA) ............................................................... 183
6.13 HOT SWAP..................................................................................................... 183
6.14 USER INTERFACE AREA (UIA) ON BASIC SHELF .................................................. 183
6.15 USER INTERFACE AREA (UIA) ON EXT-BB SHELF ................................................ 184
6.16 EXTERNAL CB ................................................................................................ 184
6.17 SYSTEM APPLICATION ..................................................................................... 184
6.18 CARD CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................... 184
6.19 RACK CONFIGURATION ................................................................................... 184
6.20 WEIGHT ........................................................................................................ 185
6.21 APPENDIX-A - SIAE MICROELETTRONICA RECOMMENDED SLOT ALLOCATION ........ 185
7 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATION .........................................................................192

7.1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION .......................................................................... 192
7.1.1 Not In-Use Condition ............................................................................. 192
7.1.2 In-Use Condition................................................................................... 193
7.2 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC)....................................................... 194
7.2.1 EMC Emission ....................................................................................... 194
7.2.2 Immunity ............................................................................................ 196
7.3 ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSION LIMIT ................................................................... 197
7.4 CLIMATIC TEST SPECIFICATION ....................................................................... 197
7.5 MECHANICAL TEST SPECIFICATION .................................................................. 198
7.6 SAFETY ......................................................................................................... 198
7.7 WASTE DIRECTIVE COMPLIANCE ...................................................................... 199
7.8 MTBF ............................................................................................................ 199
7.9 RECYCLING RATE ........................................................................................... 200
8 POWER REQUIREMENT...........................................................................................202
8.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 202
8.2 POWER FEED-1 .............................................................................................. 205
8.3 POWER FEED-2 .............................................................................................. 207
8.4 UNIT CONSUMPTION....................................................................................... 210
8.5 EQUIPMENT CONSUMPTION ............................................................................. 210
9 SIGNAL INTERFACE SPECIFICATION......................................................................213

9.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 213
9.2 STM-1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE ........................................................................ 214
9.2.1 STM-1 Electrical Interface with SFP ......................................................... 214
9.2.2 STM-1 Electrical Interface without SFP ..................................................... 215
9.2.3 Electrical Specification ........................................................................... 216
9.2.4 1+1 BB Redundant Switching Initiation .................................................... 216
9.3 STM-1 OPTICAL INTERFACE ............................................................................. 216
9.3.1 Card Overview...................................................................................... 216
9.3.2 Mechanical Dimension of SFP module....................................................... 217
9.3.3 SFP Module Used .................................................................................. 218
9.3.4 Electrical Specification ........................................................................... 218
MN.00278.E - 005 5
9.3.5 1+1 BB Redundant Switching Initiation .................................................... 219
9.4 STM-4 OPTICAL INTERFACE (STM4O) ................................................................ 220
9.4.1 Card Overview...................................................................................... 220
9.4.2 SFP Module Used .................................................................................. 221
9.4.4 Optical Specification .............................................................................. 222
9.4.5 1+1 SFP BB Redundant Switching Initiation of STM4O ............................... 223
9.4.6 Other Characteristics ............................................................................. 223
9.4.6.1 U(1) Jitter ............................................................................. 223
9.4.6.2 U(2) AISU ............................................................................. 225
9.4.6.3 U(3) BSIU ............................................................................. 225
9.5 GIGABIT ETHERNET SIGNAL INTERFACE (GE SW) ............................................... 226
9.5.1 Card Overview...................................................................................... 226
9.5.2 SFP Module Used .................................................................................. 227
9.5.4 Electrical Specification of GESW SFP ........................................................ 228
9.5.5 Network Feature List for SNMP-SN: V7.54 ................................................ 230
9.5.6 Link Aggregation Schematic Diagram....................................................... 233
9.6 AUXILIARY (AUX)/FAST ETHERNET (FE) SIGNAL INTERFACE ................................ 234
9.6.1 Radio User Channel (RUC)...................................................................... 234
9.6.2 Wayside Traffic (WS)............................................................................. 234
9.6.2.1 Jitter .................................................................................... 235
9.6.3 Synchronous Ethernet Characteristics ...................................................... 236
9.6.4 10/100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet Channel (FE) on GESW v1 ........................... 237
9.6.5 10/100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet Interface on AUX CONV............................... 237
9.6.6 Orderwire Signal Interface (OW) ............................................................. 238
9.6.7 Housekeeping Signal Interface (HK) ........................................................ 238
9.6.8 Rack Alarm Bus (RAB) ........................................................................... 239
9.7 LAN INTERFACE FOR NMS................................................................................ 239
9.8 RF INTERFACE................................................................................................ 240
10 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ON SDH ON RADIO .......................................................242

10.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 242
10.2 STM-1 INTERFACE .......................................................................................... 243
10.2.1 STM-1 Frame Structure ......................................................................... 243
10.3 NATIVE IP INTERFACE ..................................................................................... 246
10.3.1 GESW when set SDH/Ether to SDH.......................................................... 246
10.3.2 MAC Frame .......................................................................................... 247
10.3.3 MAC Frame Conversion .......................................................................... 247
10.3.4 VCAT/LCAT .......................................................................................... 248
10.4 RADIO FRAME STRUCTURE .............................................................................. 249
10.4.1 Radio Multi-Frame................................................................................. 249
10.5 STM-1 ON RADIO ........................................................................................... 250
10.5.1 STM-1 on Radio .................................................................................... 250
10.6 NATIVE IP ON SDH ......................................................................................... 251
10.6.1 Native IP on SDH .................................................................................. 251
11 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ON NATIVE IP ON

RADIO253
11.1 FIXED OR ADAPTIVE QAM SCHEME ................................................................... 253
11.2 DIGITAL PROCESSING INSIDE GESW ................................................................ 253
11.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................. 253
11.2.2 MAC Frame .......................................................................................... 254
6 MN.00278.E - 005
11.2.3 MAC Frame Conversion .......................................................................... 254
11.2.4 Time Slot Multiplexer............................................................................. 255
11.2.5 VCAT & LCAS ....................................................................................... 255
11.2.6 IF-Frame ............................................................................................. 256
11.2.7 LVDS frame ......................................................................................... 256
11.2.8 Information frame................................................................................. 256
11.2.9 Dynamic mapping (VCAT) ...................................................................... 259
11.3 RADIO FRAME STRUCTURE .............................................................................. 260
11.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................. 260
11.4 NATIVE IP ON RADIO ...................................................................................... 260
12 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ON ADAPTIVE MODULATION ........................................278

12.1 QAM MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW ........................................................................ 278
12.1.1 General ............................................................................................... 278
12.1.2 RQAM.................................................................................................. 278
12.1.3 PQAM .................................................................................................. 279
12.1.4 TQAM .................................................................................................. 279
12.2 QAM CONTROL LOOP ...................................................................................... 279
12.2.1 Signal Loop .......................................................................................... 279
12.3 INITIATOR OF MODULATION ORDER CHANGE..................................................... 282
12.4 QAM ORDER CHANGE TIMING .......................................................................... 283
12.5 QAM ORDER CHANGE FLOW ............................................................................. 284
13 RADIO PROTECTION SWITCHING (RPS) ................................................................289

13.1 RADIO PROTECTION SWITCHING FOR N+1 OR N+1&M+1.................................... 289
13.1.1 Radio Switching Capacity ....................................................................... 289
13.1.2 Switching Function ................................................................................ 290
13.1.3 Switching Section ................................................................................. 290
13.1.4 Switching Configuration ......................................................................... 290
13.1.5 Switching............................................................................................. 295
13.1.6 Automatic Switching Priority ................................................................... 296
13.1.7 Automatic DADE - Manual DADE - Control Signal....................................... 296
13.1.8 Switching Completion Time .................................................................... 296
13.1.9 Switching Initiator................................................................................. 296
13.1.10WTR function....................................................................................... 297
13.2 RADIO PROTECTION SWITCHING FOR GE LINK AGGREGATION............................. 297
13.2.1 Radio Switching .................................................................................... 297
13.2.2 m+0 Switching Stage ............................................................................ 298
13.2.3 Switching............................................................................................. 298
13.2.4 Circuit Switching................................................................................... 298
13.2.5 Switch Initiation ................................................................................... 298
14 SYNCHRONOUS EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT FUNCTION (SEMF) .............................301

14.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 301
14.2 WEB LT ......................................................................................................... 301
14.3 CONNECTION ................................................................................................. 302
14.4 NE ................................................................................................................ 303
14.5 HOUSE KEEPING ............................................................................................ 307
14.6 RACK ALARM BUS (RAB).................................................................................. 308
14.7 RACK ALARM BUS (RAB).................................................................................. 308
MN.00278.E - 005 7
15 MAIN FUNCTION OF WEB LT (SNMP-SV Firmware Version: V7.54) ........................309
15.1 MENU TREE FOR GESW V2 ............................................................................... 309
15.2 MENU TREE DESCRIPTION ............................................................................... 313
15.3 MENU TREE FOR GESW V1 ............................................................................... 319
15.4 MENU TREE DESCRIPTION ............................................................................... 321
15.5 CONDITION ................................................................................................... 325
15.6 CONTROL ...................................................................................................... 327
15.7 PROVISIONING .............................................................................................. 328
15.8 PROVISIONING .............................................................................................. 331
15.9 PM................................................................................................................ 335
15.10 PHYSICAL INVENTORY..................................................................................... 337
Section 2.
LISTS AND SERVICES 339
16 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................339
17 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................347
18 ASSISTANCE SERVICE............................................................................................351
8 MN.00278.E - 005
Section 1.
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION
1 GENERAL INFORMATION & CONFIGURATION

TREE
1.1 GENERAL
SIAE Microelettronica's latest TL series digital microwave radio family (TL family) is the IP/SDH high ca-
pacity microwave radio system designed for trunk/spur/access/nodal/mobile backhaul transmission appli-
cations.
TL family operates in the radio frequency bands of 4/5/U6/11 GHz with 40 MHz and 4/L6/U6/7/8/13 GHz
with 28/29/29.65/30 MHz RF channel spacing. TL radio is fully solid state and designed to meet ETSI,
R&TTE, ITU-T and ITU-R Recommendations for long haul and high capacity digital microwave radio system.
The modulation scheme used is fixed modulation with LDPC for STM-1 interface and fixed or adaptive mod-
ulation with LDPC FEC for Native IP interface.
The TL family can be used in various types of IP/SDH networks such as ring, media diversity, linear or nodal
configurations, and various transmission path conditions such as over water, over mountains, inter or intra
city routes.
This TL radio accepts combined ACCP/ACAP/CCDP operation with SD and TSD applying single or dual RF
band and single or dual/double terminal configuration having maximum sixteen (16) complete systems per
shelf.
Various types of optional auxiliary signal transmission are available such as 2.048 Mbit/s wayside traffic,
10/100BASE-TX FE and VF and 64 kbit/s digital service channels.
1.2 FEATURES
Main features are as follows:
• to compatible with the European Union's RoHS-6 (2011/65/EU RoHS2 directive) and WEEE, and
Safety in accordance with IEC EN60950-1:2005 (Second edition)
MN.00278.E - 005 9
• IP/SDH compatible radio for trunk / access / nodal / mobile backhaul application
• super high density packaging

Main system applications per shelf (1,800/2,200 mm rack available) are as follows;
a. N+1 or n+0 combined ACCP/ACAP/CCDP with/without SD/TSD

(Maximum 16 systems with single/dual RF band, Point-to-Point Terminal)
b. N+1 or n+0 & M+1 or m+0 combined ACCP/ACAP /CCDP with/without SD/TSD
(Maximum 16 systems with single/dual RF band, Point-to-Point Terminal)
c. N+1 or n+0 & M+1 or m+0 combined ACCP/ACAP /CCDP with/without SD/TSD
(Maximum 16 systems with single/dual RF band, Dual/Double Terminal)
d. 1+1 Hot-Standby (2 systems per rack, Point-to-Point Terminal)

e. 2-directional 1+1 Hot-Standby (4 systems per rack, Dual/Double Terminal)
For detailed system application, please refer to Tab.1 and Tab.2.
Warning: Availability of technical function and parameter in this Equipment specification depends on R&D
roadmap and SNMP-SV firmware release date. For details, please contact to SIAE Microelettronica market-
ing staff.
• High power amplifier using GaAs Field Effect Transistor (GaAs FET) with DPD
- +32 to +30 dBm (up to 512QAM, 4-8 GHz) for 30 MHz CS &
- +33 to +30 dBm (up to 512QAM, 4-8 GHz) for 40 MHz CS
• Lower power consumption.

< 200 W / 1+1, standard power output with SD for 4-13 GHz band, STM-1 interface
• Automatic/Manual Transmit Power Control (ATPC/MTPC) available
• Fixed or adaptive modulation applied

1.128QAM for 30 MHz CS and 64QAM for 40 MHz CS for STM-1 interface
2.QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256QAM/512QAM fixed modulation for Native IP interface for 30/40 MHz
CS system
3.QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256QAM/512QAM adaptive modulation (dynamic change of modulation

order automatically) for Native IP interface for 30/40 MHz CS system depending on propagation
condition
Warning: Two types of TRMD (TRMD v1/v2) and GESW (GESW v1/v2) cards are available. For detailed
available QAM for TRMD/GESW combination, please refer to paragraph 5.3. Transfer rate.
• High efficiency error correction using Low Density Parity Check (LDPC).
• In-Phase (IP) combiner type space diversity (R-SD) reception with automatic SD DADE'ing up to
150 ns without measuring instrument available.
• Transmit space diversity (T-SD) with two (2) antennas for severe propagation condition is also
available.
• 21-tap powerful adaptive time domain equalizer (ATDE)

10-tap fully digital linear transversal equalizer (LTE) with 10-tap decision feedback equalizer (DFE).
• High quality RPS with second criteria initiator on fade (BER ALM before/after FEC)
• STM-1 electrical interface is standard configuration. And also STM-1/4 optical interface and/or Na-
tive IP interface using M+0 link aggregation are available as an option. In addition, baseband card
mixture of STM-1 electrical/optical, STM-4 optical and Gigabit Ethernet electrical/optical interface
is available in the same shelf.
• 1+1 baseband redundant operation available 1

1+1 STM-1 baseband interface is available only for 2,200 mm ETSI rack by addition of optional Ex-
tension BB shelf and BRSW and BB INTF (Y) cards.
• One platform and versatile system upgrade available by license key

RF high power output, with XPIC, with SD receiver function, TX Overdrive, adaptive modulation
scheme, single/dual/double terminal configuration etc. is configurable by license key without any
replacement of hardware excluding R-SD filter units.
1 STM-1 optical interface with MSP is not available for this TL (SNMP-SV) radio equipment.
10 MN.00278.E - 005
• Optional 2x2 Mbit/s wayside traffic on BBINTF card / RF CH available for STM-1 interface and
2x10Base-T/100Base-Tx FE on AUX CONV using 64 kbit/s or 2.048 Mbit/s wayside traffic signal.
• Easier on-site test and maintenance without measuring instruments

Automatic IF-IF response adjustment, automatic SD DADE adjustment, automatic XPIC DADE ad-
justment, automatic baseband DADE adjustment and built-in delay equalization on WebLT available
• Event management facility

Alarms and status of the equipment is reported by SEMF (Synchronous Equipment
Management Function) using the Digital Communications Channel (DCC).
• Configuration management facility

NE configuration is retrieved by the network management terminal and items such as NE ID, and
alarm thresholds can be set as "provisioning".
• Resource management facility

Physical inventory such as unit name, revision can be read by the SEMF.
• Performance management facility

Traffic performance of every hop can be monitored on each working RF Channel.
1.Monitoring items on TRMD are BBE, ES, SES, UAS, CSES, ESR, SESR, BBER and OFS and also
analog monitoring of TX power output and RX/SD received level.
2.Monitoring items on STM-1 BB INTF are BBE, ES, SES, UAS, CSES, ESR, SESR, BBER and OFS for
STM1RS LINE/RADIO side.
3.Monitoring items on SV are PSAC, FSAD, PSRC and FSRD.
• Security management facility

Several layers for maintenance are provided to avoid mis-operation.
• SNMP and HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol) NMS

Supervisory unit (SV) is composed both an SNMP embedded agent and a web server. These facilities
provide integrated NMS environment among TL and various types of equipment such as MUX, ADM,
routers and another vender's radio equipment thanks to SNMP and good accessibility by HTTP which
is not dependent on management platform.
Tab.1 - System Application, Rack and Shelf Configuration
TRMD shelf used Ext-BB

System application a ETSI rack b Baseband interface
type-1 type-2 type-3 type-4 type-5 shelf c
ACCP
N+1/N+0 ACAP 1 1
CCDP
ACCP
N+1 or N+0 &
M+1 or M+0 ACAP 1 1
P-P
CCDP
STM-1 electrical and/or
ACCP STM-1 optical and/or
N+1/N+0 & Option
STM-4 optical and/or Gi-
M+1/M+0 ACAP 1 1 gabit Ethernet
Dual/Double
CCDP
1+1 HSB P-P 1 1
1+1 HSB
1 1
Dual/Double
a. Type-1/2/3/4/5 setting of Basic shelf is set by WebLT

b. Rack height is 1,800 mm or 2,200 mm available on customer’s request
c. Ext-BB shelf for 1+1 baseband redundant is only available for 2,200 mm ETSI rack.
For detailed rack and unit configuration for all applications, please refer to chapter 6 MECHANICAL SPECI-
FICATION.
MN.00278.E - 005 11
Tab.2 - Available System Operation
Typical RF CH Allocation/Recommended Working

Model Switching Operation Remarks
CH No.
1. Minimum RF CH spacing
40 MHz for 4/5/U6/8/
ACCP
11G
Basic Plan
30 MHz for 4/L6/7/8/
13G
2. With/without R-SD
ACAP 3. With/without T-SD
Basic Plan
4. SV for RPS1
5. Mixed ACCP/ACAP/CCDP
6. CCDP with XPIC
N+0/N+1
Type 1 P-to-P 7. Single/Dual RF band
16 sys
CCDP
Basic Plan
Mixed Plan
40 MHz for 4/5/U6/8/
11G
30 MHz for 4/L6/7/8/
13G
2. With/without R-SD by
addition of SDRX module
3. SV for GP1/2-RPS
4. Mixed ACCP/ACAP/CCDP
5. CCDP with XPIC
N+1/N+0 & Mixture of 6. Single/Dual RF Band

M+1/M+0 ACCP
Type 2
P-to-P ACAP
16sys CCDP
12 MN.00278.E - 005
Typical RF CH Allocation/Recommended Working
Model Switching Operation Remarks
CH No.
40 MHz for 4/5/U6/8/11G
ACCP
30 MHz for 4/L6/7/8/13G
Basic Plan
2. With/without R-SD
3. With/without T-SD
4. SV for GP1/2-RPS
ACAP
Basic Plan 5. Mixed ACCP/ACAP/CCDP
6. CCDP with XPIC
7. Single/Dual RF Band
N+1/N+0&
M+1/M+0
Type 3
DT
16 sys
CCDP
Basic Plan
Mixed Plan
40 MHz for 4/5/U6/8/11G
30 MHz for 4/L6/7/8/13G
2. With/without Hybrid SD
1+1
Type 4 1+1 HSB 3. Only 1+1 protected
P to P
4. CCDP with XPIC
1+1 2-Direction
Type 5
Tree 1+1 HSB
MN.00278.E - 005 13
Configuration tree of TL rack, shelf, block, unit and card
Fig.1 - General tree
14 MN.00278.E - 005
Configuration tree of radio equipment type, unit and card
Fig.2 - N+1 or n+0 mixed ACCP/ACAP/CCDP operation

point-to-point application
MN.00278.E - 005 15
Fig.3 - N+1 or n+0 & M+1 or m+0 mixed ACCP/ACAP/CCDP operation
point-to-point application
16 MN.00278.E - 005
dual/double terminal application
MN.00278.E - 005 17
Configuration tree of TRDM card
Fig.5 - TRDM card configuration
Configuration tree of Gigabit Ethernet Interface
Fig.6 - Gigabit Ethernet interface configuration

Warning: Installation of both GESW v1 and GESW v2 in the same shelf is NOT allowed.
18 MN.00278.E - 005
Configuration tree of BBINTF (SPC) card
Fig.7 - BBINTF (SPC) card configuration
Configuration tree of optional Ext-BB shelf and card
Fig.8 - Optional Ext-BB shelf and card configuration
MN.00278.E - 005 19
Configuration tree of optional module on AUX INTF
Fig.9 - Optional module configuration on AUX INTF
Configuration tree of optional module on SV
Fig.10 - Optional module configuration on SV card
BRU Block
To specify the BRU block, it is necessary to confirm the detail requirement as follows:
- operating frequency band
- assigned RF channel number and frequency
- system configuration (GP1-RPS or GP1/GP2-RPS)
- operation mode: ACCP, ACAP or CCDP operation
- required TRMD adaptors
- with/without receive SD
- with/without transmit SD
- with/without BEF for innermost channels.
VENT Block
To specify the VENT Block, it is necessary to confirm the detailed requirement as follows:
- assigned RF channel numbers

- required VENT unit quantities (1 VENT unit for 2xTRMD cards)
20 MN.00278.E - 005
TRMD Block
To specify the TRMD, it is necessary to confirm the detailed requirement as follows:
- Operating frequency band and RF channel number
- Selection of TRMD v1 and TRMD v2
- Standard power or high power output
- TX overdrive Enable/Disable
- Operation mode: ACCP or ACAP or CCDP operation
- Optional SD function or none
- Optional Adaptive Modulation or Fixed Modulation
- Optional Highest Modulation scheme
- Optional WSS & WSR
Warning: Optional function is available by license key with cost.
BB INTF-X Block
To specify the BB INTF (X) block, it is necessary to describe the detailed requirement as follows:
- Required baseband interface unit such as BBINTF (STM1E/O), BBINTF (STM1E), GE ADPT and
BBINTF(SPC), and its quantity.
- Required SFP modules and quantity
COM Block
To specify the COM block, it is necessary to describe the detailed requirement as follows:
- Terminal configuration: Point-to-Point, Dual or Double terminal

- System application: N+1, N+1 & M+1 or 1+1 Hot-Standby
- Required optional unit name such as BBINTF (STM4O), GE SW, AUX INTF, AUX CONV and BB EXT
ADPT, and its quantity.
- Selection of GESW v1 or GESW v2
- Single-feed or double-feed PS system
- Required module on AUX INTF (Analog or G.703 or V-11) and its quantity
- Required RAB module on SV or none
BBINTF-Y Block
To specify the BBINTF-Y block, it is necessary to describe the detailed requirement as follows:
- Required optional Extension BB shelf
- Required BRSW card and its quantity
- Required baseband interface card (BBINTF(STM1E/O), BBINTF (STM1E) and its quantities
MN.00278.E - 005 21
2 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
2.1 FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
Fig.11 shows the typical rack layout for TL IP/SDH radio for 5+1 L6G and 10+0 11 G dual band N+1 op-
eration and Fig.12, Fig.13, Fig.14, Fig.15, Fig.16, Fig.17, Fig.18 and Fig.19 show the functional block dia-
gram of TL IP/SDH microwave radio system for baseband interfaces such as STM-1 electrical/optical, STM-
4 optical and Gigabit Ethernet link aggregation.
TL IP/SDH radio is composed of five (5) functional blocks and additional Extension baseband (Ext-BB) shelf
block for 1+1 STM-1 baseband redundancy as an option. Six (6) blocks are RF branching network (BRU)
block, ventilator (VENT) block, transceiver-modem (TRMD) block, baseband interface-X (BB INTF-X) block,
Common block and baseband interface-Y (BB INTF-Y) block.
2.2 BRU BLOCK
The RF branching network block is composed of transmit-receive duplexer (DUP) and adaptor (ADPT) for
SD reception, RF filters (BPF and BEF), circulators (CIR) and connection cables between DUP/ADPT and
CIR, and connection cables between CIRs. Antenna port of DUP/ADPT is waveguide type and maximum
eight (8) waveguide antenna ports are available.
RF branching network arrangement of each RF channel is loss equalized type as standard and RF BPF unit
is composed of one (1) BPF filter and one (1) circulator (CIR) for TX, RX and SD RX each. One BPF unit is
directly plug-in'ed to the TR ADPT without any semi-rigid cable. Maximum BPF quantity is 48 per basic
shelf.
2.3 VENT BLOCK
Two (2) ventilators are installed in a VENT unit and one (1) VENT unit is installed to the TRMD Adaptor (TR
ADPT).
2.4 BB INTF-X BLOCK
In BB INTF-X block, STM-1 electrical interface (BB INTF (STM1E/O)) card with electrical SFP module is as
standard. Optional four (4) types of baseband interface cards are available, BBINTF (STM1E/O) with optical
SFP module, BBINTF (STM1E) without SFP, Gigabit Ethernet adapter (GE ADPT) for GE SW card and shared
protection channel (BBINTF(SPC)). And also baseband interface card mixture is available in a same shelf.
22 MN.00278.E - 005
2.5 COMMON BLOCK
There are six (6) cards in the Common block. Supervisory & controller (SV) card, auxiliary interface (AUX
INTF), Gigabit Ethernet switch (GE SW) with 1000BASE-T/SX/LX SFP module for link aggregation, STM-4
optical interface (STM4O), auxiliary converter (AUX CONV) and baseband extension adapter (BB EXT
ADPT).
2.6 EXT-BB SHELF
In case of 1+1 BB redundant operation for STM-1 electrical/optical interface, additional Ext-BB shelf and
BBINTF-Y block cards are necessary. Please note that this application is only available for 2,200 mm ETSI
standard rack.
2.7 BBINTF-Y BLOCK
In the BBINTF-Y block, Four (4) types of cards are available. BBINTF(STM1E/O) with STM-1 electrical/op-
tical SFP module and BBINTF(STM1E) without SFP, shard protection channel (BBINTF(SPC)) and baseband
branching switch (BRSW).
Fig.12, Fig.13, Fig.14, Fig.15, Fig.16, Fig.17, Fig.18 and Fig.19 shows the functional block diagram for var-
ious baseband interfaces.
MN.00278.E - 005 23
Fig.11 - Typical rack layout
24 MN.00278.E - 005
B as ic S c helf
B B IN TF-X P R T TR M D B RU
DUP
BPF
V -pol.
SEL
STM1E MOD TX
S TM1
W SS W SS RPS
W SR W SR
AD PT
BPF BPF
RX V -pol.
H YB
DEM
SD
DUP
H -pol.
B B IN TF-X W 1 TR M D
AD PT
H -pol.
BPF
SEL
STM1E S TM1 MOD TX
W SS RPS
W SR
BPF
W SS
W SR H YB RX
DEM
BPF
SD
BPF
SEL
STM1O S TM1
MOD TX
W SS W SS RPS
W SR W SR
BPF
RX
H YB
DEM
BPF
SD
BPF
SEL
STM1E S TM1 MOD TX

W SS RPS
W SR
BPF BPF
W SS
RX
H YB
W SR DEM
SD
: O ptional c ard or func tion
To /Fro m o th e r w o rkin g C H
Fig.12 - Functional Block Diagram for STM-1 interface
MN.00278.E - 005 25
E x t-B B S helf B as ic S helf
B RS W
B B IN TF-X TR M D B RU
P RT
DUP
PR T
BPF
V -pol.
SEL
SEL
S TM1
MOD TX
STM1E W SS RPS
W SS W SR
BPF BPF
AD PT
W SR RX V -pol.
SEL
H YB
DEM
B B IN TF-Y
SD
DUP
H -pol.
S TM1
W SS RPS
W SR
AD PT
H -pol.
B B IN TF-X W1 TR M D
W1
BPF
SEL
SEL
S TM1 MOD TX
STM1E
RPS
W SS
BPF
W SR W SS
RX
SEL
H YB
W SR DEM
B B IN TF-Y
BPF
SD
S TM1
W SS RPS
W SR
BPF
W2
SEL
SEL
S TM1 MOD TX
STM1E RPS
W SS
BPF
W SR W SS
RX
SEL
H YB
W SR DEM
B B IN TF-Y
BPF
SD
S TM1
W SS RPS
W SR
Fig.13 - Functional Block Diagram for STM-1 electrical 1+1 redundancy
26 MN.00278.E - 005
E x t-B B S c helf B as ic S helf
P RT
B B IN TF-X P RT TR M D B RU
P R T-X
DUP
BPF
V -pol.
SEL
STM1O MOD TX
S TM1
W SS W SS RPS
W SR W SR
BPF BPF
AD PT
RX V -pol.
H YB
DEM
B B IN TF-Y
SD
P R T-Y
DUP
H -pol.
STM1O S TM1
W SS W SS RPS
W SR W SR
AD PT
H -pol.
W1
W 1-X
BPF
SEL
STM1O S TM1
MOD TX
W SS W SS RPS
W SR W SR
BPF
RX
H YB DEM
B B IN TF-Y
BPF
SD
W 1-Y
STM1O S TM1
W SS W SS RPS
W SR W SR
W2
W 2-X
BPF
SEL
STM1O S TM1
MOD TX
W SS W SS RPS
W SR W SR
BPF
RX
H YB
DEM
B B IN TF-Y
BPF
SD
W 2-Y
STM1O S TM1
W SS W SS RPS
W SR W SR
To /Fro m o th e r w o rkin g C H : O ptional c ard or func tion

Fig.14 - Functional block diagram for STM-1 Optical with 1+1 Line Protection
MN.00278.E - 005 27
B as ic S helf
DUP
BPF
V -pol.
SEL
S TM1 MOD TX
RPS
AD PT
BPF BPF
W SS
RX V -pol.
H YB
W SR DEM
SD
DUP
H -pol.
S TM4 O B B IN TF-X TR M D
AD PT
W1
H -pol.
BPF
S TM -4 M U X/
SEL
S TM -4 DE M U X S TM1 MOD TX
O ptic al
RPS
BPF
W SS
RX
H YB
W SR DEM
BPF
SD
BPF
SEL
S TM1 MOD TX
RPS
BPF
W SS
RX
H YB
W SR DEM
BPF
SD
BPF
SEL
S TM1 MOD TX
RPS
BPF
W SS
RX
H YB
W SR DEM
BPF
SD
S TM1 E -X W4 TR M D
BPF
SEL
S TM1 MOD TX
RPS
BPF BPF
W SS
RX
H YB
W SR DEM
SD
Fig.15 - Functional block diagram for STM-4 Optical Interface
28 MN.00278.E - 005
: O ptional c ard or func tion B as ic S helf
G E S W v1 G E AD P T W1 TR M D B RU
DUP
BPF
1 0 0 0 B AS E
L2SW V CA T Radio V -pol.
SEL
P o rt1 MOD TX
FRM
A DPT
AD PT
BPF
P o rt2
H YB
GE RX V -pol.
DEM
P HY
BPF
FE
SD
DUP
H -pol.
AD PT
G E AD P T W2 TR M D
H -pol.
BPF
SEL
Radio
MOD TX
FRM
A DPT
BPF
RX
H YB
DEM
BPF
SD
BPF
Radio
SEL
MOD TX
FRM
A DPT
CLK BPF
RX
H YB
IN DEM
SY NC
BPF
OU T
SD
BPF
SEL
Radio
S DH /E ther= S D MOD TX
FRM
64/128Q A M A DPT
BPF
S DH /E ther= E ther
RX
H YB
F ix ed/A daptive DEM

BPF
16/32/64/128
SD
256Q A M (FPGA upgraded)
Fig.16 - Functional block diagram for Native IP Interface

In case of GESW v1
MN.00278.E - 005 29
: O ptional c ard or func tion B as ic S helf
G E S W v2 G E AD P T W1 TR M D B RU
DUP
BPF
1 0 0 0 B AS E
L2SW V CA T Radio V -pol.
SEL
P o rt1 MOD TX
FRM
A DPT
AD PT
BPF
P o rt2
H YB
GE RX V -pol.
DEM
P HY
BPF
P o rt3
SD
DUP
H -pol.
P o rt4
AD PT
H -pol.
BPF
SEL
Radio
MOD TX
FRM
A DPT
BPF
RX
H YB
DEM
BPF
SD
BPF
Radio
SEL
MOD TX
FRM
A DPT
CLK BPF
RX
H YB
IN DEM
SY NC
BPF
OU T
SD
W ebLT QA M Setting
& PC f or eac h RF G E AD P T W4 TR M D
BPF
SEL
Radio
S DH /E ther= S D MOD TX
FRM
N ot applic able A DPT
BPF
S DH /E ther= E ther
RX
H YB
F ix ed/A daptive DEM

BPF
Q P S K /8/16/32/64/
SD
128/256/512Q A M

In case of GESW v2
30 MN.00278.E - 005
B as ic S helf
SPC P R T TR M D B RU
DUP
BPF
V -pol.
SEL
MOD TX
AD PT RPS
AD PT
BPF
RX
H YB
V -pol.
DEM
BPF
SD
DUP
H -pol.
B B IN TF-X TR M D
AD PT
W1
H -pol.
BPF
SEL
STM1E S TM MOD TX
W SS RPS
W SR
BPF
W SS RX
H YB
W SR DEM
BPF
SD
G E S W v2 B B IN TF-X W2 TR M D
BPF
1 0 0 0 B AS E
L2SW V CA T
SEL
Radio S TM MOD TX
P o rt1 STM1E
FRM
W SS RPS
W SR
BPF
P o rt2 W SS
RX
H YB
GE W SR DEM
P HY
BPF
P o rt3
SD
P o rt4
S yn c C L K G E AD P T W3 TR M D
IN
BPF
SY NC
SEL
Radio MOD TX
OU T
FRM
A DPT
BPF
RX
H YB
DEM
BPF
SD
W ebLT QA M Setting
& PC f or eac h RF
S DH /E ther= S DH G E AD P T W4 TR M D
N ot applic able
BPF
Radio
SEL
S DH /E ther= E ther MOD TX

FRM
F ix ed/A daptive A DPT
Q P S K /8/16/32/64/
BPF
RX
H YB
128/256/512Q A M DEM
BPF
SD
Warning: When N+1 RPS for SDH system is activated, Native IP system using protection channel is
switched off as low priority traffic.
Warning: 155M interface between SPC and TRMD is employed for GESW V1/V2
Fig.18 - Functional block diagram for Native IP and STM-1 hybrid interface
(in case of GESW v2)
MN.00278.E - 005 31
DUP
BPF
V -pol.
SEL
STM1E MOD TX
S TM1
W SS W SS RPS
W SR W SR
AD PT
BPF BPF
RX V -pol.
H YB
DEM
Eastern Direction
SD
DUP
H -pol.
AD PT
H -pol.
BPF
SEL
STM1E S TM1 MOD TX

W SS RPS
W SR
BPF
W SS
RX
H YB
W SR DEM BPF
SD
BPF
SEL
STM1O S TM1
MOD TX
W SS W SS RPS
W SR W SR
BPF
RX
H YB
DEM
BPF
SD
TR M D PR T B B IN TF -X
DUP
BPF
V -pol.
SEL
TX MO D S TM1 STM1E
R PS W SS W SS
W SR W SR
AD PT
BPF
V -pol. RX
H YB
D EM
Western Direction
BPF
SD
DUP
H -pol.
AD PT
TR M D W1 B B IN TF -X
H -pol.
BPF
SEL
TX MO D S TM1
STM1E
R PS W SS
W SR
BPF
W SS
RX
H YB
D EM W SR
BPF
SD
TR M D W2 B B IN TF -X
BPF
SEL
TX MO D S TM1 STM1E
R PS W SS
W SR
BPF BPF
W SS
RX
H YB
D EM W SR
SD
Fig.19 - Functional block diagram for STM-1 interface, double terminal
Fig.20 shows the functional block diagram of BB INTF (SDH) card.
32 MN.00278.E - 005
2.8 BB INTF (STM1E/O)
The STM-1 electrical interface (STM1E) is used as standard and BB INTF(STM1) is composed of six (6) func-
tional blocks below:
- STM-1 signal interface
- wayside traffic on SOH interface
- wayside traffic on RFCOH interface
- data communication channel interface

- inter-Card connection to/from TRMD, other BB INTF and SV cards
- digital processing circuit inside FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array).
2.9 MODULATION APPLIED
In case of STM-1 or STM-4 interface, only 64/128QAM modulation scheme is applied, not adaptive modu-
lation, that is, 64QAM for 40 MHz RF channel spacing (CS) and 128QAM for 28/29/29.65/30 MHz CS based
on RF band basically in accordance with ITU-R F series recommendation.
2.10 STM-1
STM-1 electrical or optical signal is converted to the 155.52 Mbit/s uni-polar data and clock signals after
SFP (Small Form Pluggable) module and fed to the line side digital processing circuit (LINE DPC).
2.11 WSR
Wayside traffic signal on RFCOH (WSR) is digitally signal processed in WSR DPC after Bipolar-Unipolar con-
version circuit (B/U) and fed to TRMD card.
2.12 WSS
Wayside traffic signal on SOH (WSS) is digitally signal processed in WSS DPC after Bipolar-Unipolar con-
version circuit (B/U) and fed to line side digital processing circuit (LINE DPC).
MN.00278.E - 005 33
2.13 DCC
Data communication channel (DCC) signal to/from GP1 and GP2 group is fed to the line side digital pro-
cessing circuit through DCC INTF.
2.14 LINE DPC
In the LINE DPC, STM-1 is frame synchronized and SOH drop of DCC (D1 to D3) and orderwire (E1) bits
of STM-1 LINE side are made and after that STM-1 signal is fed to radio side digital processing circuit (RA-
DIO DPC).
2.15 RADIO DPC
In the RADIO DPC, STM-1 signal is fed to unipolar stage switch (SW) with uni-directional and bi-directional
switching function for radio protection switch (RPS) and SOH insertion of DCC (D1 to D3), WSS and order-
wire (E1) bits of STM-1 RADIO side and after that STM-1 signal is fed to TRMD card and/or BB INTF card
of other RF channel when RPS is activated. SW is controlled by SW CONT.
2.16 SW CONT
Switch control (SW CONT) is initiated from the information from TRMD and control signal and control an-
swer back signals of STM-1, WSS and WSR are transferred to/from BB INTF (P) and BB INTF (Working).
STM-1 signal between protection and working channel is 4 x 38.88 Mbit/s uni-polar streams.
The STM1 card in the receiver side performs the inverse processing as the transmit side circuits.
34 MN.00278.E - 005
Fig.20 - Functional block diagram of BB INTF (SDH)
Fig.21 and Fig.22 show the functional block diagram of GE SW card.
MN.00278.E - 005 35
2.17 BUILT-IN NATIVE IP SYSTEM
TL radio using GE SW card realizes the built-in carrier-grade Native IP system. TL has the basic Ethernet
feature function such as MAC, VLAN, QoS, RSTP, rate control and also supports link aggregation in accord-
ance with IEEE802.3ad.
Three (3) types of modulation schemes are settable on WebLT and two (2) types of circuit blocks are pro-
vided on GESW PCB as shown in Fig.21 and Fig.22.
1. Native IP on SDH (standard)
2. Native IP with fixed modulation (optional by license key)
3. Native IP with adaptive modulation (optional by license key)
In case of adaptive modulation, QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM modulation with LDPC is applied de-

pending on GESW version.
Warning: When GESW v1 is installed, only Native IP on SDH is available.
Warning: For detailed available QAM using TRMD and GESW combination, refer to paragraph 5.3 Transfer
rate.
2.18 LINK AGGREGATION
Gigabit Ethernet signal is transferred by using link aggregation, that is, M+0 RF channels. Maximum M is
eight (8) for each RPS group, GP1 and GP2 and automatic cut off and restoration of any one of working
channels is available.
2.19 DATA RATE / RF
In case of Native IP on SDH using GESW v1 card 2, Gigabit Ethernet signal can be distributed and link ag-
gregated to/from TRMD card via. GE ADPT by pseudo STM-1 frame structure. Interface between GE SW
and TRMD is 155.52 Mbit/s for all RF channels and data rate is approximately 150 Mbit/s for all RF channels.
In case of Native IP on Radio, Gigabit Ethernet signal can be distributed and link aggregated to/from TRMD
via. GE ADPT by proprietary information frame structure. Interface between GE SW and TRMD via GE ADPT
is 466.56 Mbit/s LVDS 8b10b coded signal including Gigabit Ethernet signal, QAM management signal and
empty bits for all RF channels. Information bit for each RF channel is different depending on fixed or adap-
tive modulation scheme. For details, please refer Chapter 11 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ON NATIVE IP ON
RADIO.
2 In case of GESW v2 card, there is no Native IP on SDH application, only Native IP on Radio application.
36 MN.00278.E - 005
2.20 AUX
Auxiliary signal transmission for Native IP interface such as orderwire (OW), data communication channel
(DCC), radio service channel (RSC), ATPC, route identification and so on is transferred on RFCOH.
2.21 SYNC
Supported network synchronization for GE SW card is as follows;
1. SyncE
2. IEEE1588 3
3. Non network sync mode
Synchronization clock input is T3 EXT CLK IN, 2.048 Mbit/s and clock output is T0 EXT CLK OUT, 2.048
Mbit/s.
3 IEEE1588 is NOT supported for GESW v1 card and SyncE is NOT supported for 1000Base-T.
MN.00278.E - 005 37
Fig.21 - Functional block diagram of GE SW v1 card
38 MN.00278.E - 005
Fig.22 - Functional block diagram of GE SW v2 card
Fig.23, Fig.24, Fig.25 and Fig.26 show the functional block diagram of TRMD card.
MN.00278.E - 005 39
2.22 TDPC WHEN SET SDH/ETHER TO SDH
In the transmit digital processing (DPC), incoming 155.52 Mbits/s LVDS STM-1 signal is changed to x n
unipolar streams after speed converter (SPD COV) and encoder (ENC) circuit. SPD CONV and ENC have
the function of D/A conversion for multi-state modulation and also insertion of radio frame complementary
overhead bits (RFCOH) by justification techniques.
ENC also includes the processing of low density parity check (LDPC) type FEC. Using LDPC method, high
spectrum utilization and high coding gain can be achieved.
2.23 TDPC WHEN SET SDH/ETHER TO ETHER
In DPC, Ethernet packet and QAM management signals are detected from incoming 466.560 Mbits/s LVDS
8b10b coded signal. TX side digital processing circuits are controlled by QAM management bit. After that
Ethernet packet signal is changed to x n unipolar streams after speed converter (SPD COV) and encoder
(ENC) circuit. SPD CONV and ENC have the function of D/A conversion for multi-state modulation and also
insertion of RFCOH bits by justification techniques.
ENC also includes the processing of low density parity check (LDPC) type FEC. Using LDPC method, high
spectrum utilization and high coding gain can be achieved.
2.24 MOD
The MOD has five (5) functional sections: digital filter (FIL), delay equalizer (DEQL), digital pre-distortion
(DPD), QAM modulator (MOD) and mixer with 1st local oscillator (MIX & 1st IF LOC). FIL is multi-tap cosine
roll-off full digital filter and DEQL is built-in delay equalizer dependent on RF channel separation adjustable
on WebLT. DPD is non-linear compensation circuit for high power amplifier having DPD feedback loop.
The modulator (MOD) circuit accepts parallel unipolar data signals and clock from the digital processing
circuit. In case of 40 MHz CS system, two n-level base band signals are fed to modulator after 25% root-
Nyquist digital filter to shape the base band waveform and symbol rate is 32.064 Mbit/s. For 28/29/29.65/
30 MHz CS system, two n-level base band signals are fed to modulator after 20% root-Nyquist digital filter
to shape the base band waveform and symbol rate is 24.192 Mbit/s
2.25 TX
The transmitter (TX) section accepts QAM'ed RF signal applying frequency up-conversion technique.
The QAM modulated RF signal is power amplified by GaAs FET class AB high power amplifiers with digital
pre-distorter (DPD) and automatic level control circuits and fed to the transmit RF branching network
(BRU). Digital pre-distorter (DPD) has DPD feedback loop for adaptive compensation of high power ampli-
fier non-linear distortion.
The transmitter local carrier supply employs RF oscillator with a crystal controlled synthesizer type PLL.
Transmitter local frequency is tunable with half- band coverage (quarter-band for 11/13 GHz band) of the
specified RF band.
40 MN.00278.E - 005
2.26 RX
The received RF signal from the antenna is fed to the receive RF branching network where it is separated
from the transmitted signal and bandpass filtered to suppress unwanted interference.
In the main receiver, the modulated RF signal is amplified by a super low noise RF amplifier. The amplified
RF signal is down-converted to IF (844 MHz/140 MHz) and amplified to a specified level by the AGC IF
amplifier and equalized for group delay and amplitude response due to static transmit-receive overall
transmission line. The IF signal is sent to the demodulator after 2nd IF down-conversion (140 MHz/32.064
MHz).
As countermeasures against propagation path conditions, Space Diversity (SD) circuit is fitted as standard
and SD function is enabled by license key on WebLT. RF signal from the SD antenna is down-converted to
the baseband signal using the same method as in the main receiver. The SD baseband signal is combined
with the main baseband signal using endless phase shifter under the control of the In-Phase SD combiner
control circuit in baseband.
The receiver local carrier supply is the same as that of transmitter local carrier supply. Receiver local carrier
signal is supplied both main receiver and SD receiver.
2.27 DEM
The demodulator is composed of analog-digital converter (ADC), roll-off filter (FIL), cross polarization in-
terference canceller (XPIC), adaptive time domain equalizer (ADTE), carrier recovery (CR), decision (DEC),
LDPC decoder and QAM management circuit.
In case of 40 MHz CS system, the demodulator (DEM) accepts the 32.064 MHz QAM modulated signal from
IF circuit. The demodulation method is coherent detection and instantaneous decision to recover two (2)
n-level base band signals.
In case of 30 MHz CS system, the demodulator (DEM) accepts the 24.192 MHz QAM modulated signal from
IF circuit. The demodulation method is coherent detection and instantaneous decision to recover two (2)
m-level base band signals.
The two detected n (m)-level base band signals are sent to the receiver digital processing circuit (RDPC)
and fed to BB INTF or GE SW card after speed converter (SPD CONV).
In case of Native IP interface with fixed or adaptive modulation, maximum permissible QAM information
(P-QAM) is determines in QAM management circuit and output to GESW card.
2.28 BRU
The RF branching network block is composed of transmit-receive duplexer (DUP) and adaptor (ADPT) for
SD reception, RF filters (BPF and/or BEF), circulators (CIR) and connection cables between DUP/ADPT and
CIR and connection cables between CIRs. Antenna port of DUP/ADPT is waveguide type and maximum
available port number is eight (8).
RF branching network arrangement of each RF channel is loss equalized type as standard and RF BPF unit
is composed of one (1) BPF filter and one (1) circulator (CIR) for TX, RX and SD RX each. One BPF unit is
directly plug-in'ed to the TR ADPT without any semi-rigid cable.
MN.00278.E - 005 41
Fig.23 - Functional block diagram of TRMD v1 transmitter side
42 MN.00278.E - 005
Fig.24 - Functional block diagram of TRDM v2 transmitter side
MN.00278.E - 005 43
Fig.25 - Functional block diagram of TRDM v1 receiver side
44 MN.00278.E - 005
Fig.26 - Functional block diagram of TRDM v2 receiver side
Fig.27, Fig.28 and Fig.29 show the functional block diagram of auxiliary signal transmission.
MN.00278.E - 005 45
2.29 AUXILIARY SIGNAL (AUX)
Optional auxiliary signal transmission for STM-1 interface and Native IP interface is as follows:
• Auxiliary signal transmission for STM-1 interface
- 1 x 2.048 Mbit/s Wayside traffic (WSS) on SOH

- 1 x 2.048 Mbit/s Wayside traffic (WSR) on RFCOH
- Orderwire (OW) signal on SOH
- Data Communication Channel (DCC) signal on SOH
- Max. 3 channels of Radio User Channel (RUC) on RFCOH
• Auxiliary signal transmission for Native IP interface (GESW v1)
- Orderwire (OW) signal on RFCOH
- Data Communication Channel (DCC) signal on RFCOH
• Auxiliary signal transmission for Native IP interface (GESW v2)
- Orderwire (OW) signal on RFCOH
- Data Communication Channel (DCC) signal on RFCOH
• Auxiliary signal transmission using AUX CONV card
- 2 x 10/100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet (FE) signal using 3x64 kbit/s RUC

4
- 2 x 10/100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet (FE) signal using 1xWS traffic
2.30 AUX SIGNAL INTERFACE
Auxiliary signal interface is as follows:
• WS signal: On BB INTF card, 1.0/2.3 coaxial connector
• OW signal: On SV card, 3.5 mm mini-jack
• 4W-OW signal: On BWB, Multi-pin connector
• DCC signal: On SV card, RJ-45 jack

• RUC signal: On BWB, Multi-pin connector
• FE signal: On AUX CONV, RJ-45 jack using 64 kbit/s or WS traffic
4 Only available when BBINTF card is installed.
46 MN.00278.E - 005
2.31 RUC
When radio user channel is needed, three (3) kind of signal interface is available by addition of module(s),
voice interface (VF), 64 kbit/s ITU-T G.703 and 64 kbit/s V.11 interface. Maximum 3 channels and mixed
interface is available.
MN.00278.E - 005 47
Fig.27 - Schematic Block Diagram of Auxiliary signal transmission for STM-1interface
48 MN.00278.E - 005
Fig.28 - Schematic Block Diagram of Auxiliary signal transmission for Native IP interface
(GESW v1)
MN.00278.E - 005 49
(GESW v2)
50 MN.00278.E - 005
3 RADIO FREQUENCY PLAN AND ANTENNA SYSTEM
3.1 GENERAL
The radio frequency plan is in accordance with ITU-R Recommendations as follows:
Tab.3 - ITU-R Recommendations
ITU-R RF Band RF abbreviation Type a ITU-R Recommendation F.xxx
4 GHz (3,600-4,200 MHz) 4G - 4G Type1 F.635-6 Annex-1 (2001-05)
2&4 GHz (3,800-4,200 MHz) U4G - 4G Type2 F.382-8 (2006-04)
4 GHz (3,600-4,200 MHz) 4G - 4G Type3 F.635-6 (2001-05)
4 GHz (3,600-4,200 MHz) 4G - 4G Type4 F.635-6 (2001-05)
U4 GHz (4,400-5,000 MHz) 5G - 5G Type1 F.1099-4 Annex-1 (2007-09)
L6 GHz (5,925-6,425 MHz) L6G - L6G Type1 F.383-8 (2007-09)
L6 GHz (5,925-6,425 MHz) L6G RALI L6G Type2 Based on F.383-8 (2007-09)
U6 GHz (6,425-7,125 MHz) U6G - U6G Type1 F.384-10 (2007-09)
U6 GHz (6,425-7,125 MHz) U6G RALI U6G Type2 Based on F.384-10 (2007-09)
U6 GHz (6,425-7,125 MHz) U6G U6G Type3 Modified F.384-10 (2007-09) raster
U6 GHz (6.425-7.125 MHz) U6G U6G Type4 Modified F.384-10 (2007-09) raster
7 GHz (7,125-7,425 MHz) L7G - 7G Type1 F.385-9 (2005-01)
7 GHz (7,125-7,425 MHz) 7G - 7G Type2 F.385-9 (2005-01)
7 GHz (7,125-7,425 MHz) 7G - 7G Type3 F.385-9 (2005-01)
7 GHz (7,110-7,750 MHz) 7G - 7G Type4 F.385-9 Annex-3 (2005-01)
7 GHz (7,425-7,725 MHz) U7G - 7G Type5 F.385-9 Annex-1 (2005-01)
7 GHz (7,425-7,725 MHz) 7G - 7G Type6 F.385-9 (2005-01)
7 GHz (7,425-7,725 MHz) 7G - 7G Type7 F.385-9 (2005-01)
7 GHz (7,250-7,550 MHz) M7G - 7G Type8 F.385-9 Annex-5 (2005-01)
7 GHz (7,125-7,425 MHz) 7G - 7G Type9 F.385-9 (2005-01)
7 GHz (7,250-7,550 MHz) 7G - 7G Type10 Modified F.385-9 Annex-5 (2005-01)
8 GHz (7,725-8,275 MHz) L8G - 8G Type1 F.386-8 Annex-6 (2007-07)
8 GHz (7,900-8,400 MHz) L8G OIRT 8G Type2 F.386-8 Annex-3 (2007-07)
8 GHz (7,725-8,275 MHz) L8G RALI 8G Type3 Based on F.386-8 Annex-6 (2007-07)
8 GHz (7.900-8,400 MHz) L8G OIRT 8G Type4 Based on F.386-8 Annex-3 (2007-07)
8 GHz (7,900-8,500 MHz) 8G CEPT 8G Type5 CEPT/ERC Rec2-06 Annex-2 (2007-06)
MN.00278.E - 005 51
11 GHz (10.7-11.7 GHz) 11G - 11G Type1 F.387-10 recommends 1.1 (2006-02)
11 GHz (10.7-11.7 GHz) 11G - 11G Type2 F.387-10 recommends 1.2 (2006-02)
11 GHz (10.7-11.7 GHz) 11G RALI 11G Type3 Based on F.387-10 (2006-02)
11 GHz (10.7-11.7 GHz) 11G - 11G Type4 Modified CEPT/ERC Rec12.06E
13 GHz (12.75-13.25 GHz) 13G - 13G Type1 F.497-7 (2007-09)
a. Type is SIAE Microelettronica standard RF Type and changeable on WebLT by provisioning menu.
Warning: Above RF band availability depends on WebLT firmware release version.

For details, please contact with SIAE Microelettronica marketing staff.
Warning: RALI means Radiocommunications Assignment and Licensing Instruction (RALI) by Australian
Communications and Media Authority (ACMA) communications and Media Authority (ACMA).
Warning: OIRT means Organisation Internationale de Radiodiffusion et Television (OIRT).
Warning: Any frequency band excluding "Standard Frequency Plan" marked with yellow portion may be
developed on project basis..
Detailed radio frequency plans are given in paragraph 3.5 APPENDIX-A - Frequency Plan/Antenna System
and parameter sheet for system design for 64QAM/128QAM system are given in paragraph 3.6 Appendix-
B - Parameter Sheet .
3.2 SINGLE-FEED ANTENNA
Single polarization operation is used for one (1) IP/STM-1 transmission per RF channel using single-feed
antenna having V(H)-polarization. That is, transmit channel of CH1-CHn and receive channel CH1'-CHn'
are allocated in the V(H)-polarization. SIAE Microelettronica Recommended transmit-receive RF channel
pair selection model of U6 GHz band, for example, is as follows:
• Protection: CH1-CH1' pair in the V(H)-polarization

• Main 1: CH2-CH2' pair in the V(H)-polarization

Minimum RF separation of TL is as follows:
• For 40 MHz CS system
- 40 MHz for the V(H)-polarization (4/5/U6/11 GHz)
• For 30 MHz CS system
- 28 MHz for the V(H)-polarization (7/11/13 GHz)

- 29 MHz for the V(H)-polarization (4 GHz)
- 29.65 MHz for the V(H)-polarization (L6/8 GHz)
- 30 MHz for the V(H)-polarization (U6 GHz)
52 MN.00278.E - 005
3.3 DUAL-FEED ANTENNA
ACAP Operation is used for one (1) IP/STM-1 transmission per RF channel using V-polarization and H-po-
larization alternately. Recommended transmit-receive RF channel pair selection of U6 GHz band, for ex-
ample, is as follows:
• Protection: CH1-CH1' pair in the V(H)-polarization
• Main 4: CH2-CH2' pair in the H(V)-polarization
• For 40 MHz CS system (4/5/U6/11 GHz)
- 80 MHz for same polarization (V or H)
- 40 MHz for cross polarization (V/H)
• For 28 MHz CS system (7/8/11/13 GHz)
• For 29.65 MHz CS system (L6/8 GHz)
- 59.3 MHz for same polarization (V or H)
- 29.65 MHz for cross polarization (V/H)

• For 30 MHz CS system (U6 GHz)

CCDP operation is used for two (2) IP/STM-1 transmissions per RF channel using both V-polarization and
H-polarization in a same radio frequency. Recommended transmit-receive RF channel pair selection of U6
GHz band, for example, is as follows:
• Protection: CH1-CH1' pair in the V and H-polarization
• Main 1: CH2-CH2' pair in the V and H-polarization

• For 40 MHz CS system (4/5/U6/8/11 GHz)
- 40 MHz for both same and cross polarization (V/H)
• For 30 MHz CS system (U6 GHz)

• For 29.65 MHz CS system (L6/8 GHz)
- 29.65 MHz for both same and cross polarization (V/H)
MN.00278.E - 005 53
• For 29 MHz CS system (4 GHz)
• For 28 MHz CS system (7/8/11/13 GHz)
For CCDP operation, powerful countermeasures are needed against co-channel interference due to antenna
XPD and also adjacent channel interferences. That is, high XPD (Cross Polarization Discrimination) anten-
na, powerful XPIC (Cross Polarization Interference Canceller) powerful ATDE (Adaptive Time Domain
Equalizer) and so on are required.
In addition of above basic operation, mixture of ACCP/ACAP/CCDP and single/dual RF channel in a same
rack is available.
3.4 ANTENNA SYSTEM
A common antenna system is used for transmit and receive channel. No. of antennas for both single-feed
and dual-feed antenna method are as follows:
1. In case of transmit diversity or space diversity reception
- Two (2) antennas and two (2) feeders for terminal configuration
- Four (4) antennas and four (4) feeders for back-to-back terminal configuration
- Four (4) antennas and four (4) feeders for repeater configuration
2. In case of single reception
- One (1) antenna and one (1) feeder for terminal configuration
- Two (2) antennas and two (2) feeders for back-to-back terminal configuration
- Two (2) antenna and two (2) feeders for repeater configuration
3.5 APPENDIX-A - FREQUENCY PLAN/ANTENNA SYSTEM
3.5.1 Frequency Plan
The frequency allocation for the 4G type1 band is as follows:
• 3600 to 4200 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.635-6 Annex-1)
• Center frequency 3900 MHz
• Guard band 20 MHz (lower band and upper band)
• Center gap 80 MHz
• 40 MHz frequency spacing for co-channel operation

80 MHz frequency spacing for alternated operation
• 320 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing
• 6+1 protection system for ACCP/ACAP/CCDP operation

2x(6+1) protection system for CCDP operation
Combined ACCP/ACAP/CCDP operation available
54 MN.00278.E - 005
• Specified RF frequency, shown in Fig.30
• 3800 to 4200 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.382-8)
• Center frequency 4003.5 MHz

• Guard band 24.5 MHz (lower band) and 17.5 MHz (upper band)

• 5+1 protection system for combined ACCP/ACAP/CCDP operation

• 3600 to 4200 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.635-6)
• Guard band 10 MHz (lower band) and 30 MHz (upper band)



• 3600 to 4200 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.635-6)
• Guard band 10 MHz (lower band) and -10 MHz (upper band)


Warning: CH8-CH1' allocation is not allowed in a same antenna system.
The frequency allocation for the 5G Type1 band is as follows:
• Guard band 30 MHz (lower band and upper band)
• 40 MHz frequency spacing (Co-channel operation)

80 MHz frequency spacing (Alternated operation)
MN.00278.E - 005 55
The frequency allocation for the L6G Type1 band is as follows:
• 5925 to 6425 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.383-8)

• Center gap 44.49 MHz
• 29.65 MHz frequency spacing (Co-channel operation)

59.30 MHz frequency spacing (Alternated operation)
• 252.04 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing

The frequency allocation for the L6G Type2 (interleaved) band is as follows:
• 5925 to 6425 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.383-8 recommends 5)

• 7+1 protection system for combined ACCP/ACAP operation

The frequency allocation for the U6G Type1 band is as follows:

• 6425 to 7125 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.384-10)


The frequency allocation for the U6G Type2 (interleaved) band is as follows:
• 6425 to 7125 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.384-10)

56 MN.00278.E - 005

• 6425 to 7125 MHz (Modified ITU-R Rec. F.384-10 raster)


• 6425 to 7125 MHz (Modified ITU-R Rec. F.384-10 raster)


The frequency allocation for the 7G Type1 band (L7G) is as follows:
• 7125 to 7425 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.385-9)
• Center frequency 7275 MHz (CH2,6,10,14 and 18 of 7 MHz arrangement)
• Guard band 10 MHz for lower band and 17 MHz for upper band


• 7125 to 7425 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.385-9)
• Guard band 17 MHz for lower and upper band
MN.00278.E - 005 57

• Specified RF frequency, shown in Fig.42.
• 7125 to 7425 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.385-9)



• 7110 to 7750 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.385-9, annex-3)
• Center frequency of lower part of the band: 7275 MHz
• Center frequency of higher part of the band: 7597 MHz
• Guard band: 11 MHz for lower part of the band, 13 MHz for higher part of the band
• Center gap of lower part of the band: 84 MHz
• Center gap of higher part of the band: 56 MHz
• 28 MHz frequency spacing (ACCP/CCDP operation)

6 MHz frequency spacing (ACAP operation)
• 196 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing (lower part of the band)

• 168 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing (higher part of the band)
• 9+1 for ACCP/ACAP/CCDP for lower and higher part of the band separately
2x(9+1) for CCDP for lower and higher part of the band separately
Warning: Please note the TX/RX direction.
- CH1l to CH5l: Go (Return)
- CH1'1 to CH5'l: Return (Go)
- CH1h to CH5h: Return (Go)
- CH1'h to CH5'h: Go (Return)
The frequency allocation for the 7G Type5 (U7) band is as follows:
• 7425 to 7725 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.385-9)
• Guard band 17 MHz for lower band and upper band

58 MN.00278.E - 005

• 7425 to 7725 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.385-9)



• 7425 to 7725 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.385-9)

• 28 MHz frequency spacing (Co-channel operation


• 28 MHz frequency spacing (Co-channel operation


• 7125 to 7425 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.385-9)
MN.00278.E - 005 59

• 7250 to 7550 MHz (Modified ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 Annex-5, +7 MHz shift plan)
• Center frequency 7410.5 MHz
• 56 MHz frequency spacing (Alternated operation)


The frequency allocation for the 8G Type1 (L8G) band is as follows:

• Guard band 22.7 MHz (Lower band) and 8.43 MHz (Upper band)


The frequency allocation for the 8G Type2 (OIRT) band is as follows:
• Guard band 26 MHz (Lower band) and 12 MHz (Upper band)



The frequency allocation for the 8G Type3 (L8G interleaved) band is as follows:
• Guard band 7.875 MHz (Lower band) and 23.255 MHz (Upper band)
60 MN.00278.E - 005


• 7,900 to 8,400 MHz (Based on ITU-R Rec. F.386-8 annex-3, 14 MHz shift)
• Center frequency 8,157 MHz


• 7,900 to 8,500 MHz (CEPT/ERC Rec2-06 Annex-2)
• Center frequency 8,200 MHz

• Guard band 19 MHz


• 10700 to 11700 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.387-10 recommends 1.1)

• 2x(7+1) protection system for CCDP operation

14+2 combined ACCP/ACAP/CCDP operation available
MN.00278.E - 005 61


The frequency allocation for the 11G Type3 (11G Type1 interleaved) band is as follows:


• 10700 to 11700 MHz (Modified CEPT/ERC Recommendation 12-06E)



• 12750 to 13250 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.497-7)
• Guard band 15 MHz (Lower band) and 23 MHz (Upper band)

• 56 MHz frequency spacing ( Alternated operation)

62 MN.00278.E - 005
Please note that:
Fig.30 to Fig.60 show all the RF frequency channel arrangements for ACCP, ACAP and CCDP operation.
There are two types of RF CH numbering specified. One is in accordance with ITU-R F.xxxx recommenda-
tion (such as CH1, CH2,…, CH1’, CH2’,…) and the other is initial provisioning setting value on WebLT (such
as CH1L, CH2L,…, CH1H, CH2H,…) in parentheses.
Fig.30 - 4G Type1 band frequency allocation

ITU-R Rec. F.635-6 Annex-I (2001-05)
MN.00278.E - 005 63
ITU-R Rec. F.382-8 (2006-04)
64 MN.00278.E - 005
ITU-R Rec. F.635-6 (2001-05)
MN.00278.E - 005 65
ITU-R Rec. F.635-6 (2001-05)
66 MN.00278.E - 005
ITU-R Rec. F.1099-4 Annex-I (2007-09)
MN.00278.E - 005 67
Fig.35 - L6G Type1 band frequency allocation
ITU-R Rec. F.383-8 (2007-09)
68 MN.00278.E - 005
ITU-R Rec. F.383-8 (2007-09)
MN.00278.E - 005 69
Fig.37 - U6G Type1 band frequency allocation
ITU-R Rec. F.384-10 (2007-09)
70 MN.00278.E - 005
ITU-R Rec. F.384-10 (2007-09)
MN.00278.E - 005 71
Modified ITU-R Rec. F.384-10 (2007-09) raster
72 MN.00278.E - 005
Modified ITU-R Rec. F.384-10 (2007-09) raster
MN.00278.E - 005 73
ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 (2005-01)
74 MN.00278.E - 005
ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 (2005-01)
MN.00278.E - 005 75
ITU.R Rec. F.385-9 (2005-01)
76 MN.00278.E - 005
ITU-R F.385-9 Annex-3 (2005-01)
MN.00278.E - 005 77
(ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 Annex-1 (2005-01)
78 MN.00278.E - 005
ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 (2005-01)
MN.00278.E - 005 79
ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 (2005-01)
80 MN.00278.E - 005
ITU-R Rec. F385-9 Annex-5 (2005-01)
MN.00278.E - 005 81
ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 (2005-01)
82 MN.00278.E - 005
Modified ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 Annex-5 (2005-01), +7 MHz shift plan
MN.00278.E - 005 83
Fig.51 - 8G Type1 (L8G) band frequency allocation
ITU-R Rec. F.386-8 Annex-6 (2007-07)
84 MN.00278.E - 005
ITU-R Rec. F.386-8 Annex-3 (2007-07)
MN.00278.E - 005 85
ITU-R Rec. F.386-8 Annex-6 (2007-07)
86 MN.00278.E - 005
Based on ITU-R Rec. F.386-8 Annex-3 (2007-07), 14 MHz shift
MN.00278.E - 005 87
CEPT/ERC Rec2-06 Annex-2 (2007-06)
88 MN.00278.E - 005
ITU-R Rec. F.387-10 recommendations 1.1 (2006-07)
MN.00278.E - 005 89
ITU-R Rec. F.387-10 recommends 1.2 (2006-02)
90 MN.00278.E - 005
ITU-R Rec. F.387-10 recommends 1.1 (2006-07)
MN.00278.E - 005 91
Modified CEPT/ERC Recommendation 12-06 E (2010-02)
92 MN.00278.E - 005
Fig.60 - 13G Type1 frequency allocation
ITU-R Rec. F.497-7 (2007-09)
MN.00278.E - 005 93
3.6 APPENDIX-B - PARAMETER SHEET
3.6.1 Parameter Sheet
Tab.4 - System Design Parameters on TL IP/SDH radio

(STM-1, 64QAM with 40 MHz CS System)
94 MN.00278.E - 005
MN.00278.E - 005 95
96 MN.00278.E - 005
4 RF BRANCHING NETWORK
4.1 RF BRANCHING NETWORK
RF Branching Network is composed of microwave components as follows:
1. Duplexer (DUP, waveguide antenna port for TX-RX)
2. Adaptor (ADPT, waveguide antenna port for SD RX)
3. TRMD adaptor (TR ADPT) for plug-in RF IN/OUT of TRMD and BRU filter
4. Plug-in TX/RX/SD filter units, maximum x8
5. TX Switch and RX Hybrid only for 1+1 Hot-Standby
6. Band elimination filter (BEF) for innermost CH, maximum x8

7. Coaxial pipe cables between DUP/ADPT and CIR
8. Semi-rigid coaxial cables between CIRs
9. Waveguide antenna ports, maximum x8

Detailed filter type and filter section number in the base band, IF and RF is given in paragraph 4.3
APPENDIX-A - fILTER CHAIN CONFIGURATION. RF branching network for all system operations is given in
paragraph 4.4. APPENDIX-B - RF BRANCHING NETWORK. TL employs the loss equalized RF branching net-
work to distribute insertion loss and delay characteristics uniformly for all RF channels.
4.2 BEF
Band elimination filter (BEF) is used to improve the transmit-receive interference between innermost RF
channels in the near-end station and number of BEF is shown in Tab.7 and Tab.8 considering BER perfor-
mance criteria for all RF channels.
Warning: BEF will be added in the innermost channel filter chain on site or at factory when the innermost
RF channels are allocated initially or by the Customer's future expansion plan.
In case of STM-1 interface, BEF is needed to maintain the circuit quality target in accordance with "End-
to-end error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit-rate digital path and
connection" of ITU-T G.826 and "Performance objectives of bringing-into-service (BIS) and maintenance
of international SDH paths and multiplex section of ITU-R F.1330 and ITU-T M.2010. BEF characteristics is
as follows:
1. Band eliminated attenuation: 25 dB
2. 25 dB bandwidth: 32 MHz
3. Insertion loss: 0.4 dB / BEF (typical)
4. Slope amplitude: < 0.2 dB / F0 ±14 MHz
5. Parabolic amplitude: < 0.2 dB / F0 ±14 MHz
6. Slope delay: < 5 ns / F0 ±14 MHz
7. Parabolic delay: < 2 ns / F0 ±14 MHz
8. Filter type: 6-section, Chebychev type
MN.00278.E - 005 97
Regarding the usage of BEF, special care should be taken below:
• when innermost channels are Co-Polarized and Alternate-Polarized with separate antenna in the
transmit diversity application, BEF both transmit and receive side is not needed because of more
than 50 dB Front-to-Side (F/S) attenuation between two antennas.
• when receive side BEF is needed, SD receive side BEF is also needed to maintain the similar IF-IF
performance between Main receiver and SD receiver.
Tab.7 - Number of BEF when Innermost CHs are ACCP or CCDP operation
Modul ati on Inne rmost No. of BEF

RF Ban d
Schem e RF spacing RX and SD side s TX s ide
4G type 1 6 4QAM 80 MHz 0 0
4G type 2 12 8QAM 68 MHz 0 0
4G type 4 64QAM(*1) 80 MHz 0 0
L6G typ e1 12 8QAM 44.4 9 MHz 1 2
L6G typ e2 12 8QAM 44.4 9 MHz 1 2
U6G type 1 6 4QAM 60 MHz 1 2
7G type 1 12 8QAM 49 MHz 1 2
7G type 2 12 8QAM 42 MHz 1 2
7G type 3 12 8QAM 49 MHz 1 2
7G type 4 12 8QAM 84 & 56 MHz 0 1
7G type 5 12 8QAM 42 MHz 1 2
7G type 6 12 8QAM 49 MHz 1 2
7G type 7 12 8QAM 49 MHz 1 2
7G type 8 12 8QAM 49 MHz 1 2
7G type 9 12 8QAM 56 MHz 0 1
7G type 10 12 8QAM 49 MHz 1 2
8G type 1 12 8QAM 103.77 MHz 0 0
8G type 2 12 8QAM 70 MHz 0 0
8G type 3 12 8QAM 103.77 MHz 0 0
8G type 4 12 8QAM 70 MHz 0 0
8G type 5 12 8QAM 58 MHz 0 1
11G typ e1 6 4QAM 90 MHz 0 0
11G typ e2 6 4QAM 50 MHz 1 2
11G typ e3 6 4QAM 50 MHz 1 2
11G typ e4 12 8QAM 3 26 MHz 0 0
13G typ e1 12 8QAM 70 MHz 0 0
Note-1 *: CH8 -CH1' is not al lowed in a sam e an tenn a sys tem
V (H )
CHn CH1'
W hen innerm os t c hannels

are C o-P olariz ed.
V (H )
H (V ) CHn CH1'
W hen innerm os t c hannels are

C o-C hannel Dual-P olariz ed.
Fig.61
Tab.8 - Number of BEF when Innermost CHs are ACAP operation
98 MN.00278.E - 005
No. of BEF
Modul ati on Inne rmost
RF Ban d
Schem e RF spacing RX and SD side s TX s ide
4G type 2 12 8QAM 68 MHz 0 0
L6G typ e1 12 8QAM 44.4 9 MHz 0 1
L6G typ e2 12 8QAM 44.4 9 MHz 0 1
7G type 1 12 8QAM 49 MHz 0 1
7G type 2 12 8QAM 42 MHz 0 1
7G type 3 12 8QAM 49 MHz 0 1
7G type 4 12 8QAM 84/5 6 MHz 0 1
7G type 5 12 8QAM 42 MHz 0 1
7G type 6 12 8QAM 49 MHz 0 1
7G type 7 12 8QAM 49 MHz 0 1
7G type 8 12 8QAM 49 MHz 0 1
7G type 9 12 8QAM 56 MHz 0 1
7G type 10 12 8QAM 49 MHz 0 1
8G type 1 12 8QAM 103.77 MHz 0 0
8G type 2 12 8QAM 70 MHz 0 0
8G type 3 12 8QAM 103.77 MHz 0 0
8G type 4 12 8QAM 70 MHz 0 0
8G type 5 12 8QAM 58 MHz 0 1
11G typ e1 6 4QAM 90 MHz 0 0
11G typ e2 6 4QAM 50 MHz 0 2
11G typ e3 6 4QAM 50 MHz 0 2
11G typ e4 12 8QAM 3 26 MHz 0 0
13G typ e1 12 8QAM 70 MHz 0 0
V (H ) CH1'
H (V ) CHn
W hen innerm os t c hannels are

A lternate-P olariz ed.
Fig.62
Insertion loss of loss equalized RF branching network for all RF frequency band is given in paragraph 4.5
APPENDIX-C - INSERTION LOSS OF LOSS EQUALIZED RF BRANCHING NETWORK.
MN.00278.E - 005 99
4.3 APPENDIX-A - FILTER CHAIN CONFIGURATION
4.3.1 Filter chain configuration
Tab.9 - Filter chain configuration for 40 MHz channel spacing system
100 MN.00278.E - 005

Tab.10 - Filter chain configuration for 28/29/29.65 MHz
MN.00278.E - 005 101

4.4 APPENDIX-B - RF BRANCHING NETWORK
SIAE Microelettronica recommended loss equalized BRU network, U6G Type1 as an example.
Ma in
An te n n a P o rt
V (H )
DUP x2
C W C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR TX C IR
BEF
TX B P F
BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8
x1
C IR RX C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR
BEF
R X BPF
CH1' CH2' CH3' CH4' CH5' CH6' CH7' CH8'
SD
An te n n a P o rt
V (H )
AD P T
C W C IR
x1
C IR SD C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR
BEF
SD BPF
TR MD AD P T 1 TR MD AD P T 2 TR MD AD P T 3 TR MD AD P T 4
Fig.63 - Typical loss equalized RF branching network for U6G, 7+1, ACCP with SD
In case that Tx RF channel is in the lower half band
102 MN.00278.E - 005

Ma in
An te n n a P o rt
V (H )
DUP
C W C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR
TX B P F
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7
x1
BEF
R X BPF
SD
An te n n a P o rt
V (H )
AD P T x2
C W C IR C IR C IR C IR TX C IR
BEF
TX B P F
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH2 CH4 CH6 CH8
x1
C IR SD C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR
BEF
SD BPF
Fig.64 - Typical loss equalized RF branching network for U6G, 7+1, ACCP with SD+TSD
MN.00278.E - 005 103

Ma in
An te n n a P o rt
V (H )
DUP x2
C W C IR TX C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR
BEF
TX B P F
x1
C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR RX
BEF

R X BPF
SD
An te n n a P o rt
V (H )
AD P T
C W C IR
x1
C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR SD
BEF

SD BPF
In case that Tx Rf channel is in the higher half band
104 MN.00278.E - 005

Ma in
An te n n a P o rt
V (H )
DUP x2
C W C IR TX C IR C IR C IR C IR
BEF
TX B P F
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH1' CH3' CH5' CH7'
x1
BEF
R X BPF
SD
An te n n a P o rt
V (H )
AD P T
TX B P F
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH2' CH4' CH6' CH8'
x1
C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR SD
BEF
SD BPF
In case that Tx RF channel is in the higher half band
MN.00278.E - 005 105

Ma in
An te n n a P o rt
DUP
V (H )
H (V)
TX P B F
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7
C IR C IR C IR C IR
R X BPF
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH1' CH3' CH5' CH7'

DUP x2
C W C IR C IR C IR C IR TX C IR
BEF
TX P B F
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH2 CH4 CH6 CH8
C IR C IR C IR C IR
R X BPF
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH2' CH4' CH6' CH8'

SD
An te n n a P o rt
AD P T
V (H )
C W C IR
H (V)
C IR C IR C IR C IR
SD BPF
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH1' CH3' CH5' CH7'

AD P T
C W C IR
C IR C IR C IR C IR
SD BPF
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH2' CH4' CH6' CH8'
Fig.67 - Typical loss equalized RF branching network for U6G, 7+1, ACAP with SD
106 MN.00278.E - 005

Ma in
An te n n a P o rt
DUP
V (H ) C W C IR C IR C IR
H (V)
TX B P F
BPF BPF
CH1 CH3
C IR C IR C IR C IR
R X BPF
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH1' CH3' CH5' CH7'

DUP
C W C IR C IR C IR
TX B P F
BPF BPF
CH2 CH4
C IR C IR C IR C IR
R X BPF
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH2' CH4' CH6' CH8'

SD
An te n n a P o rt
AD P T
H (V)
TX B P F
BPF BPF
CH5 CH7
C IR C IR C IR C IR
SD BPF
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH1' CH3' CH5' CH7'

AD P T x2
C W C IR C IR TX C IR
BEF
TX B P F
BPF BPF
CH6 CH8
C IR C IR C IR C IR
SD BPF
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH2' CH4' CH6' CH8'
Fig.68 - Typical loss equalized RF branching network for U6G, 7+1, ACAP with SD+TSD
MN.00278.E - 005 107

Ma in
An te n n a P o rt
DUP x2
V (H ) TX
H (V)
BEF
TX P B F
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH1' CH3' CH5' CH7'
C IR C IR C IR C IR
R X BPF
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7

DUP
TX P B F
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH2' CH4' CH6' CH8'
C IR C IR C IR C IR
R X BPF
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH2 CH4 CH6 CH8

SD
An te n n a P o rt
AD P T
V (H )
C W C IR
H (V)
C IR C IR C IR C IR
SD BPF
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7

AD P T
C W C IR
C IR C IR C IR C IR
SD BPF
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH2 CH4 CH6 CH8
108 MN.00278.E - 005

Ma in
An te n n a P o rt
DUP x2
V (H ) C W C IR TX C IR C IR
H (V) BEF
TX B P F
BPF BPF
CH1' CH3'
C IR C IR C IR C IR
R X BPF
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7

DUP
C W C IR C IR C IR
TX B P F
BPF BPF
CH2' CH4'
C IR C IR C IR C IR
R X BPF
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH2 CH4 CH6 CH8

SD
An te n n a P o rt
AD P T
H (V)
TX B P F
BPF BPF
CH5' CH7'
C IR C IR C IR C IR
SD BPF
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7

AD P T
C W C IR C IR C IR
TX B P F
BPF BPF
CH6' CH8'
C IR C IR C IR C IR
SD BPF
BPF BPF BPF BPF
CH2 CH4 CH6 CH8
MN.00278.E - 005 109

Fig.71 - Typical loss equalized RF branching network for U6G, 2x(7+1), CCDP with SD
110 MN.00278.E - 005

In case that Tx RF channel is in the upper half band
MN.00278.E - 005 111

4.5 APPENDIX-C - INSERTION LOSS OF LOSS EQUALIZED RF
BRANCHING NETWORK
Insertion loss of RF branching network is specified using loss equalized RF branching network configuration
model with R-SD below:
Ma in
An te n n a P o rt
Tra n s m itte r s id e
DUP
BEF

R e fe re n ce C '
CH1 CH2 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

T R AD PT
R eferenc e A '
Trans m it s ide
TR
CH3
MD
R e ce ive r s id e
BEF
Transmit side BRU Loss at Near-End station (U6G band as an example)
Ma in
An te n n a P o rt
DUP
BEF

R e fe re n ce C
BEF

T R AD PT
R e ce ive r s id e
R eferenc e A
TR
CH3
MD
Receive side BRU Loss at Far-End station (U6G band as an example)
Fig.73 - Loss equalized RF branching network for 7+1 protection system
Where, Reference A': TRMD card RF output port

Reference A: TRMD card RF input port
Reference C and C': DUP input/output waveguide flange port
112 MN.00278.E - 005

In this allocation, RF branching network location of P channel in the transmit side is the nearest from DUP
and on the contrary in the receive side RF branching network location of P channel is most far from duplexer
(DUP).
Mechanical configuration of RF branching network and connection between TRMD card and BRU using
TRMD adaptor (TR ADPT) are shown below. For details, refer to Fig.75 and Fig.76.
TR AD P T
2x S D B P F
2x R X B P F
2x TX B P F
VE N T u n it
2 xTR MD /TR AD P T
1. 2 RF channel TRMD units and relative BRUs are plug-in'ed to the adaptor (ADPT).
2. Connections between TRMD and BPF are installed with fixed pipe cables located at the rear side of
ADPT without additional cable connection on site.
3. Only cable connections between circulators are necessary when RF CH expansion is needed at site.
Fig.74 - Mechanical configuration
Insertion loss of Loss Equalized RF branching network, BRU loss is calculated below:
• BRU loss = Transmit side loss (Reference A' to Reference C') +Receive side loss (Reference C to
Reference A)
For detailed insertion loss value, please refer to Tab.11, Tab.12, Tab.13 and Tab.14.
MN.00278.E - 005 113

D U P /A D P T S em i-fle xib le
ca b le 7 5 0 m m
T X IN
SD ADPT D U P -T X /R X B P F
RX DUP
D U P /A D P T
SD BPF
S em i-rig id
RX BPF ca b le A p p rox.
115 m m
TX BPF
Fig.75 - Typical BRU configuration of 7+1 ACAP double terminal
114 MN.00278.E - 005

P lug -in type BR U unit (M axim um 6 x B P F consisting 2 C H s T X /R X /S D )
Cable connection betw een other B P F is m ade by sem i -rigid cable up and dow n and
side -to-side on circulator.
Semi-rigid cable between BRU unit and TRMD card

Both TRMD card and BRU unit are plug-in’ed to the TRMD adaptor
without manual cable connection
Fig.76 - TX/RX/SD BPF on TRMD adaptor
MN.00278.E - 005 115

Tab.11 - Insertion loss of ACCP/ACAP/CCDP operation
(40 MHz channel spacing system)

System/RF 4G type1 Guaranteed Syste m / R F 11G type1 Guaranteed
1+0 4.59 dB +1dB 1+0 7.61 dB +1dB
1+1 5.13 dB +1dB 1+1 8.28 dB +1dB
2+1 5.67 dB +1dB 2+1 8.95 dB +1dB
3+1 6.21 dB +1dB 3+1 9.62 dB +1dB
ACCP 4+1 10.29 dB +1dB
4+1 6.57 dB +1dB
5+1 10.96 dB +1dB
5+1 7.29 dB +1dB AC CP
6+1 11.63 dB +1dB
6+1 7.83 dB +1dB 7+1 12.30 dB +1dB
7+1 - +1dB 8+1 12.97 dB +1dB
1+0(V) 4.59 dB +1dB 9+1 13.64 dB +1dB
1+1(V) 5.13 dB +1dB 10+1 14.31 dB +1dB
2+1(V) 5.67 dB +1dB 11+1 14.98 dB +1dB
3+1(V) 6.21 dB +1dB 1+0(V) 7.61 dB +1dB
ACAP
1+0(H) 4.59 dB +1dB 1+1(V) 8.28 dB +1dB
2+1(V) 8.95 dB +1dB
1+1(H) 5.13 dB +1dB
3+1(V) 9.62 dB +1dB
2+1(H) 5.67 dB +1dB
4+1(V) 10.29 dB +1dB
3+1(H) - +1dB
5+1(V) 10.96 dB +1dB
2x(1+0) 4.59 dB +1dB ACAP
1+0 (H) 7.61 dB +1dB
2x(1+1) 5.13 dB +1dB 2+0 (H) 8.28 dB +1dB
2x(2+1) 5.67 dB +1dB 3+0 (H) 8.95 dB +1dB
2x(3+1) 6.21 dB +1dB 4+0 (H) 9.62 dB +1dB
CCDP
2x(4+1) 6.57 dB +1dB 5+0 (H) 10.29 dB +1dB
2x(5+1) 7.29 dB +1dB 6+0 (H) 10.96 dB +1dB
2x(6+1) 7.83 dB +1dB 2x(1 +0) 7.61 dB +1dB
2x(1 +1) 8.28 dB +1dB
2x(7+1) - +1dB
2x(2 +1) 8.95 dB +1dB
2x(3 +1) 9.62 dB +1dB
CCCP
2x(4 +1) 10.29 dB +1dB
2x(5 +1) 10.96 dB +1dB
2x(6 +1) 11.63 dB +1dB
2x(7 +1) 12.30 dB +1dB
5G type1 U6G type1

System/RF Gua ranteed
w/o BEF w/t BEF -1 w/t BEF-2 w/o BEF w /t BEF-1 w /t BEF-2
1+0 5.12 d B 6.2 6 dB 8.46 dB 5.94 dB 7.23 dB 9.81 dB +1dB
1+1 5.67 d B 6.8 1 dB 7.21 dB 6.54 dB 7.83 dB 8.23 dB +1dB
2+1 6.22 d B 7.3 6 dB 7.76 dB 7.14 dB 8.43 dB 8.83 dB +1dB
3+1 6.77 d B 7.9 1 dB 8.31 dB 7.74 dB 9.03 dB 9.43 dB +1dB
AC CP
4+1 7.32 d B 8.4 6 dB 8.86 dB 8.34 dB 9.63 dB 10.03 dB +1dB
5+1 7.87 d B 9.0 1 dB 9.41 dB 8.94 dB 10.23 dB 10.63 dB +1dB
6+1 8.42 d B 11.82 dB 9.96 dB 9.54 dB 10.83 dB 11.23 dB +1dB
7+1 - - - 10.14 dB 13.61 dB 11.83 dB +1dB
1+0(V) 5.12 d B 5.1 2 dB 6.66 dB 5.94 dB 5.94 dB 7.63 dB +1dB
ACAP
1+0(H) 5.12 d B 5.1 2 dB 5.12 dB 5.94 dB 5.94 dB 5.94 dB +1dB
3+1(H) - - - 7.74 dB 9.43 dB 7.74 dB +1dB
2x(1+0) 5.12 d B 6.2 6 dB 8.46 dB 5.94 dB 7.23 dB 9.81 dB +1dB
CCDP
2x(6+1) 8.42 d B 11.82 dB 9.96 dB 9.54 dB 10.83 dB 11.23 dB +1dB
2x(7+1) - - 10.14 dB 13.61 dB 11.83 dB +1dB
116 MN.00278.E - 005


11G type2/3
S ys tem / RF Gu aranteed
w/o B E F w/t BE F- 1 w/t B E F-2
1 +0 7.61 dB 9.23 dB 12.47 dB +1dB
1 +1 8.28 dB 9.90 dB 10.40 dB +1dB
2 +1 8.95 dB 1 0.57 dB 11.07 dB +1dB
3 +1 9.62 dB 1 1.24 dB 11.74 dB +1dB
4 +1 10.29 dB 1 1.91 dB 12.41 dB +1dB
5 +1 10.96 dB 1 2.58 dB 13.08 dB +1dB
AC CP
6 +1 11.63 dB 1 3.25 dB 13.75 dB +1dB
7 +1 12.30 dB 1 3.92 dB 14.42 dB +1dB
8 +1 12.97 dB 1 4.59 dB 15.09 dB +1dB
9 +1 13.64 dB 1 5.26 dB 15.76 dB +1dB
10+1 14.31 dB 1 5.93 dB 16.43 dB +1dB
11+1 14.98 dB 1 9.84 dB 17.10 dB +1dB
1+ 0(V) 7.61 dB 7.61 dB 9.7 3 dB +1dB
1+ 1(V) 8.28 dB 8.28 dB 10.40 dB +1dB
2+ 1(V) 8.95 dB 8.95 dB 11.07 dB +1dB
3+ 1(V) 9.62 dB 9.62 dB 11.74 dB +1dB
4+ 1(V) 10.29 dB 1 0.29 dB 12.41 dB +1dB
5+ 1(V) 10.96 dB 1 0.96 dB 13.08 dB +1dB
ACAP
1+0( H) 7.61 dB 7.61 dB 7.6 1 dB +1dB
2+0( H) 8.28 dB 8.28 dB 8.2 8 dB +1dB
3+0( H) 8.95 dB 8.95 dB 8.9 5 dB +1dB
4+0( H) 9.62 dB 9.62 dB 9.6 2 dB +1dB
5+0( H) 10.29 dB 1 0.29 dB 10.29 dB +1dB
6+0( H) 10.96 dB 1 4.20 dB 10.96 dB +1dB
2x(1+0) 7.61 dB 9.23 dB 12.47 dB +1dB
2x(1+1) 8.28 dB 9.90 dB 10.40 dB +1dB
2x(2+1) 8.95 dB 1 0.57 dB 11.07 dB +1dB
2x(3+1) 9.62 dB 1 1.24 dB 11.74 dB +1dB
CCC P
2x(4+1) 10.29 dB 1 1.91 dB 12.41 dB +1dB
2x(5+1) 10.96 dB 1 2.58 dB 13.08 dB +1dB
2x(6+1) 11.63 dB 1 3.25 dB 13.75 dB +1dB
2x(7+1) 12.30 dB 1 3.92 dB 14.42 dB +1dB
Abbreviation:
• ACCP: Adjacent Channel Co-Polarized
• ACAP: Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarized
• CCDP: Co-Channel Dual Polarized
• w/t BEF: Without BEF for innermost channel pair

• w/t BEF-1: With BEF for innermost channel pair & TX CH is in lower half band
• w/t BEF-2: With BEF for innermost channel pair & TX CH is in upper half band
For detailed BRU network, refer to paragraph 4.6 APPENDIX-D - TYPICAL BRU INSERTION LOSS BRE-
AKDOWN.
MN.00278.E - 005 117

S ys te m /R F
L6 G Typ e 1
Gu ar an te e d
Sys tem /RF 4G type 2 8G typ e1 1 1G typ e4 1 3 G typ e1 Gu ara n te e d w/o BEF w/t BEF-1 w /t BEF-2
1 +0 4 .9 1 d B 6 .63 d B 8 .49 d B 8 .2 8 d B +1d B 1 +0 5.89 dB 7 .57 d B 1 3.78 dB +1 d B
3 +1 6 .5 3 d B 8 .49 d B 10 .50 dB 10 .35 dB +1d B 3 +1 7.66 dB 9 .34 d B 1 1.38 dB +1 d B
AC C P AC CP
4 +1 7 .0 7 d B 9 .11 d B 11 .17 dB 11 .04 dB +1d B 4 +1 8.25 dB 9 .93 d B 1 1.97 dB +1 d B
5 +1 7 .6 1 d B 9 .73 d B 11 .84 dB 11 .73 dB +1d B 5 +1 8.84 dB 1 0 .5 2 d B 1 2.56 dB +1 d B
6 +1 - 10 .35 dB 12 .51 dB 12 .42 dB +1d B 6 +1 9.43 dB 1 1 .1 1 d B 1 3.15 dB +1 d B
7 +1 - 10 .97 dB 13 .18 dB 13 .11 dB +1d B 7 +1 1 0 .0 2 d B 1 3 .7 8 d B 1 3.74 dB +1 d B
1+0 (V) 4 .9 1 d B 6 .63 d B 8 .49 d B 8 .2 8 d B +1d B 1 +0( V) 5.89 dB 5 .89 d B 7 .1 3 d B +1 d B
3+1 (V) - 8 .49 d B 10 .50 dB 10 .35 dB +1d B 3 +1( V) 7.66 dB 7 .66 d B 8 .9 0 d B +1 d B
AC AP AC AP
1 +0(H ) 4 .9 1 d B 6 .63 d B 8 .49 d B 8 .2 8 d B +1d B 1 +0 (H ) 5.89 dB 5 .89 d B 5 .8 9 d B +1 d B
4 +0(H ) - 8 .49 d B 10 .50 dB 10 .35 dB +1d B 3 +1 (H ) 7.66 dB 9 .74 d B 7 .6 6 d B +1 d B
2 x( 1+0 ) 4 .9 1 d B 6 .63 d B 8 .49 d B 8 .2 8 d B +1d B 2 x(1 +0) 5.89 dB 7 .57 d B 1 3.78 dB +1 d B
2 x( 3+1 ) 6 .5 3 d B 8 .49 d B 10 .50 dB 10 .35 dB +1d B 2 x(3 +1) 7.66 dB 9 .34 d B 1 1.38 dB +1 d B
C C DP CC D P
2 x( 4+1 ) 7 .0 7 d B 9 .11 d B 11 .17 dB 11 .04 dB +1d B 2 x(4 +1) 8.25 dB 9 .93 d B 1 1.97 dB +1 d B
2 x( 5+1 ) 7 .6 1 d B 9 .73 d B 11 .84 dB 11 .73 dB +1d B 2 x(5 +1) 8.84 dB 1 0 .5 2 d B 1 2.56 dB +1 d B
2 x( 6+1 ) - 10 .35 dB 12 .51 dB 12 .42 dB +1d B 2 x(6 +1) 9.43 dB 1 1 .1 1 d B 1 3.15 dB +1 d B
2 x( 7+1 ) - 10 .97 dB 13 .18 dB 13 .11 dB +1d B 2 x(7 +1) 1 0 .0 2 d B 1 3 .7 8 d B 1 3.74 dB +1 d B
7G type1 to type10 7G type4

System/RF Guaranteed System/RF Guaranteed
w/o BEF w/t BEF-1 w/t BEF-2 w/o BEF w/t BEF-1 w/t BEF-2
1+0 6.48 dB 7.79 dB 10.41 dB +1dB 1+0 6.48 dB 7.81 dB 10.47 dB +1dB
ACCP 2+1 7.70 dB 9.01 dB 9.41 dB +1dB 2+1 7.70 dB 9.03 dB 9.43 dB +1dB
ACCP
1+0(V) 6.48 dB 6.48 dB 7.79 dB +1dB 5+1 10.14 dB 11.47 dB 11.87 dB +1dB
1+1(V) 7.09 dB 7.09 dB 8.40 dB +1dB 6+1 10.57 dB 11.90 dB 12.30 dB +1dB
ACAP 2+1(V) 7.70 dB 9.92 dB 9.01 dB +1dB 7+1 11.36 dB 12.69 dB 13.09 dB +1dB
1+0(H) 6.48 dB 6.48 dB 6.48 dB +1dB 8+1 11.97 dB 13.30 dB 13.70 dB +1dB
2+0(H) 7.09 dB 7.09 dB 7.09 dB +1dB 9+1 12.58 dB 16.57 dB 14.31 dB +1dB
2x(1+0) 6.48 dB 7.79 dB 10.41 dB +1dB 1+0(V) 6.48 dB 6.48 dB 7.81 dB +1dB
CCDP 2x(2+1) 7.70 dB 9.01 dB 9.41 dB +1dB 2+1(V) 7.70 dB 7.70 dB 9.03 dB +1dB
ACAP
1+0(H) 6.48 dB 6.48 dB 6.48 dB +1dB
2+0(H) 7.09 dB 7.09 dB 7.09 dB +1dB
3+0(H) 7.70 dB 7.70 dB 7.70 dB +1dB
4+0(H) 8.31 dB 8.31 dB 8.31 dB +1dB
5+0(H) 9.53 dB 12.19 dB 9.53 dB +1dB
2x(1+0) 6.48 dB 7.81 dB 10.47 dB +1dB
2x(1+1) 7.09 dB 8.42 dB 8.82 dB +1dB
2x(2+1) 7.70 dB 9.03 dB 9.43 dB +1dB
2x(3+1) 8.31 dB 9.64 dB 10.04 dB +1dB
CCDP
2x(4+1) 9.53 dB 10.86 dB 11.26 dB +1dB
2x(5+1) 10.14 dB 11.47 dB 11.87 dB +1dB
2x(6+1) 10.57 dB 11.90 dB 12.30 dB +1dB
2x(7+1) 11.36 dB 15.35 dB 13.09 dB +1dB
118 MN.00278.E - 005

8 G type 5
Sys te m /R F Guarante ed
w /o BEF w /t BEF -1 w/t BEF-2
1 +0 6.63 d B 6 .6 3 dB 7.99 dB +1 dB
1 +1 7.24 d B 7 .2 4 dB 8.60 dB +1 dB
2 +1 7.85 d B 7 .8 5 dB 9.21 dB +1 dB
3 +1 8.46 d B 8 .4 6 dB 9.82 dB +1 dB
4 +1 9.07 d B 9 .0 7 dB 1 0.43 d B +1 dB
AC CP
5 +1 9.68 d B 9 .6 8 dB 1 1.04 d B +1 dB
6 +1 1 0.29 d B 10.2 9 dB 1 1.65 d B +1 dB
7 +1 1 1.52 d B 11.5 2 dB 1 2.88 d B +1 dB
8 +1 1 2.14 d B 12.1 4 dB 1 3.50 d B +1 dB
9 +1 1 2.76 d B 15.0 8 dB 1 4.12 d B +1 dB
1+ 0(V) 6.63 d B 6 .6 3 dB 7.99 dB +1 dB
1+ 1(V) 7.24 d B 7 .2 4 dB 8.60 dB +1 dB
2+ 1(V) 7.85 d B 7 .8 5 dB 9.21 dB +1 dB
3+ 1(V) 8.46 d B 8 .4 6 dB 9.82 dB +1 dB
4+ 1(V) 9.07 d B 9 .0 7 dB 1 0.43 d B +1 dB
AC AP
1 +0(H) 6.63 d B 6 .6 3 dB 6.63 dB +1 dB
2 +0(H) 7.24 d B 7 .2 4 dB 7.24 dB +1 dB
3 +0(H) 7.85 d B 7 .8 5 dB 7.85 dB +1 dB
4 +0(H) 8.46 d B 8 .4 6 dB 8.46 dB +1 dB
5 +0(H) 9.07 d B 11.3 9 dB 9.07 dB +1 dB
2x(1+ 0) 6.63 d B 6 .6 3 dB 7.99 dB +1 dB
2x(1+ 1) 7.24 d B 7 .2 4 dB 8.60 dB +1 dB
2x(2+ 1) 7.85 d B 7 .8 5 dB 9.21 dB +1 dB
2x(3+ 1) 8.46 d B 8 .4 6 dB 9.82 dB +1 dB
C C DP
2x(4+ 1) 9.07 d B 9 .0 7 dB 1 0.43 d B +1 dB
2x(5+ 1) 9.68 d B 9 .6 8 dB 1 1.04 d B +1 dB
2x(6+ 1) 1 0.29 d B 10.2 9 dB 1 1.65 d B +1 dB
2x(7+ 1) 1 1.52 d B 13.8 4 dB 1 2.88 d B +1 dB
Abbreviation:
• ACCP: Adjacent Channel Co-Polarized
• ACAP: Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarized
• CCDP: Co-Channel Dual Polarized
• w/t BEF: Without BEF for innermost channel pair
• w/t BEF-1: With BEF for innermost channel pair & TX CH is in lower half band
• w/t BEF-2: With BEF for innermost channel pair & TX CH is in upper half band
For detailed BRU network, refer to paragraph 4.6 APPENDIX-D - TYPICAL BRU INSERTION LOSS BRE-
AKDOWN.
Warning: Above insertion loss calculation is based on the loss equalized RF branching network model,
standard card slot allocation and SIAE Microelettronica standard cable in accordance with Fig.63, Fig.64,
Fig.65, Fig.66, Fig.67, Fig.68, Fig.69, Fig.70, Fig.71, Fig.72, Fig.73, Fig.74, Fig.75 and Fig.76. Therefore
in case that not loss equalized RF branching network or not SIAE Microelettronica recommended RF channel
allocation rule is applied, insertion loss should be calculated individually. If insertion loss is critical for sys-
tem design calculation, please contact SIAE Microelettronica technical staff.
Warning: When the innermost RF channels are allocated on customer's request, BEF should be added only
for the innermost RF channel. In this case, BRU insertion loss will be increased by addition of BEF and con-
nection cables depending on system configuration.
MN.00278.E - 005 119

4.6 APPENDIX-D - TYPICAL BRU INSERTION LOSS BREAKDOWN
4.6.1 Loss breakdown for 4/8/11/13 GHz (No BEF is needed)
Ma in
An te n n a P o rt 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5
DUP CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

V(H ) L3 L2 L2
C W C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR
0 .3 TX B P F
L1
Ma in
An te n n a P o rt Transmit Side at Near-end Station
DUP
V(H )
C W C IR
0 .3
L3

C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR
R X BPF
L4
Receive Side at Far-end Station
Fig.77 - Insertion Loss Breakdown (7+1 ACCP as an example)
120 MN.00278.E - 005

Tab.15 - Insertion Loss Breakdown for each component
RF Center freq. L1 TBPF L2 L3-T L3-R RBPF L4
4G type1 3,900 0.37 0.75 0.19 0.76 0.76 0.75 0.60
4G type2 4,003.5 0.37 0.90 0.19 0.77 0.77 0.90 0.60
8G type1 8,000 0.51 1.25 0.27 1.09 1.09 1.25 0.84
11G type1 11,200 0.60 1.44 0.32 1.28 1.28 1.44 0.97
11G type4 11,200 0.60 1.88 0.32 1.28 1.28 1.88 0.97
13G type1 12,996 0.68 1.58 0.34 1.38 1.38 1.58 1.08
Abbreviation
• L1: Semi-rigid cable b/t TRMD and TX BPF, back of TRMD adaptor, approx. 200 mm
• BPF: RF band pass filter for transmit and receive side
• L2: Semi-rigid cable between CIRs in the same/different TRMD adaptor, approx. 115 mm
• L3: Semi-flexible cable b/t TRMD and BPF, back of TRMD Adaptor, 750 mm
• L4: Semi-rigid cable b/t TRMD and RX BPF, back of TRMD adaptor, approx. 400 mm
• 0.35: Transfer loss of Circulator for all RF band.
• 0.3: Duplexer loss including Circulator and Coaxial-Waveguide transducer
Warning: Insertion loss approximation of semi-rigid/semi-flexible cable is calculated below:
• Semi-rigid cable = 0.325 x f0.48 x L + 0.06 x f (f in GHz and L in m) for L2

0.48
• Semi-rigid cable = 0.65 x f x L + 0.06 x f (f in GHz and L in m) for L1 & L4
• Semi-flexible cable = 0.325 x f0.48 x L + 0.15 x f (f in GHz and L in m) for L3 & L5
MN.00278.E - 005 121

4.6.2 Loss breakdown for 5/L6/U6/7/8/11 GHz (BEF is needed for in-
nermost CH)
Ma in
An te n n a P o rt 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5
DUP CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

V(H ) L3 L2 L2
BEF
0 .3 TX B P F
L1
Ma in
DUP
V(H )
C W C IR
0 .3
L3

BEF
R X BPF
L4
Ma in
An te n n a P o rt 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5
DUP CH1' CH2' CH3' CH4' CH5' CH6' CH7' CH8'

V(H ) L3 L2 L2
BEF
0 .3 TX B P F
L1
Ma in
DUP
V(H )
C W C IR
0 .3
L3

BEF
R X BPF
L4
In case that Tx RF channel is in the upper half band
Fig.78 - Insertion loss breakdown (7+1 ACCP as an example)
122 MN.00278.E - 005

Ma in Ma in
An te n n a P o rt 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 An te n n a P o rt 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5
DUP CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7 DUP CH2 CH4 CH6 CH8
V(H ) L3 L2 L2 H (V)
C W C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR C W C IR C IR C IR C IR TX C IR
BEF
0 .3 0 .3
L1
Transmit Side at Near-end Station
DUP DUP
V(H ) H (V)
C W C IR C W C IR
0 .3 0 .3
L3

L4
In case that TX RF channel is in the lower half band
Ma in Ma in
An te n n a P o rt 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 An te n n a P o rt 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5 0 .3 5
DUP L3 CH1' CH3' CH5' CH7' DUP CH2' CH4' CH6' CH8'
V(H ) L2 L2 H (V)
C W C IR TX C IR C IR C IR C IR C W C IR C IR C IR C IR C IR
BEF
0 .3 0 .3
L1
Transmit Side at Near-end Station
DUP DUP
V(H ) H (V)
C W C IR C W C IR
0 .3 0 .3
L3

L4
In case that TX RF channel is in the upper half band
Fig.79 - Insertion loss breakdown (7+1 ACAP as an example)
MN.00278.E - 005 123

Tab.16 - Insertion loss breakdown for each component
RF Center freq L1 TBPF L2 L3-T L3-R RBPF L4
5G type1 4,700 0.40 0.90 0.20 0.84 0.84 0.90 0.64
L6G type1 6,175 0.43 1.10 0.24 0.96 0.96 1.10 0.74
U6G type1 6,770 0.46 1.05 0.25 1.00 1.00 1.05 0.78
7G type1 7,275 0.49 1.25 0.26 1.04 1.04 1.25 0.81
7G type5 7,597 0.49 1.25 0.26 1.06 1.06 1.25 0.81
7G type4/8 7,400 0.49 1.25 0.26 1.05 1.05 1.25 0.81
8G type5 8,200 0.51 1.25 0.27 1.10 1.10 1.25 0.84
11G type2 11,200 0.60 1.44 0.32 1.28 1.28 1.44 0.97
Tab.17 - Insertion loss breakdown for each component
RF TX BEFx2 TX BEFx1 RX BEF L5
5G type1 0.80 - 0.40 0.74
L6G type1 0.80 0.40 0.40 0.84
U6G type1 0.80 0.40 0.40 0.89
7G type1 0.80 0.40 0.40 0.91
7G type5 0.80 0.40 0.40 0.93
7G type4/8 0.80 0.40 0.40 0.92
8G type5 - 0.45 - 0.96
11G type2 1.00 - 0.50 1.12
Abbreviation
• L1: Semi-rigid cable b/t TRMD and TX BPF, back of TRMD adaptor, approx. 200 mm
• BPF: RF band pass filter for transmit and receive side

• L2: Semi-rigid cable between CIRs in the same/different TRMD adaptor, approx. 100 mm
• L3: Semi-flexible cable b/t TRMD and BPF, back of TRMD Adaptor, 750 mm
• L4: Semi-rigid cable b/t TRMD and RX BPF, back of TRMD adaptor, approx. 400 mm
• TX BEF: TX side BEF tuned to RX innermost CH center frequency
• RX BEF: RX side BEF tuned to TX innermost CH center frequency
• L5: Semi-flexible cable between BEF and BPF or DUP and BEF, 600 mm
• 0.35: Transfer loss of Circulator.
• 0.3: Duplexer loss including Circulator and Coaxial-Waveguide transducer
Warning: Insertion loss approximation of semi-rigid/semi-flexible cable is calculated below:
• Semi-rigid cable = 0.325 x f0.48 x L + 0.06 x f (f in GHz and L in m) for L2

0.48
• Semi-rigid cable = 0.65 x f x L + 0.06 x f (f in GHz and L in m) for L1 & L4
• Semi-flexible cable = 0.325 x f0.48 x L + 0.15 x f (f in GHz and L in m) for L3 & L5
124 MN.00278.E - 005

4.7 APPENDIX-E - TYPICAL BPF CHARACTERISTICS
4.7.1 RF BPF specification for 40 MHZ CS system
Specification
Tab.18 - Specification
Item Specification Remark
Section Number 4-section, Chebychev type
Return Loss More or equal 23 dB at ambient at Fa +/- 12 MHz

More or equal 20 dB at 0 to 60 degree
3-dB Bandwidth 40 MHz +/- 0.2 MHz
Insertion Loss (IL) Less or equal 1.2 (0.9) dB ( ): typical At Fa (U6GHz)
Out-band Attenuation More or equal 48 dB at Fa-70MHz
More or equal 37 dB at Fa+70 MHz
More or equal 90 dB at Fa-400 MHz
More or equal 73 dB at Fa+400 MHz
More or equal 50 dB for Figure below
Allowable Power +42 dBm maximum Within RF band
Out-band attenuation outside Fa +/-140 MHz
Fig.80 - Out-band attenuation outside Fa +/-140 MHz
MN.00278.E - 005 125

4.7.2 RF BPF specification for 28/29/29.65 mhz cs system
Specification
Tab.19 - Specification
Item Specification Remark
Section Number 4-section, Chebychev type
More or equal 23 dB at ambient

Return Loss at Fa +/- 12 MHz
More or equal 20 dB at 0 to 60 degree
3-dB Bandwidth 30 MHz +/- 0.2 MHz
Insertion Loss (L) Less or equal 1.4 (1.1) dB (typical) At Fa (L6GHz)
More or equal 56 dB for Fa-70 MHz

More or equal 46 dB for Fa+70 MHz
Out-band Attenuation More or equal 90 dB for Fa-140 MHz
More or equal 65 dB for Fa+140 MHz
More or equal 50 dB for Figure below
Allowable Power +42 dBm maximum Within RF band
Out-Band Attenuation outside Fa +/- 140 MHz
Fig.81 - Out-Band Attenuation outside Fa +/- 140 MHz
126 MN.00278.E - 005

4.7.3 BPF inside TRMD in 844 Mhz band
844 MHz Tx BPF
Tab.20 - Main parameters
Item Performance
Center Frequency F0: 844 MHz
Pass Band F0 ±80 MHz
Insertion Loss  1.5 dB
Pass Band Variation 1.0 dB
Group Delay -
Out-Band Attenuation 45dB at 704 MHz (F0-140M)
Fig.82 - Typical filter characteristics
MN.00278.E - 005 127

844 MHz Rx BPF
Tab.21 - Main parameter
Item Performance
Center Frequency F0: 844 MHz
Pass Band F0 ±16 MHz
Insertion Loss  2 dB
Pass Band Variation  0.7 dB
Group Delay
 45dB at 704 MHz (F0 -140M)
37dB at 744 MHz(F0 -100M)
Out-Band Attenuation 30dB at 770 MHz(F0 -74M)
25dB at 918 MHz(F0 +74M)
30dB at 944 MHz (F0 +100M)
Fig.83
128 MN.00278.E - 005

4.8 APPENDIX-F - NET FILTER DISCRIMINATION (NFD) FOR ALL
QAM ORDER
(IN ACCORDANCE WITH ETSI TR101 854 V1.1.1 (2000-09))
Simulated 1-wave IRF curve depending channel spacing is shown below:

• Graphical Result
NFD for 40 MHz CS

180
160
140
Log magunitude(dB)
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Off-Carrier freguency (MHz)
NFD for 28/29/29.65/30 MHz CS

200
180
160
140
Log magunitude(dB)
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Off-Carrier freguency (MHz)
Fig.84
MN.00278.E - 005 129

• Numerical Result
NDF for System Design Calculation

Channel Separation
System
1st Adjacent Channel 2nd Adjacent Channel
40 MHz CS 63 dB >120 dB
Channel Separation Sy- NDF for System Design Calculation (dB)

stem
1st Adjacent Channel 2nd Adjacent Channel
28 MHz CS 50 dB >120 dB
29 MHz CS 53 dB >120 dB
29.65 MHz 56 dB >120 dB
30 MHz 56 dB >120 dB
Warning: IRF value is for one-wave interference model, not two-wave interference model from lower and
upper adjacent RF channels.
130 MN.00278.E - 005

5
5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION
5.1 RF BAND
4/5/L6/U6/7/8/11/13 GHz
In accordance with basically ITU-R. Recommendation F series Modulation applied is auto determined when
RF band is set on WebLT.
RF band and switching capacity in case of single RF application for N+1 STM-1 interface is shown in Tab.22.
Tab.22 - RF Band and Switching Capacity in case of single RF application
< 30 MHz Channel Spacing System>
RF band type 4G type2 L6G type1 L6G type2 U6G type3 U6G type4
F.384-10 F.384-10
ITU F series No. F.382-8 F.383-8 F.383-8 RALI
raster raster
Channel spacing (MHz) 29 29.65 30
RPS GP1-RPS 5+1 7+1 9+1 10+1

GP1&2-RPS 2x(5+1) 2x(7+1) 2x(7+1) 2x(7+1)
RF band type 7G type1 7G type2 7G type3 7G type4 7G type5
F.385-9 F.385-9
ITU F series No. F.385-9 F.385-9 F.385-9
Annex-3 Annex-1
Channel spacing (MHz) 28
RPS GP1-RPS 4+1 9+1 4+1

GP1&2-RPS 2x(4+1) 2x(7+1) 2x(4+1)
Modified
F.385-9
ITU F series No. F.385-9 F.385-9 F.385-9 F.385-9
Annex-5
Annex-5
RPS GP1-RPS 4+1

GP1&2-RPS 2x(4+1)
5 Availability of technical items below depends on R&D roadmap and SNMP-SV Firmware release date.
For details, please contact to SIAE Microelettronica marketing staff.
MN.00278.E - 005 131

F.386-8 F.386-8 F.386-8 CEPT/ERC

F.386-8
ITU F series No. Annex-3 RALI RALI Rec2-06
Annex-6
OIRT Annex-2
Channel spacing (MHz) 29.65 28 29.65 28
RPS GP1-RPS 7+1 9+1

GP1&2-RPS 2x(7+1) 2x(7+1)
RF band type 11G type4 13G type1
Modified F.497-7
ITU F series No. CEPT/ERC
Rec12-06E
RPS GP1-RPS 7+1

GP1&2-RPS 2x(7+1)
< 40 MHz Channel Spacing System>
RF band type 4G type1 4G type3 4G type4 5G type1 U6G type1
F.1099-4
ITU F series No. F.635-6 F.635-6 F.635-6 F.384-10
Annex-1
RPS GP1-RPS 6+1 7+1 6+1 7+1

GP1&2-RPS 2x(6+1) 2x(7+1) 2x(6+1) 2x(7+1)
RF band type U6G type2 11G type1 11G type2 11G type3
F.384-10 F.387-10 F.387-10 F.387-10

ITU F series No.
RALI Recom. 1.1 Recom. 1.2 RALI
RPS GP1-RPS 7+1 11+1

GP1&2-RPS 2x(7+1) 2x(7+1)
5.2 MODULATION APPLIED6
5.2.1 Available QAM
Tab.23 shows available QAM for TRMD and BBINTF/GESW card combination.
6 Available QAM for TRMD and GESW combination, refer to paragraph 5.3 Transfer rate.
132 MN.00278.E - 005

5.2.2 When set SDH/Ether to SDH
64-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Low Density Parity Check type FEC (LDPC) for 40 MHz CS
128-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (128QAM) with Low Density Parity Check type FEC (LDPC) for
30 MHz CS
5.2.3 When set SDH/ Ether to Ether
In case of TRMD v2 + GESW v2 combination
Fixed Modulation order selectable on WebLT QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM modulation with Low

Density Parity Check (LDPC) type FEC for 30/40 MHz CS
or
Adaptive Modulation (dynamic change of modulation order) QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM modula-

tion with Low Density Parity Check (LDPC) type FEC for 30/40 MHz CS depending on path propagation con-
dition
In case of FPGA uploaded TRMD v1 + GESW v2 combination
Fixed Modulation (T-FIX) selectable on WebLT 16/32/64/128/256 modulation with Low Density Parity
Check (LDPC) type FEC for 30/40 MHz CS
or
Adaptive Modulation (Adaptive) selectable on WebLT 16/32/64/128/256 modulation with Low Density Par-
ity Check (LDPC) type FEC for 30/40 MHz CS depending on path propagation condition
Tab.23 - Available QAM for TRMD/BBINTF/GESW Combination
BBINTF GESW v1 GESW v2

Card Combination
155.52M interface 155.52M interface 466.56M interface
TRMD v1 128QAM / 30 MHz CS

128QAM / 30 MHz CS
155.52M interface 64QAM / 40 MHz CS Not applicable
64QAM / 40 MHz CS
SDH exclusive Native IP on SDH
TRMD v1 Adaptive Modulation

FPGA uploaded for 30/40 MHz CS
Not applicable Not applicable
466.56M interface 16QAM to 256QAM
Ether exclusive Native IP on Radio
TRMD v2 Adaptive Modulation

128QAM / 30 MHz CS
155.52M interface & 128QAM / 30 MHz CS for 30/40 MHz CS
64QAM / 40 MHz CS
466.56M interface 64QAM / 40 MHz CS QPSK to 512QAM
Native IP on SDH
Both Ether/SDH Native IP on Radio
Warning: When Upload > FPGA/FIRM to TRMD v1 for Adaptive modulation is carried out, pay attention to
the following technical items below:
• FPGA uploaded TRMD v1 is only Ether (Native IP) exclusive, not commonly supported both Native
IP interface and STM-1 interface.
• TRMD v1 having 155.52 Mbit/s interface can connect with both BBINTF and GESW v1. However
FPGA uploaded TRMD v1 having 466.56 Mbit/s interface can connect only with GESW v2.
• There are two types of FPGA uploading, one is FPGA upload for adaptive modulation exclusive and
the other is for SDH exclusive.
• When BBINTF card is necessary to change GE ADPT card, new composition setting is needed after
reset (Disable) of composition.
MN.00278.E - 005 133

5.3 TRANSFER RATE
5.3.1 When set SDH/ Ether to SDH
Digital transfer rate
• 155.52 Mbit/s per RF CH for STM-1/Native IP interface
Total digital transfer rate

• 169.344 Mbit/s per RF CH for 128QAM/30 MHz CS system
• 192.384 Mbit/s per RF CH for 64QAM/40 MHz CS system
Throughput for Native IP as a parameter of m+0
• 1+0: >150 Mbit/s
• 2+0: >305 Mbit/s
• 3+0: >455 Mbit/s
• 4+0: >610 Mbit/s
• 5+0: >765 Mbit/s
• 6+0: >920 Mbit/s

• 7+0: >985 Mbit/s
• 8+0: >985 Mbit/s
In case of TRMD v2 + GESW v2 combination
Digital transfer rate:
• 30.663 to 198.71289 Mbit/s per RF CH for 30 MHz CS

• 43.008 to 265.72800 Mbits/s per RF CH for 40 MHz CS
Total digital transfer rate:

In case of FPGA uploaded TRMD v1 + GESW v2 combination
Digital transfer rate (DTR):
Total digital transfer rate (TDTR):
Tab.24 shows the relationship between digital transfer rate and total transfer rate with/without FEC for
packet size of 1,518 byte and Tab.25 and Tab.26 show the typical throughput as a parameter of packet
size and latency.
134 MN.00278.E - 005

Tab.24 - Theoretical Parameter of DTR, TDTR & Ether Rate (Throughput)
40M CS System
FEC ON FEC OFF
Total
D-bit Effect TDTR
Bit Ether NxRF Ether NxRF
(bit) Byte (Mbps) Radio DTR Ether Total Radio DTR Ether Total QAM
(bit) Rate Rate Rate Rate
Efficien. (Mbps) Efficien. Efficien. Efficien. (Mbps) Efficien. Efficien. order
(Mbps) (Gbps) (Mbps) (Gbps)
10 5010 562 320.640 0.897 287.744 0.984 283.132 0.883 0.283 0.947 303.616 0.984 298.890 0.932 0.299 1024QAM
9 4509 519 288.576 0.921 265.728 0.983 261.275 0.905 0.261 0.976 281.600 0.984 277.033 0.960 0.277 512QAM
8 4008 456 256.512 0.910 233.472 0.982 229.251 0.894 0.229 0.972 249.344 0.983 245.009 0.955 0.245 256QAM
7 3507 396 224.448 0.903 202.752 0.980 198.752 0.886 0.199 0.974 218.624 0.981 214.510 0.956 0.215 128QAM
6 3006 333 192.384 0.886 170.496 0.978 166.728 0.867 0.167 0.969 186.368 0.979 182.486 0.949 0.182 64QAM
5 2505 271 160.320 0.865 138.752 0.974 135.212 0.843 0.135 0.964 154.624 0.976 150.970 0.942 0.151 32QAM
4 2004 209 128.256 0.834 107.008 0.969 103.697 0.809 0.104 0.958 122.880 0.972 119.454 0.931 0.119 16QAM
3 1503 147 96.192 0.782 75.264 0.959 72.181 0.750 0.072 0.947 91.136 0.965 87.939 0.914 0.088 8QAM
2 1002 84 64.128 0.671 43.008 0.934 40.157 0.626 0.040 0.918 58.880 0.950 55.915 0.872 0.056 QPSK
Frame Symbol 501 0.940
Symbol Rate 32.064
Addition of FEC 31
30M CS System
FEC
FEC ON
OFF
Total
D-bit Effect TDTR
Bit
(bit) Byte (Mbps) Ether Ether Total NxRF Radio Ether Ether Total NxRF
(bit) Radio DTR DTR QAM
Effi- Rate Effi- Rate Effi- Effi- Rate Effi- Rate
Efficien. (Mbps) (Mbps) order
cien. (Mbps) cien. (Gbps) cien. cien. (Mbps) cien. (Gbps)
10 4860 558 241.920 0.919 222.208 0.984 218.633 0.904 0.219 0.970 234.553 0.984 230.889 0.954 0.231 1024QAM
9 4374 499 217.728 0.913 198.713 0.983 195.307 0.897 0.195 0.969 211.058 0.983 207.563 0.953 0.208 512QAM
8 3888 439 193.536 0.903 174.820 0.981 171.585 0.887 0.172 0.967 187.164 0.982 183.841 0.950 0.184 256QAM
7 3402 378 169.344 0.889 150.528 0.980 147.468 0.871 0.147 0.962 162.873 0.981 159.724 0.943 0.160 128QAM
6 2916 318 145.152 0.872 126.635 0.977 123.747 0.853 0.124 0.957 138.980 0.979 136.003 0.937 0.136 64QAM
5 2430 258 120.960 0.849 102.741 0.974 100.025 0.827 0.100 0.951 115.086 0.976 112.281 0.928 0.112 32QAM
4 1944 197 96.768 0.811 78.450 0.968 75.909 0.784 0.076 0.938 90.795 0.971 88.165 0.911 0.088 16QAM
3 1458 137 72.576 0.752 54.556 0.957 52.187 0.719 0.052 0.922 66.901 0.963 64.443 0.888 0.064 8QAM
2 972 77 48.384 0.634 30.663 0.928 28.466 0.588 0.028 0.889 43.008 0.947 40.722 0.842 0.041 QPSK
Frame Symbol 486
Symbol Rate 24.192

FEC addition 31
Packet Size 1518 MAC packet size
LCAS add 5 Data rate increase by LCAS information insertion[fixed in this case)
Super Frame length 1024 Super Frame length (fixed)
Super Frame add 0 Addition of Super Frame length (No use)
MAC add 11 Increasing rate by MAC ? HDLC capsulization [estimated)
N+0 used 1 Number of RF channels usedTDTR
MN.00278.E - 005 135

Warning: DTR: Digital transfer rate
Ethernet Rate (Throughput) + FEC + additional bits for dynamic mapping and etc.
Warning: TDTR: Total digital transfer rate per RF channel

Digital transfer rate (DTR) + radio frame complementary overhead bits (RFCOH).
TDTR is equal to N x 24.192 / 32.064 Mbits/s for 30/40 MHz CS.
Warning: Throughput means effective data speed excluding overhead bits.

Definition of throughput is “the maximum rate at which none of the offered frames are dropped by the
device” in accordance with RFC1242.
Tab.25 - Throughput for 30 MHz CS per RF channel (Mbit/s)
L1 Throughput L2 Throughput
QAM
Packet Size (byte) Packet size (byte)
Order
64 256 1,518 9,600 64 256 1,518 9,600
QPSK 24 24 24 24 18 22 24 24
8QAM 48 48 48 48 37 45 47 48
16QAM 72 72 72 72 55 67 71 72
32QAM 96 96 96 96 73 89 95 96
64QAM 120 120 120 120 91 111 119 120
128QAM 144 144 144 144 110 134 142 144
256QAM 168 168 168 168 128 156 166 168
512QAM 192 192 192 192 146 178 190 192
Tab.26 - Throughput for 40 MHz CS per RF channel (Mbit/s)
L1 Throughput L2 Throughput
QAM
Packet Size (byte) Packet size (byte)
Order
64 256 1,518 9,600 64 256 1,518 9,600
QPSK 35 35 35 35 26 32 34 35
8QAM 67 67 67 67 51 62 66 67
16QAM 99 99 99 99 75 92 97 99
32QAM 131 131 131 131 99 121 129 130
64QAM 162 162 162 162 124 150 160 162
128QAM 195 195 195 195 148 180 192 194
256QAM 225 225 225 225 172 209 222 225
512QAM 258 258 258 258 196 239 254 257
Warning: Actual L2 throughput is slightly (only few Mbit/s) less than theoretical throughput as shown in
Tab.24 because of L2SW-to-FPGA bandwidth limitation within available radio throughput.
136 MN.00278.E - 005

Tab.27 - Typical Latency for One-Way & 1+0 Operation
Packet Size=1,518 Byte
30 MHz CS 40 MHz CS
QAM Order
Throughput Latency Throughput Latency
(Mbit/s) (sec) (Mbit/s) (sec)
QPSK 24 0.001160 34 0.000833
8QAM 47 0.000716 66 0.000536
16QAM 71 0.000541 97 0.000412
32QAM 95 0.000458 129 0.000350
64QAM 119 0.000399 160 0.000307
128QAM 142 0.000362 192 0.000283
256QAM 166 0.000337 222 0.000263
512QAM 190 0.000317 254 0.000247
Warning: Throughput is one example under condition below:

Throughput is set to lower than maximum radio capacity by shaper setting for minimizing to lose high pri-
ority data in the presence of QoS operation. Throughput is dependent of shaper setting.
5.4 AUXILIARY SIGNAL
When set SDH/ Ether to SDH
• Max. two (2) optional 2.048 Mbit/s WS on SOH & RFCOH on BBINTF
• Max. three (3) optional radio user channels on AUX INTF
When set SDH/ Ether to Ether
• Max. three (3) optional radio user channels on AUX INTF
5.5 BASEBAND INTERFACE
1. STM-1 electrical with/without SPF
2. STM-1 optical with SFP

3. STM-4 optical with SFP
4. 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX electrical (1+0) on GESW v1
5. 1000BASE-T electrical with max. 4 SFP applying link aggregation
6. 1000BASE-SX optical with max. 4 SFP applying link aggregation
7. 1000BASE-LX optical with max. 4 SFP applying link aggregation
MN.00278.E - 005 137

Hybrid operation of mixed SDH and Native IP interface is available in a same system and in case of 1+1
BB redundant operation for above item (1) and (2), addition of Extension baseband (Ext-BB) shelf with
BRSW and BB INTF cards are needed only for 2,200 mm ETSI rack.
5.6 RPS SWITCHING CAPACITY
When set SDH/Ether to SDH
Switching capacity for STM-1 interface and single/dual/double terminal configuration is shown in Tab.28
and Tab.29.
When set SDH/Ether to Ether
Switching capacity for Native IP interface and single/dual/double terminal configuration is M+0 with RPS
DISABLE. M=max. 8 for each GP1 and GP2.
Warning: Mixed GESW v1 and GESW v2 installation is NOT allowed for use in the same shelf.
Tab.28 - Radio switching capacity for terminal (TERM)
GP1-RPS GP2-RPS
Switching
Remarks
Capacity
RPS system RPS function RPS system RPS function
n+0 Disable - - Max. n=16
N+1 Enable - - Max. N=15

Combined
n+0 Disable m+0 Disable Max. n+m=16
ACCP/ACAP/CCDP
for Single/Dual RF
N+1 Enable m+0 Disable Max. N+m=15
available
n+0 Disable M+1 Enable Max. n+M=15
N+1 Enable M+1 Enable Max. N+M=14
Tab.29 - Radio Switching Capacity for Dual/Double Terminal (DT)
GP1-RPS for A-B route GP1-RPS for A-C route Switching

Remarks
Capacity

Combined
N+1 Enable m+0 Disable Max. N+m=15 ACCP/ACAP/CCDP
for Single/Dual RF
available
138 MN.00278.E - 005

5.7 OVERHEAD BYTE ACCESS FOR SDH
5.7.1 Overhead Byte Access
Same insert/separation method same as SDH fiber optic transmission system for terminal and repeater
station.
• RS Section 7: A1, A2, C1, B1, E1, F1 and D1-D3 byte.
• MS Section 8: B2, K1, K2, D4-D12, E2, M1 and S1 byte.
5.7.2 Max. hops without Ext CLK
20 cascaded hops with network element clock in accordance with ITU-T G.813. Synchronous network ref-
erence chain is in accordance with ITU-T G.803
5.7.3 SDH multiplexing structure
In accordance with FIGURE 6-1/G.707 and AU pointer acts within AU-4 frame only as shown in Fig.85. AU-
3 frame is NOT supported.
Fig.85 - SDH multiplexing structure
Regarding specific point for technical parameter is in accordance with ETSI EN302 217-1 V1.2.1 (2007-06).
7 RS bytes drop/insert processes are carried out within TL radio section.

8 MS bytes are digitally through without drop/insert processes within TL radio section.
MN.00278.E - 005 139

5.8 SYNCHRONOUS ETHERNET
5.8.1 ECC
Synchronous Ethernet Equipment Clock (EEC) is in accordance with ITU-T G.8262/Y.1362.
5.8.2 Max. hops without SSU
20 cascaded hops with network element clock in accordance with ITU-T G.8261/Y.1361 (SyncE).
5.8.3 Sync CLK Source
Line port recovered clock of GESW

Radio port recovered clock of GESW
External clock
Holdover generated by holdover function

Internal clock
5.8.4 CLK IN/OUT
2.048 Mbit/s in accordance with ITU-T G.703, from SSU
2.048 Mbit/s to external equipment, EEC-Option1
5.8.5 CLK IN/OUT Port
1.0/2.3 coaxial connector.
5.9 TRANSMITTER
5.9.1 Output Power
In accordance with Tab.30, Tab.31 and Tab.32 depending on baseband interface and RF, measured at
TRMD output at Point A'.
When transmit output power is defined at Point B', converted value is calculated by using calibration value
as shown Tab.33. Please note that there is no test point at Point B'.
140 MN.00278.E - 005

5.9.2 HPA Backoff
8 dB for 64QAM and 9dB for 128QAM without TX overdrive at 1-dB saturation point.
5.9.3 TX Output Power Overdrive
+2 dB & maximum +35 dBm output.
This function is enabled for longer radio hop (> 60 km for example) without ETSI EN standard compliance.
Tab.30 - Transmit Output Power for STM-1 interface (dBm)
30 MHz CS 40 MHz CS
Modulation Tolerance
STPa/with ODb HPc/with ODb. STPa./with ODb. HPc./with ODb.
64QAM (4-8G) - - +30/+32 +33/+35
64QAM (11G) - - +30/+32 -
128QAM (4-8G) +29/+31 +32/+34 - - +/-1 dB
128QAM (11G) +29/+31 - - -
128QAM (13G) +27/+29 - - -
a. Standard TX power output

b. TX overdrive function
c. High TX power output
Tab.31 - Transmit Output Power for Native IP interface and 30 MHz CS (dBm)
Highest 4 to 8 GHz 4 to 8 GHz 13 GHz 13 GHz

Tolerance
Modulation STPa./with ODb. HPc./with ODb. STPa./with ODb. HPc./with ODb.
QPSK +29/+31 +32/+34 +29/+31 +27/+29
8QAM +29/+31 +32/+34 +29/+31 +27/+29
16QAM +29/+31 +32/+34 +29/+31 +27/+29
32QAM +29/+31 +32/+34 +29/+31 +27/+29

+/-1 dB
64QAM +29/+31 +32/+34 +29/+31 +27/+29
128QAM +29/+31 +32/+34 +29/+31 +27/+29

a and b a. and b. a. and b.
256QAM +28/ +31/ +28/ +26/a. and b.
512QAM +27/a. and b. +30/a. and b. +27/a. and b. +25/a. and b.
a. Tx Overdrive function (OD) is not recommended for use.

b. Tx output power adjustment using MTPC function in the Transmitter Parameter menu on WebLT is re-
quired when 256/512QAM for 30 MHz CS and 12/256/512QAM for 40 MHz CS is set.
MN.00278.E - 005 141

Tab.32 - Transmit Output Power for Native IP interface and 40 MHz CS (dBm)
Highest 4 to 8 GHz 4 to 8 GHz 11 GHz 11 GHz

Tolerance
Modulation STPa./with ODb. HPc./with ODb. STPa./with ODb. HPc./with ODb.
QPSK +30/+32 +33/+35 +30/+32 -
8QAM +30/+32 +33/+35 +30/+32 -
16QAM +30/+32 +33/+35 +30/+32 -
32QAM +30/+32 +33/+35 +30/+32 -

+/-1 dB
64QAM +30/+32 +33/+35 +30/+32 -
128QAM +29/a. and b. +32/a. and b. +29/a. and b. -
Tab.33 - Calibration Value for Transmit Output Power at Ta=25°C
RF TRMD ADPT loss TBF loss Calibration value
4G type1 0.37 0.75 1.12
4G type2 0.37 0.90 1.27
5G type1 0.40 0.90 1.30
L6G 0.43 1.10 1.53
U6G type1/2 0.46 1.05 1.51
7G 0.49 1.25 1.74
8G 0.51 1.25 1.76
11G 0.60 1.44 2.04
11G 0.60 1.88 2.48
13G 0.68 1.58 2.26
Ma in
An te n n a P o rt
DUP
BEF

T R AD PT
R e fe re n ce B '
R eferenc e A '
Trans m it s ide
TR
CH3
MD
R e ce ive r s id e
BEF
Fig.86 -
142 MN.00278.E - 005

5.9.4 RF AMP Linearity Compensation
Linearizer circuit is employed to maintain optimum linearity using DPD (Digital pre-distortion).
5.9.5 TX Local Carrier
• RF band oscillation with PLL
• Synthesizer type, frequency pre-settable
• Half band frequency coverage for 4 to 8 GHz band
• Quarter band frequency coverage for 11/13 GHz band
5.9.6 Radio Frequency Tolerance
Within +/- 10 ppm
5.9.7 TX LO Frequency Stability
Within +/- 10 ppm
Monitoring reference clock of TX LOC is 19.2 MHz for 8G type1 and 20.0 MHz for L6G, U6G, 8G type5 & 11G
5.9.8 RF Spectrum Mask when SDH/Ether to SDH and Ether
In accordance with ESTI EN302 217-2-2 V1.4.1 (2010-07)
1. Seven segment spectrum mask

Refer to Fig.87 and Fig.88, measure at DUP output
Spectrum analyzer setting parameters are as follows;
- RF center frequency: Nominal RF channel center frequency
- Amplitude scale: 10 dB/div
- IF bandwidth: 300 kHz for 40 MHz CS, 100 kHz for 30 MHz CS
- Sweep width: 200 MHz for 40 MHz CS, 150 MHz for 30 MHz CS
- Scan time: AUTO
- Video bandwidth filter: 300 Hz
MN.00278.E - 005 143

5.9.9 Discrete CW components within spectrum mask when SDH/Ether
to SDH and Ether
1. Discrete CW components at the symbol rate (Efficiency class 5B)

< 43 dB below the mean power level of the carrier for CWs
(In case of +32 dBm TX output, CWs becomes < -11 dBm)
2. Other discrete CW components exceeding the spectrum mask limit calculated as 10Log (CSmin/IF-
BW)-10
< 9.5 dB for CW1 to CWn
Refer to Fig.89 as a typical example.
5.9.10 Occupied Bandwidth for STM-1 when SDH/Ether to SDH and

Ether 9
Bn = 35.40 MHz for 40 MHz CS
Bn = 25.98 MHz for 30 MHz (28/29/29.65/30 MHz) CS

Bn = 2 x K (a) / T
Where, K (a): a function of roll-off factor
In accordance with ITU-R F.1191
0.552 for 25% (40 MHz CS)
0.537 for 20% (30 MHz CS)
T: Pulse width (= 1 / clock frequency)
1 / 32.064 MHz for 40 MHz CS
1 / 24.192 MHz for 30 MHz CS
5.9.11 Spurious Emission - External when SDH/Ether to SDH and Ether
In accordance with ETSI EN301 390 V1.2.1 (2003-11).

Refer to Fig.90 and measured at duplexer (DUP) output
Interference into other systems operation wholly externally to the system under con-
sideration
1. < -50 dBm in the frequency range 30 MHz to 21.2 GHz
2. < -30 dBm in the frequency range 21.2 GHz to 26.0 GHz
Spurious emission is defined as any emission at frequencies which are outside the nominal carrier frequen-
cy by more than +/- 250% of the relevant channel separation. That is:
• Outside Ft +/- 100 MHz for 40 MHz CS system
• Outside Ft +/- 75 MHz for 30 MHz CS system
9 Occupied bandwidth is defined as the width of a frequency band such that, below and above the upper
frequency limits, the mean powers emitted are each equal to a 0.5% of the total mean power of a given
emission and calculated in accordance with ITU-R F.1191 ANNEX 1, section 2.1
144 MN.00278.E - 005

5.9.12 Dynamic Change of Modulation Order when SDH/Ether to Ether
In accordance with ETSI EN302 217-2-2 V1.4.1 (2010-07)
1. Seven segment spectrum mask

Refer to Fig.91 and Fig.92, measure at DUP output
2. Changing modulation order from QPSK to 512QAM on WebLT
Spectrum analyzer setting parameters are as follows:
• RF center frequency: Nominal RF channel center frequency
• Amplitude scale: 10 dB/div
• IF bandwidth: 300 kHz for 40 MHz CS, 100 kHz for 30 MHz CS
• Sweep width: 200 MHz for 40 MHz CS, 150 MHz for 30 MHz CS
• Scan time: AUTO
• Video bandwidth filter: 300 Hz
• Measurement in "max hold" mode
5.9.13 IF
• 1st IF: 140 MHz

nd
• 2 IF: 844 MHz
5.9.14 TX IF Input
• Signal level: -10 dBm nominal, Variation +1 dB, -1 dB
• Impedance: 50 ohm unbalanced
5.9.15 TX RF Input
• Signal level: -10 dBm nominal, Variation +1 dB, -1 dB
5.9.16 IF stability
• 1st IF: +/- 20 ppm

nd
• 2 IF: +/- 10 ppm
MN.00278.E - 005 145

5.9.17 RF Filter (BRU)
4-section, Dielectric filter
• 3 dB bandwidth: 40 MHz for 40 MHz CS system

30 MHz for 30 MHz CS system
5.9.18 RF Filter (TRMD)
5-section, LPF for image rejection
5.9.19 844 MHz Filter
• In-band bandwidth: 160 MHz
• Out-band attenuation: >45 dB at 704 MHz
LPF, >40 dB for image rejection
5.9.21 ATPC
Automatic transmit power control (ATPC) is available as standard.
• Power control level: Max. 20 dB, continuous
• Control speed: 100 dB/sec
• Control initiation: Received signal level threshold

RSL=-45 dBm or -55 dBm or -65 dBm
Pre-settable by WebLT
5.9.22 MTPC
Manual transmit power control (MTPC) is available as standard.
• Power control level: 0 to 20 dB, 1-dB step
• Control: Manual
146 MN.00278.E - 005

5.9.23 RF Output Return Loss
• Return loss: > 26 (24) dB/ F010 MHz +/- 20 MHz for 40 MHz CS
> 26 (24) dB / F010 MHz +/- 15 MHz for 30 MHz CS
measured at DUP output port.
5.9.24 TX Output Connector Used
BMA type plug-in connector at card back plane
Connected with TRMD Adaptor
10 F0 means the centre frequency of transmit working RF channels.
MN.00278.E - 005 147

1. Discrete CW components at the symbol rate of 24.192 MHz (CWs):
< 43 dB for the mean power level of the carrier
2. Other discrete CW components (CW1 to CWn)

< 9.5 dB exceeding the spectrum mask limit
Fig.87 - RF Spectrum Mask (30 MHz CS system)

(In accordance with ETSI EN 302 217-2-2 V1.4.1 (2010-07)
B.3.2, System B.3, Class 5B
148 MN.00278.E - 005



C.3.2, System C.1, Class 5B
MN.00278.E - 005 149

Factor exceed the mask: 10Log(CS min/IF BW) - 10
RF CS min (MHz) IF Bandwidth (MHz) Factor (dB)
4G type2 10 24 -9.6
4G type1 10 28 -9.6
5G 10 28 -9.6
L6G 14.825 24 -9.5
U6G type1/2 10 28 -9.6
7G 7 24 -9.6
8G 7 24 -9.6
11G 10 28 -9.6
13G 1.75 24 -9.0
Fig.89 - Typical Example of CW Lines exceeding the RF Spectrum Mask

150 MN.00278.E - 005

Reference bandwidth:
• 1 kHz: for spurious emissions falling between 9 kHz and 150 kHz
• 10 kHz: for spurious emission falling between 150 kHz and 30 MHz
• 100 kHz: for spurious emission falling between 30 MHz and 1 GHz
• 1 MHz: for spurious emission falling above 1 GHz
Fig.90 - Generic Spurious Emission Reference Bandwidth Limit Mask

(In accordance with ETSI EN 301 390 V1.2.1 (2003-11) Fig.A.1)
MN.00278.E - 005 151

<43 dB for the mean power level of the carrier

<9.5 dB exceeding the spectrum mask limit
Fig.91 - Spectrum Mask for Dynamic Change of Modulation Order

Reference Mode Spectrum Mask (30 MHz CS system)
In accordance with ETSI EN 302 217-2-2 V1.4.1 (2010-07)
B.3.2, System B.3, Class 5B
152 MN.00278.E - 005



C.3.2, System C.1, Class 5B
MN.00278.E - 005 153

5.10 RECEIVER
5.10.1 Noise Figure
• 2.3 dB typical (for 4 to 6GHz band)
• 2.8 dB guaranteed (for 4 to 6GHz band)
• 2.5 dB typical (for 7/8GHz band)

• 3.0 dB guaranteed (for 7/8GHz band)
• 3.0 dB typical (for 11GHz band)
• 3.5 dB guaranteed (for 11GHz band)
• 4.0 dB typical (for 13GHz band)
• 4.5 dB guaranteed (for 13GHz band)
Measured at TRMD RF input at Point A of both main and SD receiver independently and at maximum gain
of IF amplifier.
5.10.2 RX Local Carrier
RF band oscillation with PLL
Synthesizer type, frequency pre-settable

Half band frequency coverage for 4 to 8 GHz band
Quarter band frequency coverage for 11/13 GHz band
5.10.3 Spurious Emission - External when SDH/Ether to SDH and Ether
In accordance with ETSI EN301 390 V1.2.1 (2003-11)
Fig.90 and measured at duplexer (DUP) output
Interference into other systems operation wholly externally to the system under consideration
1. < -50 dBm in the frequency range 30 MHz to 21.2 GHz
2. < -30 dBm in the frequency range 21.2 GHz to 26.0 GHz
Spurious emission is defined as any emission at frequencies which are outside the nominal carrier frequen-
cy by more than +/- 250% of the relevant channel separation. That is:
• Outside Fr +/- 100 MHz for 40 MHz CS system
• Outside Fr +/- 75 MHz for 30 MHz CS system
5.10.4 RX LO Frequency Stability
Within +/- 10 ppm
154 MN.00278.E - 005

5.10.5 CW spurious interference when SDH/Ether to SDH and Ether
In accordance with ETSI EN302 217-2-2 V1.4.1 (2010-07) and ETSI EN301 390 V1.2.1 (2003-11)
Testing condition is as follows:
1. QAM'ed Carrier signal level, RSLc

Set RSLc to BER = 10-6 by adjusting RF attenuator
2. Addition of CW interference signal, Ic (equal to image RX signal)

Set Ic to RSLc + 30 dB
At that time, carrier path shall not result in a BER greater than 10E-5.
5.10.6 Inter-Modulation
• IM3: >50 dB
• IM5: >50 dB
measured at maximum RSL of -19 dBm
5.10.7 Normal RSL
-32 to -55 dBm
5.10.8 Maximum RSL
• Maximum level: - 19 dBm guaranteed at BER of 10(-10)
5.10.9 AGC Dynamic Range
> 77 dB
-18 to -95 dBm for QPSK to 512QAM system

measured at TRMD RF input.
5.10.10 RX/SD IF
• 1st IF: 844 MHz

nd
• 2 IF: 140 MHz
MN.00278.E - 005 155

5.10.11 844 MHz stability
• +/- 10 ppm
5.10.12 RF to IF interface
• Signal level: -20 to -60 dBm nominal

Measured in the AGC range of -18 to -95 dBm
5.10.13 RF Filter (BRU)
4-section Dielectric filter
• 3 dB bandwidth 40 MHz for 40 MHz CS system

30 MHz for 30 MHz CS system
5.10.14 RF Filter (TRMD)
None
• In-band bandwidth: 32 MHz
• Out-band attenuation: >45 dB at 744 MHz
None
5.10.17 RF Input Return Loss
• Return loss: >26 (24) dB / F011 MHz +/- 20 MHz for 40 MHz CS
> 26 (24) dB / F011 MHz +/- 15 MHz for 30 MHz CS
measured at DUP input port and ( ) value is guaranteed.
11 F0 means the center frequency of receive RF channels.
156 MN.00278.E - 005

5.10.18 RX/SD RF Input Connector Used
BMA type plug-in connector at TRMD card back plane.
Connected with TRMD Adaptor.
5.11 MODEM
5.11.1 When set SDH/ Ether to SDH
Fixed QAM
1. 64QAM with low density parity check (LDPC) type FEC

for 40 MHz channel separation (CS) system
2. 128QAM with low density parity check (LDPC) type FEC

for 30 MHz (28/29/29.65/30M) channel separation (CS)
Warning: When GESW v1 is installed, Native IP on SDH is available.
In case of TRMD v2
Fixed modulation (T-FIX)
• QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM with low density parity check (LDPC) type FEC for 30/40 MHz
CS selectable by WebLT
Warning: Fixed 512QAM operation is not recommended for use because of long frame sync time
(>=10 min.) with MAX/MIN QAM=512QAM
or
Adaptive QAM (Adaptive)
• QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM with low density parity check (LDPC) type FEC for 30/40 MHz
CS depending path propagation condition
In case of FPGA uploaded TRMD v1
Fixed Modulation (T-FIX);
• 16/32/64/128/256QAM with low density parity check (LDPC) type FEC for 30/40 MHz CS selectable
by WebLT
or
Adaptive QAM (Adaptive);
• 16/32/64/128/256QAM with low density parity check (LDPC) type FEC for 30/40 MHz CS depending
path propagation condition
MN.00278.E - 005 157

5.11.3 Spectrum shaping
25 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 40 MHz CS
20 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 28/29/29.65/30 MHz CS
5.11.4 Local carrier
Crystal oscillator (XO)
5.11.5 140M Local frequency stability
Within ±20 ppm
5.11.6 Symbol Rate
• 32.064 Mb/s for 40 MHz CS

• 24.192 Mb/s for 30 MHz CS
5.11.7 ATDE
21-tap adaptive time domain equalizer composing:
• 10-tap linear transversal equalizer (LTE) with

• 10 tap decision feedback equalizer (DFE) inside DEM LSI
5.12 DIGITAL PROCESSING (SDH INTERFACE)
5.12.1 BBINTF card (STM-1 electrical)
• CMI-to-Unipolar/Unipolar-to-CMI conversion
• Frame synchronization to STM-1 frame
• Section Adaptation (change the pointer)
• Scrambler/descrambler
• Addition/Drop of section overhead bit
- Framing bit (A1, A2)
- Regenerator section parity (B1)
158 MN.00278.E - 005

- Network management for regenerator section (D1 to D3)
- Regenerator Section orderwire (E1)
- User channel (F1)
- Section trace (J0)
5.12.2 BBINTF card (STM-1 optical)
• STM-1 optical-to-electrical/STM-1 electrical-to-optical converter
• CMI-to-Unipolar/Unipolar-to-CMI conversion


- User channel (F1)
5.12.3 STM4O card (STM-4 optical)
• STM-4 optical-to-STM-1 electrical converter

• CMI-to-Unipolar/Unipoler-to-CMI conversion
- User channel (F1)
5.12.4 FE on GESW v1 10/100BASE-T/TX
• 1B/2B or 4B/5B-to/from-Aggregate Ethernet signal conversion
• Ethernet mapping / demapping into pseudo STM-1 frame
MN.00278.E - 005 159

• Distribution/Aggregation of FE traffic to/from Line/Radio side
• L2SW function with STP/RSTP.
• Distribution/combination of Fast Ethernet signal to GE ADPT cards
• Switching control function for M+0 system, Link aggregation and fallback protection, proprietary
load balancing on radio side
5.13 DIGITAL PROCESSING (NATIVE IP ON SDH)
5.13.1 GESW 1000BASE-T
• 4D-PAM5-to/from-Aggregate Ethernet signal conversion
• Ethernet frame mapping/de-mapping into pseudo STM-1 frame
• Distribution/Aggregation of GE signal to/from Line/Radio side
• L2SW function with STP/RSTP

• Distribution/combination of Gigabit Ethernet signal to GE ADPT cards
• Switching control function for M+0 system
• Link aggregation and fallback protection, proprietary load balancing on radio side
5.13.2 GESW 1000BASE-SX/LX
• Optical-to/from-Aggregate Ethernet signal conversion
• Ethernet frame mapping/de-mapping into pseudo STM-1 frame
• Distribution/Aggregation of GE signal to/from Line/Radio side
• L2SW function with STP/RSTP
• Distribution/combination of Gigabit Ethernet signal to GE ADPT cards
• Switching control function for M+0 system

• Link aggregation and fallback protection, proprietary load balancing on radio side
5.14 DIGITAL PROCESSING (NATIVE IP ON RADIO)
5.14.1 FE on GESW v1 10/100BASE-T/TX
1B/2B or 4B/5B-to/from-Aggregate Ethernet signal conversion
Ethernet mapping/demapping into information frame
Distribution/Aggregation of FE traffic to/from Line/Radio side
L2SW function with STP/RSTP
160 MN.00278.E - 005

Distribution/combination of Fast Ethernet signal to GE ADPT cards
Switching control function for M+0 system, aggregation and fallback protection, proprietary load balancing
on radio side
5.14.2 GESW 1000BASE-T
4D-PAM5-to/from-Aggregate Ethernet signal conversion
Distribution/Aggregation of GE traffic to/from Line/Radio side
Distribution/combination of Gigabit Ethernet signal to GE ADPT cards
Switching control function for M+0 system, aggregation and fallback protection, proprietary load balancing
on radio side
5.14.3 GE SW 1000BASE-SX/LX
Optical-to/from-Aggregate Ethernet signal conversion

Distribution/Aggregation of GE traffic to/from Line/Radio side

Distribution/combination of Gigabit Ethernet signal to GE ADPT cards
Switching control function for M+0 system, Link aggregation and fallback protection, proprietary load bal-
ancing on radio side
5.15 DIGITAL PROCESSING (RADIO TO RADIO)
Radio frame synchronization
Information frame to Radio frame conversion
Dynamic mapping/demapping to/from TRMD by VCAT & LCAS
Addition/Drop of RFCOH bit
• Frame alignment
• Redundancy bit for LDPC
• Digital service channel
• RPS control signal
• Route identification
• Way side traffic
• Transfer bit for frequency measurement

• ATPC control signal.
MN.00278.E - 005 161

5.16 OVERALL BER (WHEN SET SDH/ETHER TO SDH)
5.16.1 Upfade
• < BER = 10-10 at RSL of -19 dBm (typical), -22 dBm (guaranteed)
measured at TRMD card input
5.16.2 Downfade
For 64 QAM (Fig.93):
• BER = 10-6 at RSL of -75.5 dBm typical
• BER = 10-6 at RSL of -72.5 dBm guaranteed (-67.5 dBm12)
• BER = 10-10 at RSL of -70.5 dBm guaranteed (-63.5 dBm12)
measured at TRMD card input (at point A) for main RX and SD RX independently. For 11 GHz band, 0.5 dB
RSL relaxation is required.
For 128 QAM (Fig.94):
• BER = 10-6 at RSL of -69.0 dBm guaranteed (-65.5 dBm) (13)
• BER = 10-10 at RSL of -67.0 dBm guaranteed (-61.5 dBm) (13)
measured at TRMD card input (at point A) for main RX and SD RX independently. For 11/13 GHz band,
0.5/1.5 dB RSL relaxation is required.
5.16.3 Residual BER
BER = 10-13/hop/day (typical) at normal receiving condition
BER = 10-12/hop/day (guaranteed) at normal receiving condition
12 This value is ETSI EN302 217-2-2 V1.4.1 (2010-07) Annex C, C.4.2, C.1-5B Type 2 performance limit.
In case of ETSI standard, measured point is at point B for the system with a multi-channel branching sys-
tem and 1.5 dB relaxation by using contiguous filter, not hybrid for CCDP. Therefore for above BER spec-
ification, RX BPF calibration is needed to meet ETSI limit. For 11 GHz, more 1.5 dB relaxation.
13 This value is ETSI EN302 217-2-2 V1.4.1 (2010-07) Annex B, B.4.2, B.3-5B Class 5B performance lim-
it. In case of ETSI standard, measured point is at point B for the system with a multi-channel branching
system and 1.5 dB relaxation by using contiguous type filter, not hybrid
For 13 GHz band, ETSI standard is -64.5 dBm for BER=10-6 and -60.5 dBm for BER of 10-10.
When RSL is defined at Point B in accordance with ETSI EN302 217-1 V1.2.1 (2007-06), converted value
is calculated by using MSTU ADPT+ RX BPF loss as shown Tab.34.
Please note there is no test point at Point B.
162 MN.00278.E - 005

Fig.93 - BER vs RSL (64QAM System) for STM-1
MN.00278.E - 005 163

Fig.94 - BER vs RSL (128QAM System) for STM-1
164 MN.00278.E - 005

Tab.34 - Calibration Value for BER Performance at Ta=25°C
RF RX BPF Loss TRMD Adaptor loss Calibration Value
4G type2 0.75 0.60 1.35
4G type1 0.90 0.60 1.50
5G 0.90 0.64 1.54
L6G 1.10 0.74 1.84
U6G type1/2 1.05 0.78 1.83
7G 1.25 0.81 2.06
8G 1.25 0.84 2.09
11G type1/2/3 1.44 0.97 2.41
11G type4 1.88 0.97 2.85
13G 1.58 1.08 2.66
Fig.95 -
Tab.35 - Explanation of Measured Point A of TL and Point C of ETSI standard
Measurement Point Remarks
At Point A
TL Radio
TRMD RF input (ref.A)
At Point B
ETSI EN302 217-1 V1.2.1 Calibration value =
RX BPF input
(2007-06) RX BPF Loss + TRMD Adaptor Loss
(Between CIR and RX BPF)
MN.00278.E - 005 165

5.17 OVERALL BER (WHEN SET SDH/ ETHER TO ETHER)
5.17.1 Upfade
measured at TRMD unit input.
5.17.2 Downfade
30 MHz CS System
QPSK for data rate 30.66311 Mbit/s:
• BER = 10-6 at RSL of -87.0 dBm guaranteed
8QAM for data rate 54.55644 Mbit/s:

32 QAM for data rate 102.74133 Mbit/s:
166 MN.00278.E - 005

40 MHz CS System
QPSK for data rate 43.008 Mbit/s:

64 QAM data rate 170.496 Mbit/s:
MN.00278.E - 005 167

512QAM data rate 265.728 Mbit/s:
measured at TRMD card input (at point A) for main RX and SD RX independently. For 11/13 GHz band,
0.5dB/1.5dB RSL relaxation is required. For calibration value at Point B, please refer to Tab.36 and Tab.37
below.
5.17.3 Residual BER
• BER = 10-13/hop/day (typical) at normal receiving condition

• BER = 10-12/hop/day (guaranteed) at normal receiving condition
Warning: BER measurement is only carried out at laboratory or factory using artificial transmission line and
error counter with functional switch setting on TRMD card.
Tab.36 - Calibration Value for BER Performance at Ta=25°C
RF RX BPF Loss TRMD Adaptor loss Calibration Value
4G type2 0.75 0.60 1.35
4G type1 0.90 0.60 1.50
5G 0.90 0.64 1.54
L6G 1.10 0.74 1.84
U6G type1/2 1.05 0.78 1.83
7G 1.25 0.81 2.06
8G 1.25 0.84 2.09
11G type1/2/3 1.44 0.97 2.41
11G type4 1.88 0.97 2.85
13G 1.58 1.08 2.66
168 MN.00278.E - 005

Fig.96 -
Tab.37 - Explanation of Measured Point A of TL and Point C of ETSI standard
Measurement Point Remarks
At Point A
TL Radio
TRMD RF input (ref.A)
At Point B
ETSI EN302 217-1 V1.2.1 Calibration value =
RX BPF input
(2007-06) RX BPF Loss + TRMD Adaptor Loss
(Between CIR and RX BPF)
5.18 OVERALL
5.18.1 Signature When set SDH/ Ether to SDH
Static Signature
64QAM for 40 MHz CS
• Bc > 22 dB / 140 MHz ±14 MHz for NMP (guaranteed)
• Bc > 25 dB / 140 MHz ±14 MHz for NMP (typical)
• Bc > 35 dB / 140 MHz ±14 MHz for MP (guaranteed)
• Bc > 40 dB / 140 MHz ±14 MHz for MP (typical)
MN.00278.E - 005 169

128QAM for 30 MHz CS
• Bc > 22 dB / 140 MHz ±12 MHz for NMP (guaranteed)
• Bc > 25 dB / 140 MHz ±12 MHz for NMP (typical)

• Bc > 30 dB / 140 MHz ±12 MHz for MP (guaranteed)
• Bc > 35 dB / 140 MHz ±12 MHz for MP (typical)
measured at BB-TRMD-BRU-TRMD-BB overall configuration and BER = 1x10(-6) and tau = 6.3ns
Dynamic Signature
Minimum Phase Fade (MP)
• Notch depth 20 dB and less than 30 MHz/sec notch speed:
• No synchronous loss and AU-AIS transfer
Non-Minimum Phase Fade (NMP)
measured at BB-TRMD-BRU-TRMD-BB overall configuration and tau = 6.3ns
5.18.2 Signature When set SDH/ Ether to Ether (Only reference)
Static Signature (Typical) (Guaranteed: -3 dB)
30 MHz CS system
• Bc > 38 dB / 140 MHz ±12 MHz for QPSK, NMP
• Bc > 40 dB / 140 MHz ±12 MHz for QPSK, MP
• Bc > 30 dB / 140 MHz ±12 MHz for 8QAM, NMP
• Bc > 40 dB / 140 MHz ±12 MHz for 8QAM, MP

• Bc > 40 dB / 140 MHz ±12 MHz for 16QAM MP
170 MN.00278.E - 005

40 MHz CS system
• Bc > 33 dB / 140 MHz ±16 MHz for QPSK, NMP
• Bc > 40 dB / 140 MHz ±16 MHz for QPSK, MP


measured at BB-TRMD-BRU-TRMD-BB overall configuration and BER = 1x10(-6) and tau = 6.3ns.
5.18.3 QAM Order Change vs. RSL (typical)
When set SDH/Ether to Ether / Mode to Adaptive, QAM order change vs. RSL in the static fade is in accord-
ance with Tab.38.
Warning: For 11/13 GHz band, 1.5 dB relaxation is needed.
Tab.38 - QAM Order Change vs. RSL for Adaptive Modulation
QAM Order Change versus RSL (dBm), measured at TRMD input

CS
4-8 8-16 16-32 32-64 64-128 128-256 256-512
30 MHz -78+/-4 -76+/-4 -73+/-4 -70+/-4 -66+/-4 -63+/-5 -56+/-6
40 MHz -78+/-4 -76+/-4 -73+/-4 -70+/-4 -66+/-4 -62+/-5 -53+/-7
5.19 DFM
5.19.1 System design parameter for STM-1 trunk line
• > 50 dB for 64QAM
• > 50 dB for 128QAM.
MN.00278.E - 005 171

5.20 FUNCTION OF LICENSE KEY
1. TX High power function
2. SD function
3. XPIC function
4. TX output overdrive function
5. AM (Adaptive Modulation) function
6. Expansion Fixed QAM function
7. WSS function (WS on SOH) for BBINTF-X/Y each
8. WSR function (WS on RFCOH) for BBINTF-X/Y each
9. GP2/DT function
Warning: Availability of license key function depends on SNMP-SV firmware release date. For details, please
contact with marketing person.
5.21 SYSTEM GAIN
In accordance with Tab.39 and Tab.40
Measured at Point A-A' and BER = 10E-6 excluding BRU loss and without +2dB Tx overdrive function.
When system gain is defined at Point B-B' in accordance with ETSI EN302 217-1 V1.2.1 (2007-06), con-
verted value is calculated by using TRMD ADPT+ TX BPF+RX BPF+TRMD ADPT loss as shown Tab.41.
Please note there is no test point at Point B and B'.
Tab.39 - System Gain for STM-1 Interface at Ta=25°C

(TX output power – RSL threshold at BER of 10(-6) at Point A- A’)
R adi o Freq uen cy

Fixed Mo dul ation Mo du latio n TX Output Gua ra nteed
4G L6 G 7G 8G 11 G/+29 dBm 13G/+27 dBm
29 dBm 10 1.0 1 01 .0 1 01.0 10 1.0 10 1.5 9 7.5
System Gai n fo r 30 MH z CS -3dB
32 dBm 10 4.0 1 04 .0 1 04.0 10 4.0 - -
at Poi nt A' to Poi nt A Exclu din g 1 28 QAM
BR U n etw ork
R adi o Freq uen cy

Fixed Mo dul ation Mo du latio n TX Output Gua ra nteed
4G 5G U6 G 1 1G
30 dBm 1 05.5 10 5.5 105 .5 105
System Gai n fo r 40 MH z CS -3dB
33 dBm 1 08.5 10 8.5 108 .5 -
at Poi nt A' to Poi nt A Exclu din g 6 4QAM
BR U n etw ork
172 MN.00278.E - 005

Tab.40 - System Gain for Native IP Interface at Ta=25°C
(TX output power - RSL threshold at BER of 10(-6) at Point A-A')
R adi o Freq uen cy

Ada ptive Modu la tio n Hi gh est Modu latio n TX Output Gua ra nteed
4G L6 G 7G 8G 11 G 1 3G
29 dBm 11 9.0 1 19 .0 1 19.0 11 9.0 11 8.5 /+29 dBm 115 .5 /+2 7 dBm
QPSK
32 dBm 12 1.0 1 21 .0 1 21.0 12 1.0 - -
29 dBm 11 6.0 1 16 .0 1 16.0 11 6.0 11 5.5 /+29 dBm 112 .5 /+2 7 dBm
8QAM
32 dBm 11 9.0 1 19 .0 1 19.0 11 9.0 - -
29 dBm 11 3.0 1 13 .0 1 13.0 11 3.0 11 2.5 /+29 dBm 109 .5 /+2 7 dBm
1 6QAM
32 dBm 11 6.0 1 16 .0 1 16.0 11 6.0 - -
Sys te m Gai n for 30 MHz CS 3 2QAM 29 dBm 11 0.0 1 10 .0 1 10.0 11 0.0 10 9.5 /+29 dBm 106 .5 /+2 7 dBm
32 dBm 11 3.0 1 13 .0 1 13.0 11 3.0 - -
at Point A' to Point A -3dB
29 dBm 10 7.0 1 07 .0 1 07.0 10 7.0 10 6.5 /+29 dBm 103 .5 /+2 7 dBm
Excluding BRU network 6 4QAM
32 dBm 11 0.0 1 10 .0 1 10.0 11 0.0 - -
29 dBm 10 3.0 1 03 .0 1 03.0 10 3.0 10 2.5 /+29 dBm 9 9.5 /+27 dBm
1 28 QAM
32 dBm 10 6.0 1 06 .0 1 06.0 10 6.0 - -
28 dBm 9 8.0 98 .0 98.0 9 8.0 97 .5/+2 8 d Bm 9 4.5 /+26 dBm
2 56 QAM
31 dBm 10 1.0 1 01 .0 1 01.0 10 1.0 - -
27 dBm 9 1.0 91 .0 91.0 9 1.0 90 .5/+2 7 d Bm 8 7.5 /+25 dBm
5 12 QAM
30 dBm 9 4.0 94 .0 94.0 9 4.0 - -
R adi o Freq uen cy

Ada ptive Modu la tio n Hi gh est Modu latio n TX Output Gua ra nteed
4G 5G U6 G 1 1G
30 dBm 11 9.0 1 19 .0 1 19.0 11 8.5
QPSK
33 dBm 12 1.0 1 21 .0 1 21.0 -
8QAM 30 dBm 11 6.0 1 16 .0 1 16.0 11 5.5
33 dBm 11 9.0 1 19 .0 1 19.0 -
30 dBm 11 3.0 1 13 .0 1 13.0 11 2.5
1 6QAM
33 dBm 11 6.0 1 16 .0 1 16.0 -
Sys te m Gai n for 40 MHz CS 3 2QAM 30 dBm 11 0.0 1 10 .0 1 10.0 10 9.5
33 dBm 11 3.0 1 13 .0 1 13.0 -
at Point A' to Point A -3dB
30 dBm 10 6.0 1 06 .0 1 06.0 10 5.5
Excluding BRU network 6 4QAM
33 dBm 10 9.0 1 09 .0 1 09.0 -
29 dBm 10 1.0 1 01 .0 1 01.0 10 0.5
1 28 QAM
32 dBm 10 4.0 1 04 .0 1 04.0 -
2 56 QAM 28 dBm 9 6.0 96 .0 96.0 9 5.5
31 dBm 9 9.0 99 .0 99.0 -
27 dBm 8 9.0 89 .0 89.0 8 8.5
5 12 QAM
30 dBm 9 2.0 92 .0 92.0 -
Tab.41 - Calibration Value for System Gain at Ta=25°C
RF Calibration Value (T + R), dB Remarks
4G type2 2.47
4G type1 2.77
5G 2.84
L6G 3.37
U6G type1/2 3.34
7G 3.80
8G 3.85
11G type1/2/3 4.45
11G type4 5.33
13G 4.92
MN.00278.E - 005 173

5.22 IF-IF
5.22.1 Amplitude-Frequency response
• < 2dB / 140 MHz ±16MHz for 40 MHz CS
• < 2dB / 140 MHz ±11MHz for 30 MHz CS
including slope and parabolic characteristics.

Automatically adjusted at IF-port on TRMD card for the received level of -40 dBm at TRMD input without
measuring equipment.
5.22.2 Delay
• < 15ns (25 ns14) / 140 MHz ±10MHz for 40 MHz CS

• < 20ns (30 ns14) / 140 MHz ±13MHz for 40 MHz CS 15
• < 10ns (20ns14) / 140 MHz ±8MHz for 30 MHz CS
• < 20ns (30 ns14) / 140 MHz ±11MHz for 30 MHz CS 15
including slope and parabolic characteristics
Automatically adjusted at IF-port on TRMD card for the received level of -40 dBm at TRMD input without
measuring equipment.
5.23 RF INTERFERENCE (WHEN SET SDH/ ETHER TO SDH)
5.23.1 Co-channel - External
• 64QAM System for STM-1 (in accordance with ETSI EN302 217-2-2 V1.4.1 (2010-07) Table C.7,
System C1, 5B
- RSL degradation = 1dB at BER = 10(-6) and C/I = 31 dB (typical)

C/I = 33 dB (ETSI limit)
- RSL degradation = 3dB at BER = 10(-6) and C/I = 27 dB (typical)

• 128QAM System for STM-1 (in accordance with ETSI EN302 217-2-2 V1.4.1 (2010-07) Table B.7,
System B3, 5B
- RSL degradation < 1dB at BER = 10(-6) and C/I = 33 dB (typical)

- RSL degradation < 3dB at BER = 10(-6) and C/I = 29 dB (typical)

14 Delay value when CCDP operation is applied.

15 Limit for TL TX-RX overall plus antenna system
174 MN.00278.E - 005

5.23.2 First adjacent channel
• 64QAM System for STM-1 (in accordance with ETSI EN302 217-2-2 V1.4.1 (2010-07) Table C.7,
System C1, 5B
- RSL degradation < 1dB at BER = 10(-6) and C/I = -26 dB (typical)
C/I = -4 dB (ETSI limit)
• 128QAM System for STM-1 (in accordance with ETSI EN302 217-2-2 V1.4.1 (2010-07) Table B7,
System B3, 5B
Fig.89 shows the typical adjacent channel interference reduction factor (IRF) for 64QAM and 128QAM sys-
tem.
5.24 RF INTERFERENCE (WHEN SET SDH/ ETHER TO ETHER) REFER-

ENCE ONLY
RF interference sensitivity for adaptive modulation is in accordance with Tab.42, Tab.43 and Tab.44.
Tab.42 - Co-Channel Interference Sensitivity at BER of 10-6 for 30/40 MHz CS
1 dB Degradation 3 dB Degradation
QAM Order
Typical Guaranteed Typical Guaranteed
QPSK 17 21 13 17
8QAM 20 24 16 20
16QAM 23 27 19 23
32QAM 26 30 22 26
64QAM 31 33 27 29
128QAM 33 35 29 32
256QAM 37 40 32 36
512QAM 41 44 36 40
MN.00278.E - 005 175

Tab.43 - First Adjacent Interference Sensitivity at BER of 10-6 for 30 MHz CS
QAM Order
QPSK -33 -29 -35 -31
8QAM -30 -26 -32 -28
16QAM -27 -23 -29 -25
32QAM -24 -20 -26 -22
64QAM -19 -17 -21 -19
128QAM -17 -15 -19 -17
256QAM -13 -10 -16 -13
512QAM -9 -6 -12 -8
Tab.44 -First Adjacent Interference Sensitivity at BER of 10-6 for 40 MHz CS
QAM Order
QPSK -38 -34 -44 -40
8QAM -35 -31 -41 -37
16QAM -32 -28 -38 -34
32QAM -29 -25 -35 -31
64QAM -24 -22 -30 -28
128QAM -22 -20 -28 -26
256QAM -18 -15 -25 -22
512QAM -14 -11 -21 -17
5.25 COUNTER-MEASURES TO FADING
5.25.1 SD
T-SD: Transmit separate RF CHs using separate two antennas
R-SD: In-phase (IP) combiner in Baseband
5.25.2 SD DADE
• Compensation between main and SD receiver up to +/-150 ns
• Automatic SD DADE'ing within +/- 0.5 x T (pulse width)
• No manual adjustment using measuring equipment needed
176 MN.00278.E - 005

5.25.3 IF-IF characteristics
• Optimization of in-band transmission line in the absence of fading
• Automatic, no manual adjustment on measuring equipment needed
5.25.4 Delay equalization from adjacent CHs
• Optimization of delay characteristics from adjacent RF channels
• Built-in delay equalization on WebLT and no manual adjustment using measuring equipment needed
5.25.5 Adaptive Equalizer
• Adaptive time domain equalizer in base band

21-tap full digital type
- 10-tap transversal equalizer (TVE) with
- 10-tap decision feedback equalizer (DFE) inside DEM
5.25.6 Radio Protection system (RPS)
• Uni-Directional switching (USW) on fade (Error-less switching)
• Second Criteria switching (BER ALM before/after FEC)
• Bi-Directional switching (BSW) on equipment failure
• N+1 GP1-RPS per rack (N=Max. 15), N+0 with RPS=DISABLE
• N+1 GP1-RPS and M+1 GP2-RPS per rack (N+M=Max. 14)
• N+1 GP1-RPS and M+1 GP1-RPS per rack (N+M=Max. 14)

• Single or dual RF available
5.25.7 RPS for 1+1 Hot-Standby
TX side: Parallel operation in BB and RF switch in RF
RX side: Parallel operation in RF and BB switch in baseband
5.25.8 XPIC function
• Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC) between V and H-polarization of antenna system
for CCDP operation
• XPIC improvement factor for flat fade 16:

> 20 dB typical, >18 dB guaranteed at BER of 10-6
16 Only applied for trunk system according to ITU-T G.826
MN.00278.E - 005 177

5.25.9 XPIC DADE
• DADE'ing between main and interfering signal line up to 150 ns
• Automatic XPIC DADE'ing within +/-0.5 x T (pulse width)
• No manual adjustment using measuring equipment needed
Warning: QAM order both V/H-polarization should be same when setting and recommended QAM is
128QAM for 30 MHz CS and 64QAM for 40 MHz CS. QPSK is not allowed for XPIC DADE setting.
5.25.10 LDPC FEC for STM-1
• Coding length: 3,990-bit for 64QAM & 4,830-bit for 128QAM
• Information Bit: 3,320-bit for 64QAM & 4,560-bit for 128QAM
• Coding rate: 83.2% for 64QAM & 94.4% for 128QAM
5.25.11 LDPC FEC For Native IP
• Coding length: 4,814-bit for 30 MHz and 40 MHz CS
• Information length: 4,565-bit for 30 MHz and 40 MHz CS
• Coding rate: 94.8 %
5.25.12 ATPC
• ATPC range: 0 to 20 dB continuous
• Control time: 100 dB/s
• Control initiator: Pre-set RSL, -45 or -55 or -65 dBm
5.25.13 MTPC
• MTPC range: 0 to 20 dB, 1-dB step
• Control: Manual
178 MN.00278.E - 005

6 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION
6.1 EQUIPMENT CONSTRUCTION
TL radio equipment construction is as follows;
• Rack (ETSI standard rack)
• BRU (max. x48 TX/RX/SD BPFs, max. x8 BEFs and max. 8 waveguide ports)
• VENT unit (maximum x8, 1xVENT unit/2xTRMD cards)
• TRMD ADPT (maximum x8, 1xTRMD ADPT/2xTRMD cards)
• Basic shelf with PCB back-wired-board (BWB) and bonnet cover
- 1,640 (H) x 532 (W) x 290 (D) mm with common connection area
Maximum sixteen (16) complete radio systems are configured.
• Extension BB shelf with PCB back-wired-board (BWB)
- 400 (H) x 532 (W) x 290 (D) mm with common connection area
Maximum sixteen (16) BRSW and BB INTF cards are configured.
• Cards
- TRMD, BBINTF, SV, AUX INTF, GESW, STM4O, BB EXT ADPT and BRSW
• Coaxial cables with connectors both ends for BRU
• Inter-shelf multi-pin cable with connectors both ends for 1+1 BB redundant
6.2 RACK
There are two (2) types of rack available.
• 1,800 mm ETSI standard rack
• 2,200 mm ETSI standard rack

1,800 mm ETSI standard rack is used as standard and dimension is as follows:
• Height: 1,800 mm
• Width: 600 mm
• Depth: 345 mm with shelf bonnet cover
2,200 mm ETSI standard rack is used as option for applying 1+1 BB redundant and dimension is as follows:
• Height: 2,200 mm
• Width: 600 mm
• Depth: 345 mm with shelf bonnet cover
MN.00278.E - 005 179

6.3 BRU
RF branching network (BRU) is consists of RF TX/RX/SD BPF unit, RF BEF, circulator and coaxial connection
cables.
Connection between BRU BPF unit and TRMD card is made with BMA plug-in connectors on TR ADPT without
manual cable connection.
6.4 TRMD SHELF
On the Basic shelf, there are connectors and power supply terminals as follows:
• Waveguide antenna duplexer/adaptor (DUP/ADPT) for RF signals
• Multi-pin connectors for data signals

• Multi-pin connectors for alarm and control for HK and RAB
• Dual-feed terminal for DC power supply
6.5 EXT-BB SHELF
On the Extension Baseband (Ext-BB) shelf, there are connectors and power supply terminals as follows:
• Multi-pin connectors for data
• Multi-pin connectors for inter-shelf connection
• Dual-feed terminal for DC power supply.
6.6 BRU BLOCK
BRU is used for terminal and repeater station. BRU mechanical construction is as follows:
• RRU for mixed ACCP/ACAP/CCDP
- Maximum four (4) Duplexer (DUP), waveguide antenna port for TX/RX
- Maximum four (4) Adaptor (ADPT), waveguide antenna port for SD RX or TX/SD
- Maximum eight (8) TRMD adaptor (TR ADPT) for TRMD unit and BRU filter
- Maximum forty eight (48) plug-in RF filters for TX, RX and SD

- TX switch and RX hybrid for 1+1 Hot-standby
- Maximum six (6) Band Elimination Filter (BEF) for innermost RF channel
- One set of semi-rigid cable connection between DUP/ADPT and circulator
- One set of semi-rigid cable connection between circulators
180 MN.00278.E - 005

6.7 VENT BLOCK
VENT unit construction is as follows:
• VENT unit for combined ACCP/ACAP/CCDP
- Maximum eight (8) ventilators units (One VENT for two TRMDs)
6.8 TRMD BLOCK
The Transceiver and Modem card (TRMD) is used for terminal and repeater station. TRMD card and cable
construction is as follows:
• TRMD for combined ACCP/ACAP/CCDP and single/dual RF band

17
- Maximum sixteen (16) TRMD cards
- Optional one (1) XPIC cable for CCDP operation (x1 cable / x2 TRMD)
- One (1) VENT cable between TRMD card and VENT unit (x1 cable / TRMD)
6.9 BB INTF-X BLOCK
BB INT-X card of Basic shelf for all system applications is used for terminal and repeater station. BB INTF-
X card construction is as follows:
• BB INTF-X for combined ACCP/ACAP/CCDP
- Maximum sixteen (16) STM-1 interface cards (BBINTF(STM1E/O) with SFP
- Optional STM-1 electrical card (BBINTF(STM1E)) without SFP
- Optional baseband interface adapter card (GE ADPT) for GE SW
- Optional shared protection channel (BBINTF(SPC)) card for GE SW.
6.10 COMN BLOCK
COMN block unit of Basic shelf for N+1 point-to-point terminal operation is used for terminal and repeater
station. SV block card and module construction are as follows:
• COMN block card for N+1 point-to-point terminal
- Supervisory and controller card (SV) for GP1
- Maximum two (2) optional GE switch cards (GE SW1) for 1000BASE-T
17 There are two (2) types available, one is TRMD with XPIC and the other is TRMD without XPIC. For the
change of TRMD with XPIC from TRMD without XPIC, hardware upgrade by software key is necessary.
MN.00278.E - 005 181

- Optional GE switch cards (GE SW2) for 1000BASE-SX
- Optional GE switch cards (GE SW3) for 1000BASE-LX
- Maximum two (2) optional STM-4 optical cards (STM4O)
- Maximum two (2) optional auxiliary signal interface cards (AUX INTF)
- Maximum two (2) optional auxiliary signal converter cards (AUX CONV)
- Maximum two (2) optional baseband extension adaptor card (BB EXT ADPT)
- Maximum three (3) optional Analog modules on AUX INTF card

- Maximum three (3) optional G.703 64 kbit/s modules on AUX INTF card
- Maximum three (3) optional V.11 64 kbit/s modules on AUX INTF card
- Optional RAB module on SV card
COMN block card of Basic shelf for N+1 & M+1 point-to-point terminal operation is used for terminal and
repeater station.
• COMN block card for N+1 & M+1 point-to-point terminal
- Supervisory and controller card (SV) for GP1+GP2

- Optional GE switch cards (GE SW1) for 1000BASE-T per RPS group
- Optional GE switch cards (GE SW2) for 1000BASE-SX per RPS group
- Optional GE switch cards (GE SW3) for 1000BASE-LX per RPS group
- Maximum two (2) optional STM-4 optical cards (STM4O)
- Maximum two (2) optional auxiliary signal interface cards (AUX INTF)
- Maximum two (2) optional auxiliary signal converter cards (AUX CONV)
- Maximum two (2) optional baseband extension adaptor cards (BB EXT ADPT)
- Maximum three (3) optional Analog modules on AUX INTF card
- Maximum three (3) optional G.703 64 kbit/s modules on AUX INTF card
- Maximum three (3) optional V.11 64 kbit/s modules on AUX INTF card
COMN block card of Basic shelf for N+1 & M+1 dual/double terminal operation is used for terminal and
repeater station.
• COMN block card for N+1 & M+1 dual/double terminal
- Supervisory and controller card (SV) for GP1
- Optional GE switch card (GE SW1) for 1000BASE-T per direction
- Optional GE switch card (GE SW2) for 1000BASE-SX per direction
- Optional GE switch card (GE SW3) for 1000BASE-LX per direction
- Optional STM-4 optical card (STM4O) per direction
- Optional auxiliary signal interface card (AUX INTF) per direction
- Optional auxiliary signal converter card (AUX CONV) per direction

- Optional baseband extension adaptor card (BB EXT ADPT) per direction
- Maximum three (3) optional Analog modules on AUX INTF per direction
- Maximum three (3) optional G.703 64 kbit/s modules on AUX INTF per direction
- Maximum three (3) optional V-11 64 kbit/s modules on AUX INTF per direction
182 MN.00278.E - 005

6.11 OPTIONAL BB INTF-Y BLOCK
Optional BB INTF-Y card of Extension BB shelf is used for terminal and repeater station for 1+1 baseband
redundancy. BB INTF-Y card construction is as follows:
• BB INTF-Y for 1+1 BB redundant
- Maximum sixteen (16) baseband switching and hybrid cards (BRSW)
- Maximum sixteen (16) BBINTF(STM1E/O) with SFP
- Optional STM-1 electrical card (STM1E1) without SFP
6.12 FLEXIBLE SLOT ARRANGEMENT (FSA)
Slot arrangement (TRMD, BB INTF and BRU pair) is very flexible to install for all system applications. How-
ever slot 1, 9 and 16 is fixed for protection channel of GP1 & GP2 and other slots are flexible to installed
on WebLT. SIAE Microelettronica recommended slot allocation is shown in paragraph 6.21 Appendix-A -
SIAE Microelettronica Recommended Slot Allocation.
6.13 HOT SWAP
Hot swap for all cards available.
6.14 USER INTERFACE AREA (UIA) ON BASIC SHELF
User interface area (UIA) on Basic shelf has the interface connectors for signals and terminals/ arrestor for
DC power system. DC Power terminal, arrestor and connectors are located below:
1. DC power terminal
Located on BWB of shelf, dual-feed available (X-port and Y-port).
2. Arrestor for lightning protection
3. Multi-pin connectors for external equipment (HK & RAB)

HK & RAB: on BWB
RUC/OW: on AUX card
MN.00278.E - 005 183

6.15 USER INTERFACE AREA (UIA) ON EXT-BB SHELF
User interface area (UIA) on Ext-BB shelf has the interface connectors for signals and terminals/ arrestor
for DC power system.
1. DC power terminal
Located on BWB of shelf, dual-feed available (X-port and Y-port).
2. Arrestor for lightning protection
3. Multi-pin connectors between TRMD shelf and Ext-BB shelf

Data & ALM/CONT: on BWB
6.16 EXTERNAL CB
External circuit breaker is needed outside TL radio equipment provided by Customer. Maximum rating of
circuit breaker is DC65V/35A for dual-feed power supply of system-X and system-Y lines.
6.17 SYSTEM APPLICATION
Tab.45 shows the System Application and Rack Configuration.
6.18 CARD CONSTRUCTION
Tab.46 shows the unit construction.
6.19 RACK CONFIGURATION
Fig.100, Fig.101 and Fig.102 show the detailed rack/unit configurations for all system application.
184 MN.00278.E - 005

6.20 WEIGHT
Tab.47 shows the typical unit and equipment weight.
6.21 APPENDIX-A - SIAE MICROELETTRONICA RECOMMENDED

SLOT ALLOCATION
• In case of N+1 ACCP/ACAP GP1 TERMINAL
E xam ple : L6/11G , 15+ 1 A C C P

TR M D (W 1 0 )
TR M D (W 1 1 )
TR M D (W 1 2 )
TR M D (W 1 3 )
TR M D (W 1 4 )
TR M D (W 1 5 )
TR M D(W 1 )
TR M D(W 2 )
TR M D(W 3 )
TR M D(W 4 )
TR M D(W 5 )
TR M D (W 6 )
TR M D (W 7 )
TR M D (W 8 )
TR M D (W 9 )
TR M D(P )
(1) S lot1 is fixed to G P 1 -P C H

(2) S lot2 to S lot16 is allocated W 1
to W 15 and R F C H exp a nsion
is carried out from left side.
Basic shelf N ote : W 1 to W 15 is flexible to

B B IN TF(W 1
B B IN TF(W 1
B B IN TF(W 1
B B IN TF(W 1
B B IN TF(W 1 4
B B IN TF(W 1
allocate for slot2 to slot16 for L 6G

B B IN TF(W 1
B B IN TF(W 2
B B IN TF(W 3
B B IN TF(W 4
B B IN TF(W 5
B B IN TF(W 6
B B IN TF(W 7
B B IN TF(W 8
B B IN TF(W 9
B B IN TF(P )
and 11 G H z band and SIAE

recom m ends that w orking channel
allocation is in sequential order.
L 6 G S ys te m 1 1 G S ys te m
Fig.97
• In case of N+1 GP1 & M+1 GP2 ACCP/ACAP/CCDP TERMINAL
MN.00278.E - 005 185

E xam ple -1: U 6G , 2x(7 + 1 ) C C D P
M axim um R F C H < = 8 C H s for

G P 1 and G P 2 system
TR M D(W 1 )
TR M D(W 2 )
TR M D(W 3 )
TR M D(W 4 )
TR M D(W 5 )
TR M D(W 6 )
TR M D(W 7 )
TR M D(W 1 )
TR M D(W 2 )
TR M D(W 3 )
TR M D(W 4 )
TR M D(W 5 )
TR M D(W 6 )
TR M D(W 7 )
TR M D(P )
TR M D(P )
(3) S lot2 to S lot8 is W 1 to W 7 for
G P 1 system .
(4) S lot10 to S lot16 is W 1 to W 7
for G P 2 system
Basic shelf
B B IN TF(W 1
B B IN TF(W 2
B B IN TF(W 3
B B IN TF(W 4
B B IN TF(W 5
B B IN TF(W 6
B B IN TF(W 7
B B IN TF(W 1
B B IN TF(W 2
B B IN TF(W 3
B B IN TF(W 4
B B IN TF(W 5
B B IN TF(W 6
B B IN TF(W 7
N ote : W 1 to W 7 is flexible to
B B IN TF(P )
B B IN TF(P )
allocate for slot2 to slot8 and slot

10 to slot16 and SIAE
recom m ends that w orking channel
7+1 U 6G GP1 7+1 U 6G GP2 allocation is in sequential order.
Fig.98
E xam ple -2: D ouble T erm inal
M axim um R F C H > 8 C H s for G P 1

or G P 2 system
TR M D(W 1 )
TR M D(W 2 )
TR M D(W 3 )
TR M D(W 4 )
TR M D(W 5 )
TR M D (W 9 )
TR M D (W 8 )
TR M D (W 7 )
TR M D (W 6 )
TR M D (W 5 )
TR M D (W 4 )
TR M D (W 3 )
TR M D (W 2 )
TR M D (W 1 )
TR M D(P )
TR M D (P )

G P 1 system
G P 2 system and R F expansion
Basic shelf is carried out from right side.

B B IN TF(W 1
B B IN TF(W 2
B B IN TF(W 3
B B IN TF(W 4
B B IN TF(W 5
B B IN TF(W 9
B B IN TF(W 8
B B IN TF(W 7
B B IN TF(W 6
B B IN TF(W 5
B B IN TF(W 4
B B IN TF(W 3
B B IN TF(W 2
B B IN TF(W 1
B B IN TF(P )
B B IN TF(P )
N ote : W 1 to W 5 for L6G is flexible

to allocate for slot2 to slot6 and W 9
to W 1 for 11G H z is flexible for
L6G, 5+1 11G, 9+1 slot15 to slot7 and SIAE
recommends that working channel
allocation is in sequentail order.
Fig.99
186 MN.00278.E - 005

Tab.45 - System Application and Rack Configuration
Basic shelf used

ETSI EXT-BB
System application Baseband interface
racka Type-1c Type-2c. Type-3c. Type-4c. Type-5c. shelfb
ACCP
N+1/N+0 ACAP 1 1
CCDP
ACCP
N+1 or N+0 &
M+1 or M+0 ACAP 1 1
P-P STM-1 electrical and/or
CCDP
STM-1 optical and/or
Option
ACCP STM-4 optical and/or
N+1/N+0 & Gigabit Ethernet
M+1/M+0 ACAP 1 1
Dual/Double
CCDP
1+1 HSB
1 1
P-P
1+1 HSB
1 1
Dual/Double
a. Rack height is 1,800 mm or 2,200mm available on customer’s request

b. Ext-BB shelf for 1+1 baseband redundant is only available for 2,200mm ETSI rack.
c. Type-1/2/3/4/5 setting of basic shelf is set by WebLT
Tab.46 - Unit & Card Construction
Item Unit / Card Abbreviations/Block Remark
1 RF CH Filter unit BPF Max. 48 units

BRU
2 BEF filter unit BEF Max. 8 units
3 Ventilator unit VENT VENT Max. 8 units
4 Transceiver and Modem TRMD TRMD Max. 16 cards
5 STM-1 interface with SFP BBINTF (STM1E/O) Max. 16 cards
6 STM-1 electrical without SFP BBINTF(STM1E) BB INTF-X Optional

7 Baseband Interface Adaptor GE ADPT Optional for GESW
8 Shared Protection Channel BBINTF(SPC) Optional for GESW
9 Supervisory and controller SV GP1 or GP1+GP2
10 Auxiliary signal interface AUX INTF
Optional
11 Gigabit Ethernet Switch with SFP GE SW
SV 1000BASE-T/SX/LX
12 STM-4 optical with SFP STM4O Optional
13 Auxiliary signal converter AUX CONV Optional
14 Baseband extension adapter BB EXT ADPT Optional
Baseband switching and hybrid

15 BRSW Optional
card
BB INTF-Y
16 STM-1 interface with SFP BBINTF (STM1E/O) Optional
17 STM-1 electrical without SFP BBINTF(STM1E) Optional
MN.00278.E - 005 187

MN.00278.E - 005
One Example of L6G, 5+1 and 11G, 10+0
VEN T VEN T VEN T VEN T VEN T VEN T VEN T VEN T
T R AD PT TR M D (W 1 5 ) B B IN TF(W 1 5 )
Mixed ACCP/ACAP/CCDP Operation
15 14 15 14 15 14 TR M D (W 1 4 ) B B IN TF(W 1 4 )
B E F (x4 m a x.)
TERM
T R AD PT TR M D (W 1 3 ) B B IN TF(W 1 3 )
1 1 G S ys te m
Point-to-Point Terminal
13 12 13 12 13 12 TR M D (W 1 2 ) B B IN TF(W 1 2 )
Fig.100 - One Example of 15+1 GP1 Point-to-Point Terminal

T R AD PT
E TS I R a ck (1 ,8 0 0 m m )
TR M D (W 1 1 ) B B IN TF(W 1 1 )
A ntenna P ort (M ax . 8)
11 10 11 10 11 10 TR M D (W 1 0 ) B B IN TF(W 1 0 ) A U X IN TF
T R AD PT TR M D (W 9 ) B B IN TF(W 9 ) A U X IN TF
9 8 9 8 9 8 TR M D (W 8 ) B B IN TF(W 8 )
T R AD PT SV
TR M D (W 7 ) B B IN TF(W 7 )
7 6 7 6 7 6 TR M D (W 6 ) B B IN TF(W 6 ) GE SW
B E F (x4 m a x.)
L 6 G S ys te m
T R AD PT TR M D (W 5 ) B B IN TF(W 5 ) GE SW
5 4 5 4 5 4 TR M D (W 4 ) B B IN TF(W 4 )
Basic shelf
T R AD PT TR M D (W 3 ) B B IN TF(W 3 )
3 2 3 2 3 2 TR M D (W 2 ) B B IN TF(W 2 )
1 P 1 P 1 P TR M D (P ) B B IN TF(P )
SD
SD
RX
RX
TX
TX
T R AD PT TR M D (W 1 5 ) B B IN TF(W 1 5 ) BR SW B B IN TF(W 1 5 )
TE R M
15 14 15 14 15 14 TR M D (W 1 4 ) B B IN TF(W 1 4 ) BR SW B B IN TF(W 1 4 )
B E F (x4 m a x.)
TERM
T R AD PT TR M D (W 1 3 ) B B IN TF(W 1 3 ) BR SW B B IN TF(W 1 3 )
1 1 G S ys te m
13 12 13 12 13 12 TR M D (W 1 2 ) B B IN TF(W 1 2 ) BR SW B B IN TF(W 1 2 )
T R AD PT BR SW
E TS I R a ck (2 ,2 0 0 m m )
TR M D (W 1 1 ) B B IN TF(W 1 1 ) B B IN TF(W 1 1 )
11 10 11 10 11 10 TR M D (W 1 0 ) B B IN TF(W 1 0 ) A U X IN TF BR SW B B IN TF(W 1 0 )
T R AD PT TR M D (W 9 ) B B IN TF(W 9 ) A U X IN TF BR SW B B IN TF(W 9 )
9 8 9 8 9 8 TR M D (W 8 ) B B IN TF(W 8 ) BR SW B B IN TF(W 8 )
T R AD PT SV BR SW
TR M D (W 7 ) B B IN TF(W 7 ) B B IN TF(W 7 )
7 6 7 6 7 6 TR M D (W 6 ) B B IN TF(W 6 ) GE SW BR SW B B IN TF(W 6 )
B E F (x4 m a x.)
T R AD PT TR M D (W 5 ) B B IN TF(W 5 ) GE SW BR SW B B IN TF(W 5 )
L 6 G S ys te m
5 4 5 4 5 4 TR M D (W 4 ) B B IN TF(W 4 ) BB EXT AD PT BR SW B B IN TF(W 4 )
Ext-BB shelf
Basic shelf
T R AD PT TR M D (W 3 ) B B IN TF(W 3 ) BB EXT AD PT BR SW B B IN TF(W 3 )
T R AD PT TR M D (W 1 ) B B IN TF(W 1 ) BR SW B B IN TF(W 1 )
1 P 1 P 1 P TR M D (P ) B B IN TF(P ) BR SW B B IN TF(P )
SD
SD
RX
RX
TX
TX
188
189
Mixed ACCP/ACAP/CCDP P-to-P Operation
T R AD PT
Fig.101 - One Example of N+1 GP1 & M+1 GP2 Point-to-Point Terminal
TR M D (P ) B B IN TF(P )
One Example of L6G, 5+1 & 11G, 9+1
1 P 1 P 1 P TR M D (W 1 ) B B IN TF(W 1 )
B E F (x4 m a x.)
TERM
Point-to-Point Terminal
3 2 3 2 3 2 TR M D (W 3 ) B B IN TF(W 3 )
11G, 9+1
T R AD PT
E TS I R a ck (1 ,8 0 0 m m )
5 4 5 4 5 4 TR M D (W 5 ) B B IN TF(W 5 ) A U X IN TF
7 6 7 6 7 6 TR M D (W 7 ) B B IN TF(W 7 )
T R AD PT SV
B E F (x4 m a x.)
5 4 5 4 5 4 TR M D (W 4 ) B B IN TF(W 4 )
L6G, 5+1
Basic shelf
3 2 3 2 3 2 TR M D (W 2 ) B B IN TF(W 2 )
SD
SD
RX
RX
TX
TX
T R AD PT TR M D (P ) B B IN TF(P ) BR SW B B IN TF(P )
TE R M
1 P 1 P 1 P TR M D (W 1 ) B B IN TF(W 1 ) BR SW B B IN TF(W 1 )
B E F (x4 m a x.)
TERM
11G, 9+1
T R AD PT BR SW
E TS I R a ck (2 ,2 0 0 m m )
5 4 5 4 5 4 TR M D (W 5 ) B B IN TF(W 5 ) A U X IN TF BR SW B B IN TF(W 5 )
T R AD PT SV BR SW
B E F (x4 m a x.)
L6G, 5+1
Ext-BB shelf
Basic shelf
MN.00278.E - 005
SD
SD
RX
RX
TX
TX
MN.00278.E - 005
One Example of L6G, 5+1 for Eastern Route &
T R AD PT TR M D (P ) B B IN TF(P )
1 P 1 P 1 P TR M D (W 1 ) B B IN TF(W 1 )
Mixed ACCP/ACAP/CCDP Operation
B E F (x4 m a x.)
TERM
11G, 9+1 for Western Route
Fig.102 - One Example of N+1 GP1 & M+1 GP2 Double Terminal
Double Terminal Operation
W e s te rn R o u te
3 2 3 2 3 2 TR M D (W 3 ) B B IN TF(W 3 )
E TS I R a ck (1 ,8 0 0 m m )
5 4 5 4 5 4 TR M D (W 5 ) B B IN TF(W 5 ) A U X IN TF
7 6 7 6 7 6 TR M D (W 7 ) B B IN TF(W 7 )
T R AD PT SV
B E F (x4 m a x.)
E a s te rn R o u te
5 4 5 4 5 4 TR M D (W 4 ) B B IN TF(W 4 )
Basic shelf
3 2 3 2 3 2 TR M D (W 2 ) B B IN TF(W 2 )
SD
SD
RX
RX
TX
TX
T R AD PT TR M D (P ) B B IN TF(P ) BR SW B B IN TF(P )
TE R M
1 P 1 P 1 P TR M D (W 1 ) B B IN TF(W 1 ) BR SW B B IN TF(W 1 )
B E F (x4 m a x.)
TERM
W e s te rn R o u te
E TS I R a ck (2 ,2 0 0 m m )
5 4 5 4 5 4 TR M D (W 5 ) B B IN TF(W 5 ) A U X IN TF BR SW B B IN TF(W 5 )
T R AD PT SV BR SW
B E F (x4 m a x.)
E a s te rn R o u te
Ext-BB shelf
Basic shelf
SD
SD
RX
RX
TX
TX
190
Tab.47 - Typical Weight of Each Unit and TL Equipment
1+1 w/o SDa 3+1 with SD

Unit/Rack Weight (kg)
Q'ty Weight (kg) Q'ty Weight (kg)
TRMD v1 2.80 - - - -
TRMD v2 2.70 2 5.4 4 10.8
VENT 0.44 1 0.44 2 0.88
BBINTF (STM1E/
0.28 2 0.56 4 1.12
O)
BBINTF(STM1E) 0.24 - - - -
GE ADPT 0.2 - - - -
BBINTF(SPC) 0.2 - - - -
SV 0.74 1 0.74 1 0.74
AUX INTF 0.2 - - - -
AUX CONV 0.22 - - - -
GE SW v1 0.48 - - - -
GESW v2 0.70 - - - -
BB EXT ADPT 0.2 - - - -
Basic shelf with

41.9 1 41.9 1 41.9
bonnet cover
TRMD ADPT 1.9 1 1.9 2 3.8
Ext-BB shelf 15 - - - -
BRSW 0.1 - - - -
BBINTF
0.2 - - - -
(STM1EO)
BBINTF(STM1E) 0.2 - - - -
ESTI
34.4 1 34.4 1 34.4
Rack(2.2m)
ESTI
25.0 - - - -
Rack(1.8m)
BRU DUP 0.45 1 0.45 1 0.45
ADPT 0.45 - - 1 0.45
BPF 0.18 4 0.72 12 2.16
Cable 0.04 6 0.24 15 0.6
Weight
86.75 97.3
(typical)
a. For above system example, conditions are as follows:

- with/without SD
- STM-1 electrical interface
- ETSI rack in 2,200mm height
MN.00278.E - 005 191

7 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATION
7.1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
7.1.1 Not In-Use Condition
Tab.48 shows the environmental conditions when TL radio equipment is not operational. (Not in-use con-
dition).
Tab.48 - Environmental Condition when not in-use
Item Description
Specification In accordance with ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04)
Class Class 1.3: Not-weather protected storage locations
Low air temperature: -33°C

High air temperature: 40°C
Low relative humidity: 15%
Storage
Climatic condition High relative humidity: 100%
Low absolute humidity: 0.25 g/m3
High absolute humidity: 29 g/m3
Climatogram: ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04), Figure 3
Altitude Up to 4,500 m
Class Class 2.3: Public transportation
Low temperature air: -40°C

High temperature air, in unventilated enclosures: +70°C
High temperature air, in ventilated enclosure or outdoor air: 40°C
Transportation
Change of temperature, air/air: -40/30°C
Climatic condition
Change of temperature, air/water: 40/5°C
Relative humidity w/o rapid temperature changes: 95%/45°C
Relative humidity w/ rapid temperature changes: 95%/-40/30°C
Absolute humidity w/ rapid temperature changes: 60%/70/15°C
Altitude Up to 15,000 m
192 MN.00278.E - 005

Fig.103 - Climatogram for class 1.3: Not weather protected storage locations
7.1.2 In-Use Condition
Tab.49 shows the environmental conditions when TL radio equipment is operational. (In-use condition).
Tab.49 - Environmental Condition when in-use
Item Description
Class Class 3.2: Partly temperature-controlled locations
Low air temperature: -5°C

High air temperature: 45°C
Stationary use Low relative humidity: 5%
Climatic condition High relative humidity: 95%
Low absolute humidity: 1 g/m3
High absolute humidity: 25 g/m3
Climatogram: ETSI EN 300 019-1-3 V2.2.2 (2004-07), Figure 2
Amplitude Up to 4,500 m
MN.00278.E - 005 193

Fig.104 - Climatogram for class 3.2 - Partly temperature-controlled locations
7.2 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC)
EMC requirements are in accordance with ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.8.1 (2008-04) and ETSI EN 301 489-4
V1.4.1 (2009-05).
7.2.1 EMC Emission
Tab.50 shows the EMC emission test method and limits.
194 MN.00278.E - 005

Tab.50 - EMC Emission Test Method and Limits
Phenomenon Application Requirement
Test method: In accordance with CENELEC EN 55016-2-3

(2006) and for use in telecommunication centres only:
1. Class A limits given in EN 55022 (2006), measured on a

stand alone at a measurement distance of 10 m
- 40dB µ V/m for 30 MHz to 230 MHz
- 47 dB µ V/m for 230 MHz to 1,000 MHz
Enclosure of 2. Limit above 1 GHz, measured on a stand alone basis at a

Radiated emission
ancillary equipment measurement distance of 3 m
Average limit
- 56 dB µ V/m for 1,000 MHz to 3,000 MHz

Peak limit
Test method is in accordance with CENELEC EN 55022 (2006)

and for use in telecommunication centres only:
• Limits (Quasi-peak):
- 79 dB µ V for 0.15 MHz to 0.5 MHz
DC power input/
output ports - 73 dB µ V for 0.5 MHz to 30 MHz
• Limits (Average):
- 66 dB µ V for 0.15 MHz to 0.5 MHz
- 60 dB µ V for > 0.5 MHz to 30 MHz
Test method is in accordance with CENELEC EN 55022 (2006)

and for use in telecommunication centres only:
Class A limit given in EN 55022 (2006)
• Voltage Limits (Quasi-peak)

Conducted emission
- 97 to 87 dB µ V for 0.15 MHz to 0.5 MHz
- 87 dB µ V for 0.5 MHz to 30 MHz
• Voltage Limits (Average):

Telecommunication - 84 to 74 dB µ V for 0.15 MHz to 0.5 MHz
port
- 74 dB µ V for 0.5 MHz to 30 MHz
• Current Limits (Quasi-peak)
- 53 to 43 dB µ A for 0.15 MHz to 0.5 MHz
- 43 dB µ A for 0.5 MHz to 30 MHz
• Current Limits (Average):
- 40 to 30 dB µ A for 0.15 MHz to 0.5 MHz
- 30 dB µ A for 0.5 MHz to 30 MHz
MN.00278.E - 005 195

7.2.2 Immunity
Tab.51 shows the Immunity test methods and conditions.
Tab.51 - Immunity Test Method and Conditions
Phenomenon Application Requirement
a) Test method is in accordance with EN 61000-4-3 (2006)
b) Test level is 3 V/m (measured unmodulated). Test signal

RF electromagnetic shall be AM'ed to a depth of 80% by a sinusoidal audio signal
field of 1,000 MHz.
80 to 1,000 MHz Enclosure
and c) Test shall be performed over the frequency range of 80 MHz
1,400 to 2,700 MHz to 1,000 MHz and 1,400 MHz to 2,700 MHz
Result: EUT operates without any recorded errors in main sig-
nal during the test.
a) Test method is in accordance with EN 61000-4-2 (2001).
b) Test severity level for contact discharge shall be 4 kV and

for air discharge 8 kV. All other details, including intermediate
Electrostatic test levels, are contained within EN 61000-4-2 (2001).
Enclosure
discharge c) Electrostatic discharges shall be applied to all exposed sur-
faces of the EUT.

nal during the test
b) Test level for signal ports, telecommunication ports and con-

Signal, telecommu- trol ports shall be 0.5 kV open circuit voltage at a repetition
Fast transients nication and control rate of 5 kV as given in EN61000-4-4 (2004).
common mode ports, DC power c) Test level for DC power inputs shall be 0.5 kV open circuit
ports voltage as given in EN61000-4-4 (2004).

b) Test level shall be severity level 2 as given in EN61000 -4-

6 (2005) corresponding to 3 Vrms unmodulated. Test signal
shall be amplitude modulated to a depth of 80% by a sinusoidal
Signal, telecommu- audio signal of 1,000 Hz.
RF common mode nication and control
c) Test shall be performed over 150 kHz to 80 MHz.
0.15 to 80 MHz ports, DC power
ports d) The stepped frequency increments shall be 1% of frequency
increment of the momentary frequency in the frequency range
150 kHz to 80 MHz.

b) Test level for telecommunication ports, intended to be di-

rectly connected to the communication network via outdoor ca-
bles shall be 0.5 kV line to ground.
Surges, line to line Telecommunication
c) Test level for telecommunication ports, intended to be con-
and line to ground ports
nected to indoor cables (> 10 m) shall be o.5 kV line to ground.
d) Test generator shall provide the 1.2us/50us pulse
Result: EUT operates without any recorded disturbance during

the test.
196 MN.00278.E - 005

7.3 ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSION LIMIT
In accordance with ETSI ETS300 753 for telecommunication room (attended) and environmental class 3.2
(see Tab.52).
Tab.52 - Limits for stationary equipment used in weather protected locations
7.4 CLIMATIC TEST SPECIFICATION
In accordance with ETSI ETS300 019-2-3 V2.2.2 (2003-04), Table 4, Class T3.2 (see Tab.53): Partly Tem-
perature-control locations and environmental specification is specified for transmitter local frequency and
BER performance.18
Tab.53 - Test specification T3.2: Partly temperature-controlled locations - climatic tests
18 This specification applies to enclosed locations having neither temperature nor humidity control, but
where heating may be used to avoid low temperatures. The building construction avoids extremely high
temperatures
MN.00278.E - 005 197

7.5 MECHANICAL TEST SPECIFICATION
In accordance with ETSI ETS300 019-2-3 V2.2.2 (2003-04), Table 5, Class T3.2 (see Tab.54): Partly Tem-
perature-control locations and environmental specification is specified for transmitter local frequency and
BER performance.
Tab.54 - Test specification T3.2: Partly temperature-controlled locations - mechanical tests
7.6 SAFETY
TL radio equipment is well designed to meet the Safety Requirement in accordance with Cenelec EN 60950-
1:2005 (Second Edition) as follows:
Tab.55
Item Principles of Safety
To design safe equipment, priority design measures are to:

a. specify design criteria to eliminate, reduce or guard against hazards
General principles
of Safety b. specify the use of protective means independent of the equipment
c. specify the provision of markings and instructions regarding the resid-
ual risks.
Well designed to reduce the risk of injury or damage due to:

a. electric shock
b. energy related hazards
c. fire
Hazards
d. heat related hazards
e. mechanical hazards
f. radiation
g. chemical hazards
Materials and components used are:

a. so selected and arranged in a reliable manner for the anticipated life of
the equipment without creating a hazard and would not contribute sig-
Materials and components
nificantly to the development of a serious fire hazard.
b. components are within ratings under normal conditions and do not cre-
ate a hazard under fault conditions
198 MN.00278.E - 005

7.7 WASTE DIRECTIVE COMPLIANCE
Regarding the directive of waste from electrical equipment, TL radio equipment is compliant with European
Union's RoHS-6 and WEEE directives.
Tab.56
Directive Description
a Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances in elec-

RoHS-6
trical and electronic equipment (EC 95)
WEEE Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EC 95)
a. 2011/65/EU (RoHS2) directive is complied.
7.8 MTBF
MFBF of TL equipment is shown in Tab.57, Tab.58 and Tab.59.
Tab.57 - MTBF of Slide-in-Unit
MTBF MTBF
FITS
Card/Unit k-hour year
(calculated)
(calculated) (calculated)
TRMD v1 11,672 85.7 9.8
TRMD v2 12,340 81.0 9.3
VENT 1,420 704.2 80
BBINTF(STM1E/O) 1,871 534.5 61
SFP Electrical 170 5,882 671
SFP Optical (S.1-1) 550 1,818 207
BBINTF (STM1E) 1,588 623 72
BBINTF (SPC) 1,343 745 85
GE ADPT 25 39,920 4,557
SV 3,888 257 29
AUX INTF 1287 777 89
GESW v1 2,002 499 57
GESW v2 1,810 552 63
SFP 1000BASE-T 178 5,619 641
SFP 1000BASE-SX 100 10,000 1,141
SFP 1000BASE-LX 125 8,000 913
MN.00278.E - 005 199

Tab.58- MTBF of shelf
FITS MTBF MTBF

Unit
(calculated) k-hour (calculated) year (calculated)
BACK SHELF 600 1,667 190
Tab.59 - MTBF of BRU
MTBF 1+1 with SD 3+1 with SD 7+1 with SD

BRU component
(Fit)
Q'ty MTBF (Fit) Q'ty MTBF (Fit) Q'ty MTBF (Fit)
DUP 10 1 10 1 10 2 20
ADPT 10 1 10 1 10 2 20
BPF 15 6 90 12 180 24 360
Cable 5 12 60 21 105 42 210
MTBF (year) 170 (672) 305 (370) 610 (185)
Warning: Actual MTBF value is estimated 3 to 5 times better than calculated one from the field data of SIAE
Microelettronica TL series digital microwave radio.
7.9 RECYCLING RATE
Recycling Rate of TL equipment is shown below.
Radio Equipment (15+1 configuration)
• Total Equipment Weight: 151.2 kg
Recyclable Material Weight (kg) Percentage
Aluminum 21.4 14.1%
Stainless Steel 54.7 36.2%
Brass 0.7 0.4%
Steel 45.9 30.3%
Copper 0.9 0.6%
Total 123.5
Recycling Rate of equipment (15+1 configuration)
123.5/151.2 kg 81.7%
200 MN.00278.E - 005

Packing Materials for 2,200 mm Height Type
• Total Packing Weight: 26.0 kg
Corrugered Card Board 22.4 86.2%
Bubble Wrap 0.4 1.5%
Total 22.8
Recycling Rate of Packing Materials for 2,200 mm height type
22.8/26.0 87.7%
Packing Materials for 1,800 mm Height Type
• Total Packing Weight: 23.0 kg
Corrugered Card Board 19.4 84.3%
Bubble Wrap 0.4 1.7%
Total 22.8
Recycling Rate of Packing Materials for 1,800 mm height type
19.8/23.0 86.1%
MN.00278.E - 005 201

8 POWER REQUIREMENT
8.1 GENERAL
Power supply interface requirement is in accordance with ETSI EN300 132-2 V2.2.1 (2007-05) as shown
in Tab.60 below and Tab.61 shows the power supply feed.
Tab.60 - Power Supply Interface Requirement
Item Specification
-48 Vdc with positive grounded

Nominal voltage at inter-
face "A” Note*: The voltage of interface "A" will be complemented by a 24 cell
lead-acid battery.
Normal service voltage

-40.5 Vdc to -57 Vdc
range at interface "A”
(a) Abnormal service voltage under steady-state condition
TL will not suffer any damage when subjected to the following voltage
ranges; 0.0 to -40.5 Vdc and -57 to -60 Vdc
(b) Recovery from steady state abnormal voltage
Following the restoration to the normal voltage range, TL will auto-

matically restore service and resume operation according to its spec-
ification. And the abnormal voltage shall not lead to the disconnection
Abnormal service voltage of the power supply by causing circuit breakers and so on.
range at interface "A”
(c) Voltage Transients caused by power distribution system
TL will not be damaged under the test model in accordance with

EN61000-4-5.
(d) Recovery from voltage transients
TL will continue to function within its operational specification without

requiring manual intervention. To prevent system malfunctioning, TL
has the function of dual-feeding power supply system.
For the single rate of the voltage at interface "A" with an amplitude of
Voltage change due to the 6V±10% for both the fall and rise time of the voltage and a change
regulation of the power rate within the range 3 V/ms to 7 V/ms,
supply TL shall operate according to the specification and no loss of data or
false alarm shall occur.
The supply at interface "A" shall be protected by circuit breaker or oth-

er such devices.
Supply protection at inter-
face "A” Dual power feed available (System-X and System-Y)
Hot swap available for all units except SV
Circuit breaker for SV unit
Maximum current drain at any voltage in the normal and abnormal

Maximum current drain fol- voltage range at interface "A" lasting for longer than 1 second shall
lowing abnormal service not exceed 1.5 times the maximum continuous current drain at nor-
mal working voltage of -48 Vdc.
202 MN.00278.E - 005

Inrush current In accordance with Figure 3, ETSI EN300 132-2 V2.2.1 (2007-05)
Immunity to narrowband In accordance with Table 1 and Figure 5, ETSI EN300 132-2 V2.2.1
noise at interface "A” (2007-05)
Emissions of narrowband In accordance with Table 2 and Figure 7, ETSI EN300 132-2 V2.2.1
noise at interface "A” (2007-05)
Fig.105 - Inrush current specification
MN.00278.E - 005 203

Fig.106 - Immunity to narrow band specification
Fig.107 - Emission of narrowband noise specification
204 MN.00278.E - 005

8.2 POWER FEED-1
Power supply feed from radio station power supply system through circuit breaker is shown in Fig.108.
Fig.108 - DC power supply connection to the UIA block

(SIAE recommended PS dual-feed system)
MN.00278.E - 005 205

P S S ys tem C irc uit B reaker P S Term inal
S y s -X C B -X TM -1
P lan-1
S y s -Y C B -Y TM -2
P lan-2 S y s -X C B -X TM -1
C B -Y TM -2
P lan-3 S y s -X C B -X TM -1
TM -2
Fig.109 - Available DC Power Feed System
206 MN.00278.E - 005

8.3 POWER FEED-2
Power supply feed to each card from power supply terminal (TM1/2) is shown in Fig.110 and Fig.111 me-
chanically and is shown in Fig.112 electrically.
N o ise F ilte r in T R M D Part
N o ise F ilte r in P S Box
Fig.110 - DC power supply feed to each card (mechanically)
MN.00278.E - 005 207

N o ise F ilte r
& C o n n e cto r
in T R M D part
D io d e N o ise Filter
N o ise F ilte r
& D io d e
in P S B o x part
(S h e lf back)
A rre sto r
P S terminal
A rre stor & PS

te rm in a l
in P S B o x part
(S h e lf front)
Fig.111 - DC power supply feed to each card (photos)
208 MN.00278.E - 005

PS BOX Part SV/BB Part TRMD Part
PS #1
TM -1 To TR M D
-48 V
C N 128
N ois e N ois e
G ND D iode
F ilter 1 F ilter 1
C N 130 S lot1& 2
to S V
A rres tor
C N127
N ois e N ois e
F ilter 2 F ilter 2
C N 129 S lot3& 4
to B B IN TF
s lot1 to s lot16
C N 126
N ois e
F ilter 3
A rres tor
S lot5& 6
C N 125
N ois e
F ilter 4
S lot7& 8
PS #2
TM -2
-48 V
C N 124
N ois e N ois e
G ND D iode
F ilter 3 F ilter 5
S lot9& 10
A rres tor
C N 123
N ois e N ois e
Frame
F ilter 4 F ilter 6
GND
S lot11& 12
C N 122
N ois e
F ilter 7
S lot13& 14
C N 121
N ois e
F ilter 8
S lot15& 16
Fig.112 - DC power supply feed to each card (electrical)
MN.00278.E - 005 209

Tab.61 - Safety information of DC power supply feed
No. Item Description Remarks
Max. Equipment power

1 1,700 W Fully equipped rack with
consumption
16xTRMD v1 in high power
Rated voltage and current of operation
2 37 A
equipment
Nominal cross-sectional area

3 Sq (mm2): 21.15 to 42.41
(mm2) of power supply cable
American Wire Gauge (AWG)

4 AWG1 to AWG4 SIAE recommends AWG4
(cross-sectional area in mm2)
Nominal diameter of fixing

8 mm  stud with washer for PS
5 stud on DC power feed
cable fixture
terminal (minimum.)
8.4 UNIT CONSUMPTION
Power consumption of each unit is shown in Tab.62.
8.5 EQUIPMENT CONSUMPTION
Power consumption of each type of equipment for 4-8 GHz band is shown in .
Tab.62 - Typical card power consumption at Ta=25°C
No. Card Pc (W) Remarks
1 TRMD v1 90 Standard power output for 4-13 GHz with SD
2 TRMD v1 95 High power output for 4-8 GHz with SD
3 TRMD v2 83 Standard power output for 4-13 GHz with SD
4 TRMD v2 88 High power output for 4-8 GHz with SD
5 VENT 7.7 1xVENT/2xTRMD
6 BBINTF (STM1E/O) 6.1 STM-1 electrical/optical with SFP
7 SPF electrical 0.6
8 SPF optical 0.6
9 BBINTF (STM1E) 6.2 Special designed STM-1 electrical without SFP
10 BBINTF (SPC) 6.0 Shared protection channel for Gigabit Ethernet
11 SV 8.5
12 AUX INTF 4.5
13 GESW v1 14.2 Without 2xSFP
210 MN.00278.E - 005

14 GESW v2 23.6 Without 4xSFP
15 SFP electrical 1.1 1000Base-T
16 SFP optical 0.6 1000Base-SX
17 SFP optical 0.9 1000Base-LX
Warning: Card power consumption includes the efficiency of power supply module.
Warning: Card power consumption value is typical value at Ta=25°C and V=-48V.
Warning: The power consumption value, Pc given for the TRMD is quoted for maximum RF power output
(ATPC ON).
Tab.63 - Equipment Power Consumption using TRMD v2

(Standard Power Output with SD, 4-13 GHz, STM-1 electrical)
1+1 TERM 1+1 DT 3+1 TERM 3+1 DT

Card/Module Per unit
Q'ty Total Q'ty Total Q'ty Total Q'ty Total
TRMD v1 90 - - - - - - - -
TRMD v2 83 2 166 4 332 4 332 8 664
VENT 7.7 1 7.7 2 15.4 2 15.4 4 30.8
BBINTF(STM1E) 6.2 2 12.4 4 24.8 4 24.8 8 49.6
BBINTF(STM1E/O) 6.1 - - - - - - - -
BBINTF(SPC) - - - - - - - -
SFP (STM1E) 0.6 - - - - - - - -
SFP (STM1O) 0.6 - - - - - - - -
SV 8.5 1 8.5 1 8.5 1 8.5 1 8.5
AUX INTF 4.5 - - - - - - - -
GE SW v1 14.2 - - - - - - - -
GESW v2 23.6 - - - - - - - -
SFP(1000BASE-T) 1.1 - - - - - - - -
SFP(1000BASE-SX) 0.6 - - - - - - - -
SFP(1000BASE-LX) 0.9 - - - - - - - -
Total (typical) 194.6 380.7 380.7 752.9
Warning: Equipment power consumption value is typical value. Guaranteed value is +10% up including
environmental conditions and primary power voltage variance within -40.5 to -57 V.
(ATPC ON).
MN.00278.E - 005 211

Tab.64 - Typical Equipment Power Consumption using TRMD v2
(High Power Output with SD, 4-8 GHz, STM-1 electrical)
1+1 TERM 1+1 DT 3+1 TERM 3+1 DT

Card/Module Per unit
Q'ty Total Q'ty Total Q'ty Total Q'ty Total
TRMD v1 95 - - - - - - - -
TRMD v2 88 2 176 4 352 4 352 8 704
VENT 7.7 1 7.7 2 15.4 2 15.4 4 30.8
BBINTF(STM1E) 6.2 2 12.4 4 24.8 4 24.8 8 49.6
BBINTF(STM1E/O) 6.1 - - - - - - - -
BBINTF(SPC) - - - - - - - -
SFP (STM1E) 0.6 - - - - - - - -
SFP (STM1O) 0.6 - - - - - - - -
SV 8.5 1 8.5 1 8.5 1 8.5 1 8.5
AUX INTF 4.5 - - - - - - - -
GE SW v1 14.2 - - - - - - - -
GESW v2 23.6 - - - - - - - -
SFP(1000BASE-T) 1.1 - - - - - - - -
SFP(1000BASE-SX) 0.6 - - - - - - - -
SFP(1000BASE-LX) 0.9 - - - - - - - -
Total (typical) 204.6 400.7 400.7 792.9
Warning: Equipment power consumption value is typical value. Guaranteed value is +10% up including
environmental conditions and primary power voltage variance within -40.5 to -57 V.
(ATPC ON).
212 MN.00278.E - 005

9 SIGNAL INTERFACE SPECIFICATION
9.1 GENERAL
Signal interface cards are listed below:
• Baseband signal interface card
- BBINTF(STM1E/O) with SFP: STM-1 electrical
- BBINTF(STM1E/O) with SFP: STM-1 optical
- BBINTF(STM1E) without SFP: STM-1 electrical
- STM4O with SFP: STM-4 optical (S-4.1)
- GE SW with max. 4 SFP: GE Switch for 1000BASE-T, link aggregation

- GE SW with max. 4 SFP: GE Switch for 1000BASE-SX, link aggregate
- GE SW with max. 4 SFP: GE Switch for 1000BASE-LX, link aggregation
- GE ADPT: Baseband interface adapter for GE SW card
- BBINTF(SPC): Shared protection channel for GE SW card
• Fast Ethernet signal interface card
- GESW v1 1x10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet (FE)

• Auxiliary signal interface card
- BBINTF(STM1E/O): 2x2.048 Mbit/s Wayside traffic (WS)
- BBINTF(STM1E): 2x2.048 Mbit/s Wayside traffic (WS)
- SV: Orderwire channel (OW)

Data Communication Channel (DCC)
Radio Service Channel (RSC)
- AUX INTF: 3x64 kbit/s Radio User Channel (RUC)

4W-Orderwire (4W-OW)
- AUX CONV: 2x10/100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet (FE)
MN.00278.E - 005 213

9.2 STM-1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE
9.2.1 STM-1 Electrical Interface with SFP
LED Module Cage
STM -1 OUT
STM -1 IN
CN
WSS IN Electrical Module
WSS OUT
WSR IN
WSR OUT
CN
Coax Connector (WS)
Fig.113 - BBINTF card with SPF-1 for STM-1 electrical
Fig.114 - Mechanical Dimension of SFP Module
214 MN.00278.E - 005

The Small Form Pluggable (SFP) module used is shown in Tab.65.
Tab.65 - SFP Module for STM-1 electrical
No STM-1 interface SFP module code used
TA11006-E790 or equivalent
1 STM-1 electrical
(TERIDIAN, STM1E-SFP26)
9.2.2 STM-1 Electrical Interface without SFP
LED
STM1 OUT
STM1 IN
CN
WSS IN
WSS OUT
WSR IN
WSR OUT
CN
Coax Connector (WS)
Fig.115 - BBINTF Card without SPF for STM-1 electrical
Warning: PCB of STM1E card without SFP module is commonly used for STM1E and STM1O and STM1E1
card is specially designed only for STM-1 electrical interface without SFP module.
MN.00278.E - 005 215

9.2.3 Electrical Specification
Electrical specification measured at input/output port of STM1E card is shown in Tab.66 below.
Tab.66 - Electrical Specification on BBINTF Card
Bit Rate 155.52 Mbit/s ±20 ppm
Code Format Coded Mark Inversion (CMI)
In accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.703

Pulse Mask
measured at baseband output on card
75-ohm nominal, unbalanced measured at baseband input and output

Impedance
on card
> 15 dB / 8~240 MHz

Return Loss
measured at base band input and output on card
The attenuation of the coaxial cable pair should be assumed to follow

Input Cable Length an approximately root f law and to have a maximum insertion loss of
12.7 dB at a frequency of 78 MHz.
Coaxial Cable 2.5C-2V or equivalent
Connector Used 1.0/2.3 type coaxial connector is standard.
9.2.4 1+1 BB Redundant Switching Initiation
In case of 1+1 baseband redundant operation by addition of Ext-BB shelf and BRSW and BB INTF (Y) cards,
1+1 switching initiation is as follows:
• 1+1 redundant
- Redundant for STM1E card or

- STM1 transmission line
• 1+1 Switch Initiator
- Card Failure (CARD FAIL)
• 1+1 Switching mode
- Parallel transmission in transmit side
- Switching in receive side
9.3 STM-1 OPTICAL INTERFACE
9.3.1 Card Overview
Fig.116 shows BB INTF card overview for STM-1 optical interface.
216 MN.00278.E - 005

Fig.116 - BBINTF with SFP-2
9.3.2 Mechanical Dimension of SFP module
Mechanical dimension of SFP module is shown in Fig.117.
Fig.117 - SFP mechanical dimension
MN.00278.E - 005 217

9.3.3 SFP Module Used
Tab.67 - SFP Module Used

a
No STM-1 interface SFP module used
TA11006-E791 or equivalent (SUMITOMO,

1 STM-1 optical (OC-3 IR) SCP6G01-GL-BWE or NEC, OD-CP0069-10CN0-
001 or FINISAR, FTLF1323P1BTR)
a. SFP used is in accordance with Laser Class 1 safety standard.
9.3.4 Electrical Specification
Electrical specification measured at input/output port of SFP module is shown in Tab.68, Tab.69, Tab.70
and Tab.71.
Tab.68 - Electrical Specification of BBINTF (S-1.1)
Optical Interface In accordance with ITU-T G.957: S.1-1
Operating wavelength range 1261 to 1360 nm
Source Type MLM
Maximum: -8 dBm
Mean Launched Power
Minimum: -15 dBm
Mean Receiver Sensitivity -28 dBm at BER of 10 (-10)
Minimum Receiver Overload -8 dBm
Connector Used LC Duplex
Tab.69 - Electrical Specification of S-1.1 SFP (Only reference)
1261 to 1360 nm (TX)

Operating wavelength range
1260 to 1580 nm (RX)
Maximum: -8 dBm
Mean Launched Power
Minimum: -15 dBm
Fiber Cable Length 15 km
218 MN.00278.E - 005

Tab.70 - Electrical Specification of BBINTF (L-1.1)
Optical Interface In accordance with ITU-T G.957: L.1-1
Source Type SLM
Maximum: 0 dBm
Mean Launched Power
Minimum: -5 dBm
Tab.71 - Electrical Specification of L-1.1 SFP (Only reference)
1263 to 1360 nm (TX)

Operating wavelength range
1260 to 1580 nm (RX)
Maximum: 0 dBm
Mean Launched Power
Minimum: -5 dBm
Fiber Cable Length 40 km
9.3.5 1+1 BB Redundant Switching Initiation
In case of 1+1 baseband redundant operation by addition of Ext-BB shelf and BRSW and BB INTF (Y) cards,
1+1 switching initiation is as follows:
• 1+1 redundant:
- Redundant for STM1O line or
- Redundant for STM1O card
• 1+1 Switch Initiator:
- Loss of Signal (LOS)
- Loss of Frame (LOF)
- MS-AIS
- Signal Fail (SF)
- Card Fail (CARD FAIL)
• 1+1 Switching mode:

- Parallel transmission in transmit side
- Switching in receive side.
MN.00278.E - 005 219

9.4 STM-4 OPTICAL INTERFACE (STM4O)
9.4.1 Card Overview
Fig.118 shows the STM4O card overview for STM-4 optical interface.
STM-4
Optical
Fig.118 - STM4O Overview for 1+1 SFP
220 MN.00278.E - 005


a
No STM-1 interface SFP module used
1 STM-4 optical, S-4.1 TBA
2 STM-4 optical, L-4.1 TBA
a. SFP used is in accordance with Laser Class 1 safety standard.
Mechanical dimension of SFP module is shown in Fig.119.
Fig.119 - SFP mechanical dimension
MN.00278.E - 005 221

9.4.4 Optical Specification
Electrical specification measured at input/output port of SFP module is shown in Tab.73, Tab.74, Tab.75
and Tab.76.
Tab.73 - Electrical Specification on STM4O card (S-4.1)
Optical Interface In accordance with ITU-T G.957: S.4-1

Pulse Mask
Operating wavelength range 1293 to 1334 / 1274 to 1356 nm
Source Type MLM
Maximum: -8 dBm
Mean Launched Power
Minimum: -15 dBm
Tab.74 - Electrical Specification of S-4-1 SFP Module (Only reference)
Operating wavelength range 1274 to 1356 nm (TX) / 1260 to 1580 nm (RX)
Maximum: -8 dBm
Mean Launched Power
Minimum: -15 dBm
Tab.75 - Electrical Specification of STM4O card (L-4.1)
Optical Interface In accordance with ITU-T G.957: L.4-1

Pulse Mask
Source Type SLM
Maximum: +2 dBm
Mean Launched Power
Minimum: -3 dBm
222 MN.00278.E - 005

Tab.76 - Electrical Specification of L-4.1 SFP Module (Only reference)
Operating wavelength range 1280 to 1335 nm (TX) / 1260 to 1580 nm (RX)
Maximum: -8 dBm
Mean Launched Power
Minimum: -15 dBm
9.4.5 1+1 SFP BB Redundant Switching Initiation of STM4O
If one of events below is initiated, STM4O unit will switch the optical interface SFP module.
• Switch Initiator:
- Loss of Signal (LOS)

- Loss of Frame (LOF)
- MS-AIS
- B2 ERR
9.4.6 Other Characteristics
9.4.6.1 U(1) Jitter
Max. permissible Jitter
In accordance with ITU-T recommendation G.825 (2000-03) as shown in Tab.77.
Tab.77 - Maximum permissible jitter at network interfaces
Measurement bandwidth, Peak-to-peak amplitude

Interface
-3 dB frequencies (Hz) (UIp-p)
500 to 1.3 M 1.5

STM-1e
65 k to 1.3 M 0.075
500 to 1.3 M 1.5

STM-1
65 k to 1.3 M 0.15
1 k to 5 M 1.5
STM-4
250 k to 5M 0.15
MN.00278.E - 005 223

Input jitter tolerance
In accordance with ITU-T recommendation G.825 (2000-03) as shown in Tab.78, Tab.79 and Tab.80.
Tab.78 - STM-1 input jitter tolerance limit
Frequency f (Hz) Requirement (Peak-Peak)
10 < f < 19.3 38.9 UI (0.25 us)
19.3 < f < 68.7 750 f--1 UI
68.7 < f < 500 750 f -1 UI
500 < f < 6.5 k 1.5 UI
6.5 k < f < 65 k 9.8 x 103 f- -1 UI
65 k < f < 1.3 M 0.15 UI
Tab.79 - STM-1e input jitter tolerance limit
10 < f < 19.3 38.9 UI (0.25 us)
19.3 < f < 500 750 f- -1 UI
500 < f < 3.3 k 1.5 UI
3.3 k < f < 65 k 4.9 x 103 f--1 UI
6.5 k < f < 1.3 M 0.075 UI
Tab.80 - STM-4 input jitter tolerance limit
- 277.5 f-1 UI
- 15 UI
9.65 < f <- 100 1500 f-1 UI
100 < f <- 1000 1500 f-1 UI
1 k < f <- 25 k 1.5 UI
25 k < f <- 250 k 3.8 x 104 f-1 UI
250 k < f <- 5M 0.15 UI
224 MN.00278.E - 005

Output jitter
In accordance with ITU-T recommendation G.812 (2000-06) as shown in Tab.81
Tab.81 - STM-1 output jitter limit

Interface
500 to 1.3 M 0.50

STM-1e
65 k to 1.3 M 0.075
500 to 1.3 M 0.50

STM-1
65 k to 1.3 M 0.10
1 k to 5 M 0.50
STM-4
250 k to 5M 0.10
Jitter and wander transfer
Dependent on the synchronization method used in each type of Equipment. Jitter and wander transfer re-
quirements for SDH Equipment are specified in ITU-T Recommendations G.783, G812 and G.813.
9.4.6.2 U(2) AISU
Terminal
When baseband signal (optical/electrical) or radio signal from optical equipment or radio equipment is lost,
TL generates AIS REC and transfers AU-AIS and MS-AIS to next equipment.
When AIS REC is detected from baseband or radio signal, TL transfers AU-AIS and MS-AIS to next equip-
ment after SOH processing.
When MS-AIS is detected from baseband or radio signal, TL transfers MS-AIS to next equipment after
RSOH processing.
Repeater
When frame or signal loss is detected, TL generates MS-AIS to next equipment.
9.4.6.3 U(3) BSIU
Transmission
Transparent transmission (BSI transmission) (The property of a binary transmission channel, telecommu-
nication circuit or connection, that permits all sequences of binary signal elements to be conveyed over it
at its specified bit rate, without change to the value of any signal elements).
MN.00278.E - 005 225

9.5 GIGABIT ETHERNET SIGNAL INTERFACE (GE SW)
9.5.1 Card Overview
1.0/2.3 type coaxial: 2Mbit/s
1.0/2.3 type coaxial: 2Mbit/s

Port1
Gigabit RJ-45 connector

Port2
Ether
Port3
GESW v2 Card
Port4
Port1
Port2 type coaxial: 2M

1.0/2.3
SYNC
CLK IN type coaxial: 2M
1.0/2.3
1.0/2.3 type coaxial: 2Mbit/s CLK

SYNC
1.0/2.3 type coaxial: 2Mbit/sCLK
FE RJ-45 connector GESW v1 Card
Port1 SFP
Gigabit
Ether Port2 SFP
Fig.120 -
226 MN.00278.E - 005


a
No Ethernet interface SFP module used
1 1000BASE-T electrical TA11006-E794 or equivalent (FINISAR, FCLF8521P2BTL)
2 1000BASE-SX optical TA11006-E792 or equivalent (FINISAR, FTLF8519P2BNL-FW)
3 1000BASE-LX optical TA11006-E793 or equivalent (SUMITOMO, SCP6G44-GL-BWH)
a. SFP used for optical interface is in accordance with Laser Class 1 safety standard.
Mechanical dimension of SFP module is shown in Fig.121 and Fig.122.
Fig.121 - 1000BASE-T electrical interface
MN.00278.E - 005 227

Fig.122 - 1000BASE-SX/LX optical interface
9.5.4 Electrical Specification of GESW SFP
Electrical specification measured at input/output port of SFP module is shown in Tab.83, Tab.84 and
Tab.85.
Tab.83 - Electrical Specification of 1000BASE-T SFP
SFP Used 1.25 Gigabit Ethernet electrical transceiver
Specification IEEE802.3 full duplex
Typical Reach 100 m
Cable Used UTP category 5e
Connector Used RJ-45
Tab.84 - Electrical Specification of 1000BASE-SX SFP
SFP Used 1.25 Gigabit Ethernet optical transceiver
Specification IEEE802.3z full duplex
Operating wavelength
830 to 860 nm
Range
Source Type MLM
Maximum:-3 dBm
Mean Launched Power
Minimum: -9 dBm
Average Received Power 0 dBm
Typical Reach 550 m
Cable Used 12-core fiber cable
228 MN.00278.E - 005

Tab.85 - Electrical Specification of 1000BASE-LX SFP
SFP Used 1.25 Gigabit Ethernet optical transceiver
Specification IEEE802.3z full duplex
Operating wavelength
1270 to 1360 nm
Range
Source Type SLM
Maximum: -3 dBm
Mean Launched Power
Minimum: -9.5 dBm
Average Received Power 0 dBm
Typical Reach 5 km
Cable Used 2-core fiber cable
MN.00278.E - 005 229

9.5.5 Network Feature List for SNMP-SN: V7.54
Network feature list for SNMP-SV: V7.54 is shown in Tab.86.
Tab.86 - Main parameter of preliminary IP feature list
230 MN.00278.E - 005

MN.00278.E - 005 231
Warning: There is dip switch SW83A on GESW v1 card and mode setting is as follows. For detailed SW83A,
please refer to “On-Site Test & Maintenance Manual”.
Dip Switch SW83A bit-1 ON (default) OFF
Mode QoS Mode Normal Mode
LinePort1 (SFP1) QoS supported, high priority
LinePort2 (SFP2) QoS supported, low priority Possible to assign different VLAV
FE Port Not QoS supported
232 MN.00278.E - 005

9.5.6 Link Aggregation Schematic Diagram
Link aggregation schematic block diagram is shown in Fig.123 and Fig.124 below.
G E S W v1
Line P ort R adio port TR M D P ort
R adio A gg
1 1 R -1 W ork 1
G roup1
R -2 W ork 2
2 1
W AN
R -3 W ork 3
L2S W /S E L
N :N
R -4 W ork 4
L1S W
R -5 W ork 5
R -6 W ork 6
R -7 W ork 7
R -8 W ork 8
1 5 5 .5 2 M
L VD S
Fig.123 - Functional Block Diagram of GESW v1
G E S W v2
Line R adio TR M D M ax .
P ort port P ort 8 CH
R adio A gg
1 1 R -1 W ork 1
G roup1
R -2 W ork 2
2 1
W AN
R -3 W ork 3
L2S W /S E L
N :N R adio A gg
3 1 R -4 W ork 4
G roup2
L1S W
R -5 W ork 5
4 1
R -6 W ork 6
R -7 W ork 7
R -8 W ork 8
4 6 6 .5 6 M
8b10b
Fig.124 - Functional Block Diagram of GESW v2
MN.00278.E - 005 233

9.6 AUXILIARY (AUX)/FAST ETHERNET (FE) SIGNAL INTERFACE
9.6.1 Radio User Channel (RUC)
Tab.87 - Electrical Specification of Radio User Channel (RUC)
Transmission Method Bit insertion / Separation to/from RFCOH bits
Bit Rate 3x64 kbit/s (equivalent to 3 CH telephony) per system
Max. three (3) CH available by mixing of optional VF, DGTL and V-11
Interface
modules on AUX INTF
Input level: -4 dBr nominal ± 2 dBr (-16 to +3.0 dBr, 1-dB step)
Output level: -4 dBr nominal ± 2 dBr (-24.0 to +3.0 dBr, 1-dB step)
Analog Interface
Voice maximum level: +3 dBm
Impedance: 600-ohm balanced
64 kbit/s digital interface in accordance with ITU-T G.703

G.703 Interface
Interface: Co-directional or Contra-directional
64 kbit/s digital interface in accordance with ITU-T V.11

V.11 Interface
Interface: Contra-directional
Connector Used Dsub Multi-Pin connector on AUX INTF card
9.6.2 Wayside Traffic (WS)
Tab.88 - Electrical Specification of Wayside Traffic (WS)
Interface In accordance with ITU-T G.703
Line Code HDB3
Impedance 75-ohm unbalanced
Maximum attenuation of
6 dB at 1.024 MHz
input signal
Connector Used 1.0/2.3 type coaxial connector on BB INTF card
234 MN.00278.E - 005

9.6.2.1 Jitter
Jitter Transfer
In accordance with ITU-T recommendation G.742 (1988-11) as shown in Fig.125 below.
N ote
Allowable 0.5 dB gain of

10 Hz to 40 Hz range is
changed to 0 dB gain as
TL specification.
Fig.125 - Jitter Transfer Characteristic (f0 = 10 Hz)
Tributary Output jitter
In accordance with ITU-T recommendation G.742 (1988-11) Section 6.2
Tab.89 - 2.048 Mbit/s tributary output jitter limit

Interface
Up to 100 kHz 0.25

2.048 Mbit/s
18 kHz to 100 kHz 0.05
Jitter tolerance
In accordance with ITU-T recommendation G.823 (2000-03) as shown in Tab.90.
Tab.90 - 2.048 Mbit/s Minimum jitter tolerance limit
20 < f < 2.4 k 1.5
2.4 k < f < 18 k 3.6 x 103 f- -1
18 k < f < 100 k 0.2
MN.00278.E - 005 235

9.6.3 Synchronous Ethernet Characteristics
Synchronous Ethernet characteristics is shown in Tab.91.
Tab.91 - Synchronous Ethernet Characteristics
Synchronous Ethernet mode or

Synchronization Mode
Asynchronous Ethernet mode
ITU-T G.8261/Y.1361: Network Timing & Sync Aspect

a ITU-T G.8262/Y.1362: EEC Slave Clock
Standard conformity
ITU-T G.8264/Y.1364: Timing Information
(IEEE1588 is reference standard)
b
Sync. Clock Source In case of GESW v1
(Priority1 is highest) Priority1/283 selectable from 12 CLK sources below:
(1) Line port 1/2 recovered clock
(2) TRDM R-1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 port recovered clock
(3) External clock
(4) Internal clock
In case of GESW v2 c
Priority1/2 selectable from 8 CLK sources below:
(1) Port1/2/3/4 recovered clock (Line Port1/2/3/4)
(2) Port5/6/7/8 recovered clock (Radio Port1/2/3/4)
Priority3 (fixed): External clock
When all of Priority1/2/3 clocks are interrupted because of failure,

Holdover GESW has a holdover mode to maintain the maximum frequency off-
set of +/-4.6 ppm.
External Clock Input
Data Rate 2.048 Mbit/s, HDB3 from outside BITS (SSU)
Maximum attenuation of
6 dB at 1.024 MHz in accordance with ITU-T G.703
input signal
Connector Used 1.0/2.3 type coaxial connector on GESW card
External Clock Output
Data Rate 2.048 Mbit/s, HDB3 to outside BITS (SSU)
Signal Parameter EEC-Option1 in accordance with ITU-T G.8262/Y.1362
Connector Used 1.0/2.3 type coaxial connector on GESW card
a. ITU-T G.826/Y.1361 (SyncE) is NOT supported for 1000Base-T

b. For synchronous clock source port of item 1 and 2, refer to Fig.123 and Fig.124.
c. For synchronous clock source concept of GESW v2, refer to paragraph Appendix-A: Synchro-
nous Clock Sources Concept of GESW v2
236 MN.00278.E - 005

Appendix-A: Synchronous Clock Sources Concept of GESW v2
Fig.126 - Clock Source Selector Diagram of GESW v2
Source selector-1 can select any two ports from Port1 to Port8 by WebLT. Source selector-2 is not managed
by WebLT. Priority 1 to 3 are "Hard coded" inside FPGA and External Clock source is "Hard coded" to Pri-
ority-3 inside FPGA.
FRX-3E is hybrid system for STM-1 and Ethernet. STM-1 clock source is synchronized to incoming traffic
as "RS mode" and cannot be synchronized to external clock from SSU and the same concept applies to
Ethernet network. That is, Ethernet clock source is synchronized to incoming traffic and external clock pri-
ority is set lowest as optional clock selection.
9.6.4 10/100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet Channel (FE) on GESW v1
Tab.92 - Electrical Specification of FE Channel (FE)
Interface In accordance with IEEE802.3 full duplex
Connector Used RJ-45
9.6.5 10/100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet Interface on AUX CONV
Tab.93 - Electrical Specification of FE Channel (FE)
Interface In accordance with IEEE802.3 full duplex
2 x RJ-45
Connector Used
1.0/2.3 coaxial when FE is transferred using WS traffic on BBINTF
MN.00278.E - 005 237

9.6.6 Orderwire Signal Interface (OW)
Tab.94 - Electrical Specification of Orderwire Signal Interface
Transmission Bit insertion/separation to/from E1 of SOH.
Bit Rate 1 x 64 kbit/s (equivalent to 1 CH telephony) Omnibus orderwire
Headset interface
Interface
4W for branching connection
< Headset Interfacea >
Input connector: 3.5 mm mini-jack
Output connector: 3.5 mm mini-jack
Interface Level < 4W Interface >

Input level: -4.0 dBr nominal ±2 dBr (-16 to +3.0 dBr, 1 dB step)
Output level: -4.0 dBr nominal ±2 dBr (-24.0 to +3.0 dBr, 1 dB step)
Maximum VF level: +3 dBm
a. Headset is provided by the Customer.
Tab.95 - Selective Calling Method of OW Calling
IP address setting on WebLT
Calling Method Control > Order Wire
Set CALL to ON and click Operate bottom
Set IP Address of Station B in Station A and Set CALL to ON
Individual Station Call Calling LED (Blinking) and buzzer tone of Station B are ON
OW calling between Station A and Station B is available
Set IP Address of Station B to X in Station A and set CALL to ON

Station Group Call Calling LED (Blinking) and buzzer tone of Station B to X are ON.
OW calling between Station A and Station B to X is available.
9.6.7 Housekeeping Signal Interface (HK)
Tab.96 - Electrical Specification of Housekeeping Signal Interface (HK)
Supervisory Maximum 16 items, photo Coupler
Remote Control Maximum 8 items, Loop relay contact
238 MN.00278.E - 005

9.6.8 Rack Alarm Bus (RAB)
Tab.97 shows the Electrical Specification of Rack Alarm Bus Signal Interface (RAB)
Tab.97 - Rack Alarm Bus Signal Interface (RAB)
NE Alarm (NE ALM) Output a.
Audible Critical Alarm (AUD CR) Output
Visual Critical Alarm (VIS CR) Output
Audible Major Alarm (AUD MJ) Output
Visual Major Alarm (VIS MJ) Output

Supervisory
Audible Manor Alarm (AUD MN) Output
Visual Minor Alarm (VIS MN) Output
Audible Warning Alarm (AUD WR) Output
Visual Warning Alarm (VIS WR) Output
RAB Maintenance (RAB-MNT) Output
Control Alarm Cut Off (ACO) Input a
a. RAB information marked with * is standard and other RAB information are optional when RAB
module is installed on SV card.
9.7 LAN INTERFACE FOR NMS
NMS of TL is designed on SNMP and HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol). SV card, main controller installed
in the TL, is composed both an SNMP embedded agent and a web server. These facilities provide integrated
NMS environment among TL and various type of equipment such as MUX, ADM, routers and another vend-
er's radio equipment thanks to SNMP, and good accessibility by HTTP which is not depend on management
platform. SV card has two (2) Ethernet port and two (2) DCC (Data Communication Channel) terminations
from radio/line sides as a connection port for NMS.
Fig.127 shows block diagram of the NMS facilities on the SV card.
TL N E
SNMP-SV unit
Network Management Interface
Embedded
W eb server
D C C connection E thernet connection
S N M P agent
[ IP address ]
Fig.127 - Block diagram of the NMS facilities on SV
Interconnectivity between Ethernet LAN connection and DCC line is realized by on-board HUB function on
the SV. All of the NMS connection port, two (2) Ethernet LAN and two (2) DCCs are connected each other
via the HUB. This HUB is a simple repeater HUB, so that packet routing function of any protocol layer is
NOT supported by TL.
MN.00278.E - 005 239

Tab.98 shows LAN interface on SV unit.
Tab.98 - LAN Interface on SV Unit
Interface 10/100BASE-T
Connection Cable Used UTP (Un-Shielded Twisted Pair) Category 5 cable
Two (2) ports, RJ-45 jack

Port
Connected to a HUB a internally
Interconnectivity between a.
On-board HUB function on SV card
LAN connection and DCC
a. HUB function is as follows:

1. Simple repeater HUB
2. Packet routing function of any protocol layer is NOT supported.
9.8 RF INTERFACE
RF waveguide interface to/from the antenna system is as follows:
Tab.99 - RF Flange Specification
Flange Mating
RF band Frequency Range (MHz)
IEC standard
4G Type1 UDR 40 3,600 - 4,200
4G Type2 UDR 40 3,800 - 4,200
4G Type3 UDR 40 3,600 - 4,200
4G Type4 UDR 40 3,600 - 4,200
5G Type1 UDR 48 4,400 - 5,000
L6G Type1/2 UDR 70 5,925 - 6,175
U6G Type1/2/3/4 UDR 70 6,425 - 7,125
7G Type1/2/3/9 UDR 70/84a 7,125 - 7,425
7G Type4 UDR 70/84a. 7,110 - 7,750
7G Type5/6/7 UDR 70/84a. 7,425 - 7,725
7G Type8 UDR 70/84a. 7,250 - 7,550
8G Type1/3 UDR 84 7,725 - 8,275
8G Type2/4 UDR 84 7,900 - 8,400
8G Type5 UDR 84 7,900 - 8,500
11G Type1/2/3 UDR 100 10,700 - 11,700
11G Type4 UDR 100 10,700 - 11,700
13G Type1 UDR 120 12,750 - 13,250
a. Both specification is available and customer will select.
240 MN.00278.E - 005

Return Loss at DUP port is in accordance with ESTI EN302 217-2-1 V1.2.1 (2007-06) as shown in Tab.100.
Tab.100 - Return Loss at Equipment Antenna Port
RF Band Return Loss (dB) Remarks
4/5/U6/11GHz > 24 dB (26 dB)

(40 MHz CS system) /F0 ±20 MHz
a b
Refer to note and
4/L6/U6/7/8/13 GHz > 24 dB (26 dB)
(30 MHz CS system) /F0 ±15 MHz
a. Measured at duplexer (DUP) input/output port (C/C' reference point).

b. F0 means the center frequency of transmit and receive RF channels.
MN.00278.E - 005 241

10 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ON SDH ON RADIO
10.1 GENERAL
Fig.128 shows the radio frame structure employing optimized framing both STM-1 and Native IP signal in-
terface when set SDH/Ether to SDH on WebLT.
• Radio frame structure:
- Four (4) sub multi-frame structures (N bits depends on RF frequency channel separation (CS)
and modulation scheme, N=6 for 64QAM and N=7 for 128QAM)
- Information bits of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-1 frame structured signal, Native IP (1000BASE-T/SX/
LX) signal and radio frame complementary overhead (RFCOH) bits are transferred by containing
in the radio multi-frame.
- In case of STM-1 interface, STM-1 framing and mapping are in accordance with ITU-T G.707 and
STM-1 signal processing such as frame synchronization, scramble/descramble, digital commu-
nication channel (D1 to D3), parity bit (BIP-8), section trace (J0), alarm information signal (AIS)
and wayside traffic (WSS) are transferred on section overhead (SOH) bytes on STM-1 frame
structure.
- In case of Native IP interface only for GESW v1 card, mapping is carried out by SIAE Micro-
elettronica proprietary method inside GE SW card and signal interface between GE SW and
TRMD via. GE ADPT is 155.52 Mbit/s LVDS signal using pseudo STM-1 frame structure for all RF
channels.
- QAM scheme is automatically set on WebLT depending on RF band, that is, 64QAM for 40 MHz
channel spacing and 128QAM for 30 MHz (28/29/29.65/ 30 MHz channel spacing is applied. In
this case N = 6 for 64QAM and N = 7 for 128QAM.
Fig.128 - Optimized Framing for STM-1 and Native IP Signal Interface
242 MN.00278.E - 005

10.2 STM-1 INTERFACE
10.2.1 STM-1 Frame Structure
In case of STM-1 interface, Multiplex Section Overhead (MSOH) and Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH)
are compatible with SDH fibre optical system in accordance with ITU-T Recommendation G. 707 as shown
in Fig.129 and detailed function of overhead is shown in Tab.101.
Wayside traffic signal (WSS) is bit allocated on SOH using reserved bytes for national use and so on. Net-
work management signal and omnibus orderwire signal are also bit allocated on SOH using D1 to D3 and
E1 bytes.
Fig.130 shows the STM-1 signal construction.
270 by tes
9 by tes
RS O H
P ointer Payload
9 row s
MSOH
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 W SS W SS
RS O H B1 W SS W SS E1 F1 W SS W SS
D1 W SS W SS D2 W SS D3 W SS
P ointer H1 H1 H1 H2 H2 H2 H3 H3 H3
B2 B2 B2 K1 W SS W SS K2 W SS W SS
D4 W SS W SS D5 W SS W SS D6 W SS W SS
MSOH D7 W SS W SS D8 W SS W SS D9 W SS W SS
D10 W SS W SS D11 W SS W SS D12 W SS W SS
S1 M1 E2 W SS
M S O H , R S O H and P ointer
W SS : W ay s ide Traffic by te (W S S ) us ing res erved by te for national us e and s o on
Fig.129 - STM-1 Frame Structure
MN.00278.E - 005 243

Tab.101 - Main Function of Section Overhead
(ITU-T G.707, 708 and 709)
OH Function Byte Abbrev. Explanation
Used for SDH frame synchronization.

6 bytes are used to each STM-1.
Framing A1, A2
Pattern shall be A1A1A1A2A2A2.
A1= 11110110 A2= 00101000
Used for Telecommunication Management Network

(TMN).
Data communication D1 to D3 are communicated in Regenerator Section
D1 to D12
channels (RS)
D4 to D12 are communicated in Multiplex Section
(MS)a
Regenerator Section Unique number assigned to an STM-1 prior to it be-

J0
Trace ing multiplexed to a higher STM-N level.
SOH
Two byte are allocated
Orderwire channels for voice communication
Orderwire E1, E2a.
E1 is communicated in RS
E2 is communicated in MSa.
Reserved for user purposes

User channel F1 Only defined for STM-1 of STM-NF1 byte is NOT sup-
ported in TL
One byte allocated in each STM-1 for the elementary

BIP-8 B1
regenerator section bit error monitoring function.
Three bytes allocated in each STM-1 for a multiplex

BIP-24a. B2a. section bit error monitoring function.
Bit Interleaved Parity 24 code using even parity.a.
Two bytes allocated for Multiplex

APS channela. K1, K2a.
Section Protection Switching signalling.a.
Spare Z1, Z2 Six bytes allocated for spare.
This byte is reserved for quality control of synchro-

Synchronous statusa. S1a.
nous clock signal.a.
This byte indicates number of blocked error for the

Far end block errora. M1a.
far end.a.
Administrative unit (AU) pointer bits Processed for

PTR Pointer bit H1 to H3
Section Adaptation (SA)
a. MSOH control bytes except for wayside traffic (WSS). These bytes are always transparently transmit-
ted in TL
244 MN.00278.E - 005

Fig.130 - STM-1 signal construction
MN.00278.E - 005 245

10.3 NATIVE IP INTERFACE
10.3.1 GESW when set SDH/Ether to SDH
In case of Gigabit Ethernet 1000BASE-T/SX/LX interface, incoming packet traffic from user port (maximum
2) is connected to GESW (Gigabit Ether Switch). GESW card has two circuits, one is for SDH support block
and the other is for Ether support block. SDH support block is explained in this description.
Ethernet traffic is fed to STM-1 support FPGA circuit as shown in Fig.131 after Layer 2 digital processing
and then radio side signal processing such as radio side distribution/aggregation to/from TRMD, HDLC pay-
load packing, baseband framing is made. Maximum distribution/aggregation function to/from TRMDs is 8
RF channels.
GESW v1
S D H s upport bloc k
(C urrent R eleas e) P s eudo
S TM -1
S DH
SEL Logic al/
G P 1-V C A T
P hy s ic al
(M ax . 8)
MAP
B B interfac e = S TM -1 P s eudo
S TM -1
Data s peed of W A N 1-8
to /fro m TR MD
155.52 M bit/s for eac h W A N (A c tual data rate)
vs . G E AD P T
1 5 5 .5 2 Mb its /s
M A C1
GE1 SFP1 E ther IF -F R M SEL W A N1
E ther/H DLC
G P 1-V C A T
+ S G M ll
Logic al/
P hy s ic al
MAP
M A C2
GE2 SFP2 E ther
E ther/H DLC
G P 2-V C A T IF -F R M SEL W A N8
+ S G M ll
L2S W
FE R J-45 M A C3
E ther s upport bloc k (Future R eleas e)
(S G M ll)
Data s peed of W A N 1-8 QAM W ebLT &

466.56 M bit/s for eac h W A N S etting PC
M A C4
(not ac tual data rate inc luding overhead bits )
C LK S y nc (S G M ll)
(Differennt data rate depending on Q A M s c hem e for eac h W A N )
S tac k s ide
(F uture option) FPGA
Fig.131 - Functional Block Diagram of GE SW v1 Card

(When set SDH/Ether to SDH on WebLT)
246 MN.00278.E - 005

10.3.2 MAC Frame
Fig.132 shows the Ethernet MAC frame structure from LINE side of GE SW. MAC frame structure is in ac-
cordance with IEEE802.3 standard and frame length is from 84 to 1,538 bytes.
IFG P ream ble D A S A Type E thernet P ayload FC S

(12 bytes ) (8) (6) (6) (2) (46 to 1,500 bytes ) (4 bytes )
Note: IFG: Inter Frame Gap byte

DA: Destination Address byte
SA: Source Address byte
FCS: Frame Check Sequence byte
Fig.132 - Ethernet MAC Frame Structure (84 to 1,538 bytes)
10.3.3 MAC Frame Conversion
MAC frame structure is converted inside the GE SW card. IFG, Preamble and FCS bytes are removed and
FLG, ADR, Control and CRC bytes are newly added. Cascaded variable-length packet signals are fed to
VCAT/LCAS circuit.
Fig.133 shows the converted MAC frame structure.
E thernet MAC Fram e c om ing from LINE s ide of GE S W (84 to 1,538 bytes per pac ket)

E thernet Fram e C onvers ion ins ide GW S W (74 to 1,528 bytes per pac ket)
FLG AD R Control DA S A Type E thernet P ayload C R C FLG

(6) (1) (4) (6) (6) (2) (46 to 1,500 bytes ) (2) (2)
Flow of Variable-length E thernet P ac kets
P ac ket 1 P ac ket2 P ac ket 3 P ac ket #n
Note: FLG: Flag byte,

ADR: Address byte
Control: Control byte for Ethernet Distribution/Aggregation
CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check byte
Fig.133 - Converted MAC frame Structure
MN.00278.E - 005 247

10.3.4 VCAT/LCAT
Ethernet traffic with variable-length construction of packets are distributed and separated on one byte ba-
sis to/from pseudo STM-1 payload of m+0 RF channels (m = maximum 8) in a sequential order as shown
in Fig.134.
In the pseudo STM-1 overhead byte, only A1, A2, B1 and B2 bytes are used for frame synchronization and
bit parity check. And GT and L1/2/3 bytes are allocated for LCAS and VCAT function as shown in Fig.135.
Tim e s lot MUX'ed s ignal before Mapping
D0 D1 D2 D3 D49
D ynam ic Mapping by VC AT
P s eudo S TM -1 F ram e (155.52 M bit/s )
W1
F D0 D3 D6 D9 D12 D15 D18 D21 D24 D27 F D30 D34 D38 D42 D46
DP
RAM
W2
In c as e of 4+ 0
Dis tribution/A ggregation
on one by te bas is V CA T
LC A S W3
W4
F - - - - - - - - - - F D33 D37 D41 D45 D49
OOS IS by R F ex pans ion
Fig.134 - Virtual Concatenation (VCAT) to/from TRMD
270 bytes
9 bytes
SO H
9 row s P eudo S TM-1 P ayload
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 GT
GT B2 B2 B2 L1 L2 L3
O ve rh e a d Byte Ab b re va tio n Usa g e D e scrip tio n
A1 & A2 D a ta fra m e syn ch ro n iza tio n

B1 & B2 Bit Pa rity C h e ck to m o n ito r th e e rro r p e rfo rm a n ce
SO H
L C AS (L in k C a p a city Ad ju stm e n t Sch e m e &
GT, L1, L2 & L3
VC AT (Ve rtu a l C o n ca te n a tio n )
Fig.135 - Pseudo STM-1 Frame Structure
248 MN.00278.E - 005

10.4 RADIO FRAME STRUCTURE
10.4.1 Radio Multi-Frame
Fig.136 and Fig.137 show the radio multi-frame structure of 128QAM, 30 MHz CS system and 64QAM, 40
MHz CS system. Main parameters are as follows:
128QAM, 30 MHz CS System:
1. Multi-frame (2,772 bits), N = 7
2. 4 sub frame (693 bits x 4)
3. Bit construction per radio sub frame (693 bits)
- F: Frame synchronization bit (21 bits)
- I: Information bit (4,455 bits)
- S: Auxiliary bit such as route identification (105 bits)
- PC: Parity checking bit (249 bits)
- A: Dummy bit for radio coding (16 bits)
- B: Dummy bit for LDPC coding length (5 bits)
4. Digital transfer rate = 155.52 Mbit/s
5. Total digital transfer rate = 169.3440 Mbit/s (24.192 Mbit/s x 7)
M ulti-F ram e (2,772 bits )

7 bits
S ub F ram e 1 S ub F ram e 2 S ub F ram e 3 S ub F ram e 4
3 bits 690 bits
F F F I & A UX I B FEC F EC A S ignal B its /S F Des c ription
F F F I I PC FEC F EC A F 21 F ram e bit

I I PC FEC F EC A
7 bits
F F F I 4,455 Inform ation bit
F F F I B PC FEC F EC A A UX 105 A ux iliary bit
F F F I B PC FEC F EC A FEC 249 F E C c hec k bit
F F F I B PC FEC A A A 16 Dum m y bit after c oding
F F F I B PC FEC A A B 5 Dum m y bit for LDP C
I Total 4851 bits /S ub Fram e

651 bits 1 1 34 bits 1 2
Fig.136 - Radio Multi-Frame Structure for 128QAM, 30 MHz CS System
MN.00278.E - 005 249

64QAM, 40 MHz CS System:
1. Multi-frame (2,672 bits), N = 6
2. 4 sub frame (668 bits x 4)
3. Bit construction per radio sub frame (668 bits)
- F: Frame synchronization bit (18 bits)
- I: Information bit (3,240 bits)
- S: Auxiliary bit such as route identification (80 bits)
- PC: Parity checking bit (664 bits)
- A: Dummy bit for radio coding (6 bits)
4. Digital transfer rate = 155.52 Mbit/s
5. Total digital transfer rate = 192.384 Mbit/s (32.064 Mbit/s x 6)

M ulti-F ram e (2,672 bits )
6 bits
S ub F ram e 1 S ub F ram e 2 S ub F ram e 3 S ub F ram e 4
3 bits 665 bits
F F F I & A UX I FEC A S ignal B its /S F Des c ription

F F F I I FEC A F 18 F ram e bit
6 bits
F F F I F EC FEC A I 3,240 Inform ation b

F F F I F EC FEC A A UX 80 A ux iliary bit
F F F I F EC FEC A FEC 664 F E C c hec k bit
F F F I F EC FEC A A 6 Dum m y bit after c oding
Total 4008 bits /S ub Fram e

553 bits 1 110 bits 1
Fig.137 - Radio Multi-Frame Structure for 64QAM, 40 MHz CS System
10.5 STM-1 ON RADIO
10.5.1 STM-1 on Radio
Schematic block diagram of STM-1 on Radio for 64QAM for 40 MHz CS and 128QAM for 30 MHz CS is shown
in Fig.138. Main function is as follows:
STM-1 on Radio
1. In the BB INTF card (SDH), STM-1 signal is digitally processed after STM-1 frame synchronization
and DCC and OW signals of line side are dropped and DCC, WSS and OW signals in the radio side
are inserted on section overhead bytes (SOH) of STM-1 frame structure.
2. Other RFCOH bits (WSR, RSC, ATPC, Route Identification, LDPC and other overhead bits) are trans-
ferred through TRMD card via. SV card.
3. STM-1 main signal and RFCOH signal are inserted and separated to the radio frame structure by
applying justification and de-justification techniques.
250 MN.00278.E - 005

TR M D
2 x 7-level s ignal
x7 R adio F ram e I-C H
Total B it R ate Digital D-A 128Q A M
S -P C O NV B it Ins ertion Q -C H
G eneration Filter CO NV MOD
Jus tific ation
169.3440 M bit/s
24.192 M bits /s x 7 RS C LDP C , A TP C , DI & dum m y
HK
SV
I, DC C , E 1
DCC, O W
S TM -1
B B INTF S -P C O N V CO DE R
WS
155.52M
LV DS
128Q A M , 30 M H z C S S y s tem
TR M D
2 x 6-level s ignal
x6 R adio F ram e I-C H
Total B it R ate Digital D-A 64Q A M
S -P C O NV B it Ins ertion Q -C H
G eneration Filter CO NV MOD
Jus tific ation
192.384 M bits /s
32.064 M bits /s x 6 RS C LDP C , A TP C , DI & dum m y
HK
SV
I, DC C , E 1
DCC, O W
S TM -1
B B INTF S -P C O N V CO DE R
WS
155.52M
LV DS
64Q A M , 40 M H z C S S y s tem
Fig.138 - Functional Block Diagram of STM-1 on Radio
10.6 NATIVE IP ON SDH
10.6.1 Native IP on SDH
Schematic block diagram of Native IP on Radio for 64QAM for 40 MHz CS and 128QAM for 30 MHz CS is
shown in Fig.139.
Main function is as follows:
Native IP on Radio when SDH/Ether = SDH
1. Native IP signal is digitally processed in the Gigabit Ethernet switch (GE SW) card and distributed/
separated to/from TRMD via. GE ADPT for Gigabit Ethernet link aggregation.
2. All RFCOH bits (DCC, RSC, OW, ATPC, Route Identification, LDPC and other overhead bits) are
transferred through TRMD card via. SV card.
3. Native IP signal and RFCOH signal are inserted and separated to the radio frame structure by ap-
plying justification/de-justification techniques.
MN.00278.E - 005 251

128QAM, 30 MHz CS System
GESW TR M D
Ps eudo 2 x 7-level s ignal

G E A DP T
GE1 STM-1 S erial- x 7 R adio F ram e Digital I-C H
Frame W1 Total B it R ate Digital
P arallel B it Ins ertion A nalog Q -CH MOD
G eneration Filter
GE2 C onvers ion Jus tific ation CO NV
168.6440 M bits /s
FE 24.192 M bits /s x 7 DCC, RS C LDP C , A TP C , DI & dum m y
L2S W
V CA T
O W , HK
C LK SV
I
WebLT Ps eudo
G E A DP T 30 M H z C S
STM-1 S P D C O NV
Frame Wm CO DE R
155.52 M bit/s
LV DS
64QAM, 40 MHz CS System

GESW TR M D
Ps eudo 2 x 6-level s ignal

G E A DP T
GE1 STM-1 S erial- x 6 R adio F ram e Digital I-C H
Frame W1 Total B it R ate Digital
P arallel B it Ins ertion A nalog Q -CH MOD
G eneration Filter
GE2 C onvers ion Jus tific ation CO NV
192.384 M bits /s
FE 32.064 M bits /s x 6 DCC, RS C LDP C , A TP C , DI & dum m y
L2S W
V CA T
O W , HK
C LK SV
I
Ps eudo
WebLT G E A DP T 40 M H z C S
STM-1 S P D C O NV
Frame Wm CO DE R
155.52 M bit/s
LV DS
Fig.139 - Functional Block Diagram of Native IP on Radio
252 MN.00278.E - 005

11 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ON NATIVE IP ON
RADIO
11.1 FIXED OR ADAPTIVE QAM SCHEME
When you set SDH/Ether to Ether on WebLT, modulation scheme is able to select from QPSK to 512QAM*
specified by license key.
Main features are as follows:
• Main Adaptive Modulation Features:
- Fixed modulation scheme available on each RF channel basis;

Modulation applied is QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM.
- Adaptive modulation scheme available on each RF channel basis depending on path propagation
condition.
Modulation applied is QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM.
- QAM Management Information for Adaptive Modulation;

To define Requested QAM (R-QAM) based on transmit data
To define Maximum Possible QAM (P-QAM) at demodulator
To define Transmit QAM for dynamic change of modulation order depending on propagation con-
dition
Warning: In case of FPGA uploaded TRMD v1 and GESW v2 combination, available QAM is 16/32/64/128/
256QAM.
Warning: Native IP on Radio is only available for TRMD v2 + GESW v2 combination. For details of available
QAM, please refer to paragraph 5.3 Transfer rate.
11.2 DIGITAL PROCESSING INSIDE GESW
11.2.1 Overview
Fig.140 shows the functional block diagram of GESW v2 card. There are four (4) 1000BASE-T/SX/LX Gi-
gabit Ethernet ports (Line Port), four (4) Radio Ports (Radio Port), two (2) Radio Aggregation Groups (RAG)
and maximum right (8) TRMD Ports.
MN.00278.E - 005 253

G E S W v2 To TR M D
LV DS 8b10b
466.56 M bits /s
S uper F ram e
GE1 M A C1 Tim e AM/ IF -F ram e W ork 1
Ins ertion
S lot LC A S /
x8
GE2 M UX V CA T IF -F ram e W ork 2
L2S W M A C2 RA G 1 RA G 1
M A C/ W A N/
GE3 IF -F ram e W ork 3
SEL SEL
N:N N :N S uper F ram e Log/
GE4 M A C3 Time AM/ IF -F ram e W ork 4
Ins ertion P hy
Slot LC A S /
x4 MAP
MUX V CA T IF -F ram e W ork 5
N:N
M A C4 RAG2 RA G 2
IF -F ram e W ork 6
S ta ck s id e
IF -F ram e W ork 7
(fu tu re o p t)
IF -F ram e W ork 8
QAM W ebLT
CO NT
M anagem ent
FPGA
Fig.140 - Schematic Function of GESW v2 Card

(having two radio aggregation group, RAG1 & RAG2)
11.2.2 MAC Frame
Fig.141 shows the Ethernet MAC frame structure from LINE side of GE SW. MAC frame structure is in ac-
cordance with IEEE802.3 standard and frame length is from 84 to 1,538 bytes.
IFG P ream ble DA SA Type E thernet P ayload FC S

Note: IFG: Inter Frame Gap byte

DA: Destination Address byte
SA: Source Address byte
FCS: Frame Check Sequence byte
Fig.141 - Ethernet MAC Frame Structure (84 to 1,538 bytes)
11.2.3 MAC Frame Conversion
MAC frame structure is converted inside GE SW card. IFG, Preamble and FCS bytes are removed and FLG,
ADR, Control and CRC bytes are newly added and variable-length Ethernet packet signal are generated
after First-in-First-out circuit. Cascaded variable-length Ethernet packet signal is fed to VCAT/LCAS circuit
as shown in Fig.142.
254 MN.00278.E - 005

E thernet MAC Fram e c om ing from LINE s ide of GE S W (84 to 1,538 bytes per pac ket)

E thernet Fram e C onvers ion ins ide GW S W (74 to 1,528 bytes per pac ket)
FLG AD R Control DA S A Type E thernet P ayload C R C FLG

(6) (1) (4) (6) (6) (2) (46 to 1,500 bytes ) (2) (2)
Flow of Variable-length E thernet P ac kets
P ac ket 1 P ac ket2 P ac ket 3 P ac ket #n
Note: FLG: Flag byte, ADR:Address byte
Control: Control byte for Ethernet Distribution/Aggregation
CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check byte
Fig.142 -Generation of Variable-Length Ethernet Packet Signal
11.2.4 Time Slot Multiplexer
32-bit Variable-length Ethernet streams are fed to time slot multiplexer circuit and multiplexed / de-mul-
tiplexed to/from serial data stream on one byte basis. Time multiplexed serial data is super frame con-
structed with 8-byte synchronization byte and 1,024-byte data time slot Mapping byte, total 1,032 bytes
per super frame.
S uper Fram e (1,032 bytes
Header D ata Tim e S lot MAP Header D ata Tim e S lot MAP
(8 bytes ) (1,024 bytes ) (8 bytes ) (1,024 bytes )
Fig.143 - Super Frame Structure for Ethernet Packet Signal
11.2.5 VCAT & LCAS
Serial super frame constructed signal is fed to the 4-stage buffer memory (DR RAM) and link capacity ad-
justment scheme (LCAS) for the virtual concatenated (VCAT) signal is functioned. LCAS is a method to dy-
namically increase or decrease the bandwidth of virtual concatenated containers specified in ITU-T G.7042.
Virtual concatenation (VCAT) is an inverse multiplexing technique creating a large capacity payload con-
tainer distributed over multiple smaller capacity TDM signals. These signals may be transported or routed
independently.
MN.00278.E - 005 255

11.2.6 IF-Frame
GESW card generates information frame structure having 466.56 Mbits/s LVDS 8b10b code interface for
each radio working channel. Fig.144 and Fig.145 show the relationship between radio frame, LVDS frame
and information frame.
11.2.7 LVDS frame
Super frame of LVDS frame has seven (7) sub LVDS frames synchronized with seven (7) radio (sub) frames
having time interval of 140.625 micro sec for 30 MHz CS system and 109.357 micro sec for 40 MHz CS
system.
11.2.8 Information frame
Information frame length between TRMD and GESW is same as that of LVDS frame and maximum frame
length is 589 bytes for 30 MHz CS system and 593 bytes for 40 MHz CS system. GAP byte is used for syn-
chronization between radio frame and LVDS frame interval.
Information frame between TRMD and GESW has four (4) parts, K27.7 for IF-Frame start byte, header bit,
variable length data payload and K-29.7 byte for IF-Frame stop, maximum approximately 589 bytes for
30 MHz CS system or 593 bytes for 40 MHz CS system.
Gigabit Ethernet packet signal is stored in the data payload depending on QAM scheme together with dum-
my bytes. Maximum allowable bytes per data payload for pre-set QAM scheme is follows:
Pre-set QAM Setting 30 MHz CS system 40 MHz system
512QAM 3,992 bytes 4,152 bytes
QPSK 616 bytes 672 bytes
256 MN.00278.E - 005

Fig.144 - Relationship between Radio Frame, LVDS frame and information frame structure for
30 MHz CS system
MN.00278.E - 005 257

Fig.145 - Relationship between radio frame, LVDS frame and infomation frame structure for 40
MHz CS system
258 MN.00278.E - 005

8b10b encoding
The IBM patented encoding method used for encoding 8-bit data bytes to 10-bit Transmission Characters.
Data bytes are converted to Transmission Characters to improve the physical signal such that the following
benefits are achieved: bit synchronization is more easily achieved, design of receivers and transmitters is
simplified, error detection is improved, and control characters (i.e., the Special Character) can be distin-
guished from data characters. In addition to 8B/10B encoding, data may be encoded using 5B/6B, or 3B/
4B depending on the data width. This encoding is used by Fibre Channel, Gigabit Ethernet, 10 Gigabit
Ethernet, and ATM transmission interfaces.
11.2.9 Dynamic mapping (VCAT)
Fig.146 shows the image of dynamic mapping. One time slot MUX'ed signal is fed to 4-stage buffer memory
and byte distributed on one byte basis to the M+0 TRMD cards (M = maximum 8) in a sequential order.
Maximum allowable bytes per information frame interval depend on pre-set QAM scheme and dummy byte
is inserted in the vacant slot. In case of Fig.146, Working 4 RF channel is initially out of service and will be
in service in the future RF channel expansion.
Interface condition between GESW and TRMD is one stream of 466.560 Mbits/s LVDS 8b10b coded signal
for all RF channels when Native IP interface.
Tim e s lot MUX'ed s ignal before Mapping
D0 D1 D2 D3 D19
D ynam ic Mapping by VC AT
0 to 589/593* by tes x E ffec tive R F C H s 593* is for 40 M H z C S
B as ic ally equievalent to one R adio F ram e interval
46.656 M by tes per S y m bol
W1
FP D0 D3 D5 D7 D9 D10 D11 - - - FP D12 - - - -
DP
RAM 256Q A M 256Q A M to 4Q A M
W2
FP D1 D4 D6 D8 - - - - - - FP D13 D16 D18 D19 -
In c as e of 4+
Dis tribution/A ggregation 64Q A M S till 64Q A M
on one by te bas is
V CA T
W3
FP D2 - - - - - - - - - FP D14 D17 - - -
4Q A M 4Q A M to 8Q A M
W4
FP - - - - - - - - - - FP D15 - - - -
OOS 4Q A M by R F ex pans ion
F R adio S ub F ram e F R adio S ub F ram e F R adio S ub F ram e
30/40 M H z C S R adio F ram e
Fig.146 - Image of Dynamic Mapping (VCAT) inside GESW
MN.00278.E - 005 259

11.3 RADIO FRAME STRUCTURE
11.3.1 Overview
Fig.147 shows the image of Radio Frame structure. Radio multi-frame consists of four (4) sub frames. Na-
tive IP packet bit, QAM management bit for adaptive modulation and radio complementary overhead (RF-
COH) bit are inserted /separated to/from payload of each radio sub frame.
RFCOH includes radio service channel (RSC), data communication channel (DCC), orderwire (OW), radio
user channel (RUC), ATPC, route identification, LDPC, housekeeping, additional bits for justification/dejus-
tification and so on.
Symbol rate of each sub radio frame is 24.192 Mbit/s for 30 MHz CS system and 34.064 Mbit/s for 40 MHz
CS system. And N value depends on pre-set QAM schem.
Fig.147 - Image of Radio Frame Structure inside TRMD
11.4 NATIVE IP ON RADIO
Fig.148 shows the functional block diagram regarding radio frame structure between GESW and TRMD.
One 466.56 Mbits/s LVDS 8b10b coded signal is fed to speed converter (SPD CONV) and converted to 10
x 24.192 Mbits/s streams for 30 MHz CS system or 10 x 34.064 Mbits/s streams for 40 MHz CS system
depending on selected RF band.
Also QAM management bits are separated in the TRMD transmit side and controls transmit digital process-
ing circuits and modulator circuit in accordance with pre-set QAM scheme.
260 MN.00278.E - 005

10 x 24.192 Mbit/s or 10 x 34.064 Mbits/s streams including Ethernet packet, QAM management and dum-
my bits are input to Coder (CODER) and output to N x 24.192 Mbits/s streams for 30 MHz CS system or N
x 34.064 Mbits/s steams for 40 MHz CS system depending on pre-set QAM scheme. Fig.149, Fig.150,
Fig.151, Fig.152, Fig.153, Fig.154, Fig.155, Fig.156, Fig.157, Fig.158, Fig.159, Fig.160, Fig.161, Fig.162,
Fig.163, Fig.164 and show the radio frame structure both CODER input and CODER output.
Fig.148 - Functional block diagram of Native IP on Radio in case of TRMD v2 & GESW v2
MN.00278.E - 005 261

262
B it C ons truc tion for C O D IN
Radio Frame Structure for QPSK, 30 MHz CS System S ignal B its /S F Des c ription S ignal B its /S F Des c ription
I 616 Inform ation bit SM 3 F lag bit for m ulti-fram e
C O D IN M ulti-F ram e (1,944 bits ) DM 3,848 Dam m y bit P 2 P arity bit for error detec tion
A UX 63 A ux iliary bit (W S & R S C ) C 17 B it adjus tm ent bit
ID 1 Identific ation bit FEC 249 F E C c hec k ing bit
S ub F ram e 1 S ub F ram e 2 S ub F ram e 3 S ub F ram e 4 TP 2 A TP C c ontrol bit F 30 F ram e s y nc hroniz ation bit
1 0 b its
QAM 14 Q A M m anagem ent bit EM 15 E m pty bit
3 bits 483 bits
F F F DM FE C ,P & E M D9
F F F DM FE C ,TP & E M D7
F F F DM FE C ,ID & E M D5
F F F DM FE C ,C 0 & E M D4
1 0 b its
F F F DM FE C & E M D3
F F F AU X Q AM C I DM FE C & E M D1
F F F AU X C I DM FE C & E M D0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
B it C ons truc tion for C O D O UT
S ignal B its /S F Des c ription S ignal B its /S F Des c ription
CO D O UT M ulti-F ram e (1,944 bits ) I 616 Inform ation bit SM 3 F lag bit for m ulti-fram e
A UX 63 A ux iliary bit (W S & R S C ) P 2 P arity bit for error detec tion
ID 1 Identific ation bit C 16 B it adjus tm ent bit
S ub F ram e 1 S ub F ram e 2 S ub F ram e 3 S ub F ram e 4 TP 2 A TP C c ontrol bit FEC 249 F E C c hec k ing bit
2 b its
QAM 14 Q A M m anagem ent bit F 6 F ram e s y nc hroniz ation bit
3 bits 483 bits
F F F AU X& ID Q C I FE C D1
F F F AU X Q C ,P ,T I FE C D0
2 b its
Fig.149 - Radio frame construction for QPSK, 30 MHz CS system

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
MN.00278.E - 005
MN.00278.E - 005
Radio Frame Structure for 8QAM, 30 MHz CS System S ignal B its /S F Des c ription S ignal B its /S F Des c ription
ID 1,096 Inform ation bit SM 3 F lag bit for m ulti-fram e
1 0 b its
3 bits 483 bits
1 0 b its
F F F I FE C & E M D2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
B it C ons truc tion for C O D O U T
CO D O UT M ulti-F ram e (1,944 bits ) I 1,096 Inform ation bit SM 3 F lag bit for m ulti-fram e
3 b its
DM 2 Dum m y bit
3 bits 483 bits
F F F I C D2
3 b its
F F F AU X Q C,P,T I FE C D0
Fig.150 - Radio frame construction for 8QAM, 30 MHz CS system

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
263
264
I 1,576 Inform ation bit SM 3 F lag bit for m ulti-fram e
CO D IN M ulti-F ram e (1,944 bits ) DM 2,888 Dam m y bit P 2 P arity bit for error detec tion
10 bits
3 bits 483 bits
10 bits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
4 b its
DM 5 Dum m y bit
3 bits 483 bits
F F F I DM D3
F F F I C D2
4 bits

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
MN.00278.E - 005
MN.00278.E - 005
10 bits
3 bits 483 bits
F F F I FE C ,C 0 & E M D4
10 bits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
5 b its
3 bits 483 bits
F F F I D4
F F F I D3
F F F I C D2
5 bits

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
265
266
10 bits
3 bits 483 bits
F F F I FE C ,ID & E M D5
10 bits
F F F AU X C I FE C & E M D0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
CO D O U T M ulti-F ram e (1,944 bits ) I 2,544 Inform ation bit SM 3 F lag bit for m ulti-fram e
6 b its
DM 3 Dum m y bit
3 bits 483 bits
F F F I DM D5
F F F I D4
F F F I D3
F F F I C D2
6 bits

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
MN.00278.E - 005
MN.00278.E - 005
Radio Frame Structure for 128QAM, 30 MHz CS System
10 bits
3 bits 483 bits
F F F I FE C ,TP & E M D6
10 bits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
7 b its
DM 6 Dum m y bit
3 bits 483 bits
F F F I DM D6
F F F I DM D5
F F F I D4
F F F I D3
7 bits
F F F I C D2
AU X C,P,T I FE C

F F F Q D0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
267
268
C O D IN M ulti-F ram e (1,944 bits ) DM 952 Dam m y bit P 2 P arity bit for error detec tion
10 bits
3 bits 483 bits
10 bits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
8 b its
3 bits 483 bits
F F F I C D7
F F F I DM D6
F F F I DM D5
F F F I D4
F F F I D3
8 bits
F F F I C D2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
MN.00278.E - 005
MN.00278.E - 005
C O D IN M ulti-F ram e (1,944 bits ) DM 472 Dam m y bit P 2 P arity bit for error detec tion
10 bits
3 bits 483 bits
F F F I FE C ,P & E M D8
10 bits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
9 b its
3 bits 483 bits
F F F I C
F F F I C D7
F F F I DM D6
F F F I DM D5
F F F I D4
9 bits
F F F I D3
F F F I C D2
F F F AU X& ID Q C I FE C

D1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
269
270
Radio Frame Structure for QPSK, 40 MHz CS System S ignal B its /S F Des c ription S ignal B its /S F Des c ription
I 672 Inform ation bit SM 3 F lag bit for m ulti-fram e
10 bits
3 bits 498 bits
F F F DM FE C & P EM D9
F F F DM FE C & TP EM D7
F F F DM FE C & ID EM D5
F F F DM FE C EM D4
10 bits
F F F DM FE C EM D3
F F F DM FE C EM D2
F F F AU X Q ,C I DM FE C EM D1
F F F AU X I DM FE C EM D0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
CO D O U T M ulti-F ram e (2,004 bits ) I 672 Inform ation bit SM 3 F lag bit for m ulti-fram e
2 bits
DM 6 Dum m y b
3 bits 498 bits
F F F AU X Q,C I FEC D1
F F F AU X Q ,TP ,P I FEC D0
2 b its
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
Fig.157 - Radio frame construction for QPSK, 40 MHz CS system
MN.00278.E - 005
MN.00278.E - 005
10 bits
3 bits 498 bits
F F F DM FE C EM D4
10 bits
F F F DM FE C EM D3
F F F I FE C EM D2
F F F AU X Q ,TP ,P I DM FE C EM D0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
3 bits
3 bits 498 bits
F F F I D2
F F F AU X Q ,C I FEC D1
3 bits

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
271
272
10 bits
3 bits 498 bits
F F F DM FE C EM D4
10 bits
F F F I FE C EM D3
F F F I FE C EM D2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
4 bits
DM 2 Dum m y b
3 bits 498 bits
F F F I D3
F F F I D2
4 bits

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
MN.00278.E - 005
MN.00278.E - 005
10 bits
3 bits 498 bits
F F F I FE C EM D4
10 bits
F F F I FE C EM D3
F F F I FE C EM D2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
C O D O UT M ulti-F ram e (2,004 bits ) I 2,168 Inform ation bit SM 3 F lag bit for m ulti-fram e
5 bits
DM 4 Dum m y b
3 bits 498 bits
F F F I D4
F F F I D3
F F F I D2
5 bits

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
273
274
10 bits
3 bits 498 bits
F F F I FE C & ID EM D5
F F F I FE C EM D4
10 bits
F F F I FE C EM D3
F F F I FE C EM D2
F F F AU X Q ,C I FE C EM D1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
6 bits
DM 6 Dum m y b
3 bits 498 bits
F F F I D5
F F F I D4
F F F I D3
F F F I D2
6 bits

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
MN.00278.E - 005
MN.00278.E - 005
10 bits
3 bits 498 bits
F F F I DM FE C & P EM D9
F F F I FE C & TP EM D6
F F F I FE C EM D4
10 bits
F F F I FE C EM D3
F F F I FE C EM D2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
C O D O UT M ulti-F ram e (2,004 bits ) I 3,168 Inform ation bit SM 3 F lag bit for m ulti-fram e
7 bits
3 bits 498 bits
F F F I D6
F F F I D5
F F F I D4
F F F I D3
7 bit
F F F I D2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
275
276
10 bits
3 bits 498 bits
F F F I FE C EM D4
10 bits
F F F I FE C EM D3
F F F I FE C EM D2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
8 bits
DM 6 B dum m y bit
3 bits 498 bits
F F F I D7
F F F I D6
F F F I D5
F F F I D4
8 bit
F F F I D3
F F F I D2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
MN.00278.E - 005
MN.00278.E - 005
CO D IN M ulti-F ram e (2,004 bits ) DM 344 Dam m y bit P 2 P arity bit for error detec tion
10 bits
3 bits 498 bits
F F F I FE C & P EM D8
F F F I FE C EM D4
10 bits
F F F I FE C EM D3
F F F I FE C EM D2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
9 bits
3 bits 498 bits
F F F I D8
F F F I D7
F F F I D6
F F F I D5
F F F I D4
9 bits
F F F I D3
F F F I D2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
277
12 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ON ADAPTIVE MODU-
LATION
12.1 QAM MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW
12.1.1 General
Fig.165 shows the schematic block diagram of Adaptive Modulation algorithm when set SDH/Ether to Ether
and set Mode to Adaptive.
Three QAM management information are applied for adaptive modulation depending on propagation con-
dition as follows:
• Requested QAM (RQAM) from GESW card

• Maximum Possible QAM (PQAM) at far-end DEM block
• Transmit QAM (TQAM) selected lower or higher QAM information from RQAM and PQAM at MOD
block depending on propagation condition
Fig.165 - Schematic Function of Adaptive Modulation Algorithm
12.1.2 RQAM
Requested QAM (RQAM) both MAX QAM and MIN QAM for each RF channel independently is set on WebLT.
Initially all of MOD block circuits (COD and MOD) are controlled by RQAM information and RQAM'ed signal
is transmitted to demodulator (DEM) block of TRMD at far-end station.
In DEM block (DEC and DEM) at far-end station, RQAM information is separated and controls all of DEM
block circuits (DEM and DEC) to RQAM order.
278 MN.00278.E - 005

12.1.3 PQAM
In DEM block at far-end station, maximum possible QAM is simultaneously detected by using eye pattern
signal-to-noise ratio (EYE SNR) at sampling instant. This monitoring information is transferred to DEC cir-
cuit of MOD block at far-end station and transferred to near-end station and separated at DEC of DEM
block.
Each operational QAM information has two EYE SNR threshold levels, one is QAM-order decrease threshold
and the other is QAM-order increase threshold depending on propagation condition.
In the normal propagation condition, RQAM and PQAM information are equal. When EYE SNR value of rel-
evant operational QAM is exceeded EYE SNR threshold on fade (QAM-increase or QAM-decrease threshold).
In this case RQAM and PQAM order becomes different.
12.1.4 TQAM
In MOD block, there is a transmit QAM decision circuit (MOD QAM DEC). MOD QAM DEC always compares
RQAM and PQAM order and when differs, original RQAM will be changed to new RQAM as TQAM order.
12.2 QAM CONTROL LOOP
12.2.1 Signal Loop
Schematic QAM control loop per hop is shown in Fig.166. When set SDH/Ether to Ether and set Mode to
Adaptive, combined Native IP packet and QAM management information from GESW card is transferred to
TRMD card. In this section QAM control loop from near-end station A to far-end station B direction is ex-
plained.
Initial RQAM (MAX value) information is set on WebLT and transferred to TRMD in near-end station A to-
gether with native IP packet signal. And also MOD QAM is set by TQAM (RQAM=TQAM initially) through
MOD QAM decision circuit (MOD QAM DEC).
At far-end station B, Received TQAM (R-TQAM) signal is separated from RFCOH separation circuit (RFCOH
SEP) and DEM QAM is controlled by R-TQAM though R-TQAM protection process D.
In DEM, maximum possible QAM (PQAM) is determined using eye pattern signal-to-noise ratio (EYE SNR).
When EYE SNR is exceeded to the QAM-decrease or QAM-increase threshold level, Transmit PQAM (T-
PQAM) signal is activated in PQAM detection circuit (PQAM DET) and is transferred to near-end station A
through RFCOH INS.
At near-end station A, T-PQAM signal is separated from RFCOH SEP as R-PQAM through protection process
M and MOD is controlled by new transmit QAM (T-QAM). PQAM and TQAM information are double protected
by Humming code and FEC apart from LDPC type. Typical Humming coding is shown in Tab.102.
MN.00278.E - 005 279

Tab.102 - One Example of Humming Coding
Information bit
Check Bit
(PQAM, TQAM)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 1 0 0 1
1 1 0 0 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 0 1 1
1 0 0 1 1 1 0
1 0 0 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 0 1 0
0 1 1 0 0 0 1
0 1 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 1 1 1
0 0 1 1 1 0 1
0 0 1 0 1 1 0
0 0 0 1 0 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
280 MN.00278.E - 005

Fig.166 - QAM Control Algorithm per Hop
MN.00278.E - 005 281

12.3 INITIATOR OF MODULATION ORDER CHANGE
Initiator of modulation order change is eye pattern Signal-to-Noise ratio at sampling instant as shown in
Fig.167 and Tab.103.
Fig.167 - Relationship between EYE SNR and Hop CNR
282 MN.00278.E - 005

Tab.103 - QAM Change Table (Preliminary)
EYE SN Threshold-1 EYE SN Threshold-2 (QAM-

Operational QAM
(QAM-Decrease) Increase)
512QAM 337 -
256QAM 690 163
128QAM 1,359 337
64QAM 2,814 690
32QAM 5,703 1,359
16QAM 10,069 2,814
8QAM 26,037 5,703
QPSK - 10,069
In case of moderate propagation condition, one example of MOD QAM change is as follows:
• 128QAM is in operation
• EYE SNR is exceeded to threshold of 1,359.

• QAM order will be changed to 64QAM
• EYE SNR is exceeded to threshold of 2,814.
• QAM order will be changed to 32QAM.

• EYE SNR is restored to threshold of 1,359.
• QAM order will be changed to 64QAM
In case of more severely propagation condition inducing loss of frame, MOD QAM order change will be di-
rectly to QPSK independently of present MOD QAM.
12.4 QAM ORDER CHANGE TIMING
Operational MOD QAM order will change to TQAM order after 2 x radio multi-frame time intervals as shown
in Fig.167. Forward protection time is minimum 1 x radio multi-frame time including protection time of 4
x FEC frame.
TQAM 256 256 256 256 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 64 64 64 64 256 256 256 256
2 x Mu lti-Fra m e
2 x Mu lti-Fra m e 2 x Mu lti-Fra m e
QAM 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 256 256 256 256 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128
Fig.168 - QAM Order Change Timing after TQAM Activation
In case that propagation condition is not moderate and sharply degraded including loss of frame or BER
alarm, MOD QAM operation is shown in Tab.104 and Tab.105.
MN.00278.E - 005 283

Tab.104 - QAM Change Operation when DEM is Loss of Synchronization
Operation Mode PQAM Transfer Path PQAM MOD DEM
QPSK or Selected QAM by Provisional setting a

Fixed QAM Yes
Default = QPSK)
(AM Disable)
No Selected QAM by provisioning setting
Adaptive QAM
Only Yes QPSK
(AM Enable)
a. Commonly same setting per hop TRMD MOD/DEM
Tab.105 - QAM Change Operation when re-synchronized
Operation Mode Re-sync Mode PQAM MOD QAM DEM QAM
Fixed QAM Disable - - -
Immediately to
Depends on Depends on
(AM Disable) Enable selected QAM
R-PQAM R-TQAM
by provisioning
Immediately to
Adaptive QAM Depends on Depends on
Only Enable QAM according to
(AM Enable) R-PQAM R-TQAM
EYE SNR a
a. When EYE SNR is lower than MIN QAM order, PQAM is MIN QAM order.
For example:
• Operation range (MIN & MAX QAM): 32QAM to 128QAM

• Re-sync EYE SNR value:
- < EYE SNR of 32QAM: PQAM to 32QAM
- > EYE SNR of 32QAM: PQAM to QAM according to EYE SNR value
12.5 QAM ORDER CHANGE FLOW
There are two (2) types of QAM order change, one is for moderate propagation condition without loss of
frame or BER alarm and the other is for loss of frame or BER alarm condition.
Fig.169 shows the QAM order change flow of moderate propagation condition. In this case QAM change is
continuous from higher QAM to lower QAM or lower QAM to higher QAM.
284 MN.00278.E - 005

Transmit Station (MOD) Receive Station (DEM)
E Y E S N C alc ulation
R-PQAM Judgement
PQAM = QAM (n)
R eport P Q A M
to far-end s tation
P Q A M ? R -P Q A M
R -P Q A M detec tion
M a tch a ll with in N
R -P Q A M delete
m u lti-fra m e
Y
R -PQ AM = Q AM (n )
k = 0
k = k + 1
Is Q AM (n-k)
e ffe ctive ? N on-effec tive
E ffec tive
Q AM ch a n g e
te m p o ra ry d e cisio n
T Q AM =Q AM (n-k)
Q A M (n-k ) < = N
RQ A M ?
Q AM C h a n g e R e p o rt Q AM C h a n g e R e p o rt
T Q AM = Q AM (n-k) T Q AM = R Q AM
R -TQ A M ? TQ A M
Q A M c hange info
detec tion (R
-TQ A M )
Match all within N

R -TQ A M delete 2 m ulti-fram e w aiting
multi -frame
1 m ulti
-fram e w aiting
R Q A M C hange R eport to G E S W TQ A M C hange R eport to G E S W

DE M Q A M = R -TQ A M M O D Q A M = TQ A M
Fig.169 - QAM Order Change Flow Chart in the moderate propagation condition
Fig.170 shows the DEM QAM & PQAM order change in case that DEM at far-end station is loss of frame and
fixed modulation is applied.
MN.00278.E - 005 285

DEM QAM PQAM
D EM O u t o f Syn c
*2
N T-PQAM_1
Usable?
T-PQAM_1
Usable?
*1 *1
N on-effec tive C h a n g e d to re - C h a n g e d to re -
syn ch ro n ize d Q AM syn ch ro n ize d Q AM
M O D: Q A M order is not c hanged

DE M : Q A M order is not c hanged
P Q A M : N ot c hanged Re -synchronization of DEM
O rd in a ry o p e ra tio n PQ AM is ch a n g e d to
b y d e te cte d R -T Q AM o p e ra tio n a l Q AM
R e p o rt PQ AM to th e
fa r-e n d sta tio n
N ote-*1: E x pec ted res y nc hroniz ed Q A M is Q P S K

N ote-*2: T-P Q A M _0 m eans T-P Q A M that is ins erted to the TX radio fram e and
T-P Q A M _1 m eans T-P Q A M w hic h is trans ferred to far-end s tation via. G E S W c ard
Fig.170 - DEM_QAM&PQAM Change Flow when loss of frame and fixed modulation
Fig.171 shows the DEM_QAM & PQAM change in case that DEM at far-end station is loss of frame and adap-
tive modulation is applied.
286 MN.00278.E - 005

DEM QAM PQAM
*1 *1
C h a n g e d to re- C h a n g e d to re-
syn ch ro n ize d Q AM syn ch ro n ize d Q AM
Re -synchronization of DEM
O rd in a ry o p e ra tio n EYE SNR

b y d e te cte d R-T Q AM C a lcu la tio n
*1
E Y E S NR > = N
pos s ible S N R
N ote-*1: E x pec ted res y nc hroniz ed Q A M is Q P S K

N ote-*2: Q A M _L: Low er Q A M w ithin A paptive m odulation Y
Q A M _H : H igher Q A M w ithin adaptive m odulation PQ AM Ju d g e m e n t PQ AM to lo we r lim it
PQ AM = Q AM (N) PQ AM = Q AM _ L
Report PQAM to far -end station
Fig.171 - DEM_QAM & PQAM Change Flow when loss of frame and adaptive modulation
Fig.172 shows the MOD_QAM change in case that DEM at far-end station is loss of frame.
MN.00278.E - 005 287

MOD QAM
*1
*2
R -P Q A M _1 N Q AM re m a in s
us able? u n ch a n g e d
A daptive N
M odulation
Y
*3 Re-s y nc E ffec tive
s ignal binding
Se le ct R -PQ AM _ 1
N on-effec tive
*4 *4
O p e ra tio n a l Q AM Q AM re m a in s Se le ct o p e ra tio n a l
d e p e n d o n R -PQ AM u n ch a n g e d Q AM b a se d o n
R -PQ AM _ 1
D EM syn ch ro n iza tio n

co m fe rm e d D EM syn ch ro n iza tio n
co n firm e d
*2
Se le ct R -PQ AM _ 0
Se le ct o p e ra tio n a l
Q AM b a se d o n
R -PQ AM _ 0
Se le ct o p e ra tio n a l
Q AM b a se d o n
R -PQ AM _ 0
Fig.172 - MOD_QAM Change Flow when loss of frame
288 MN.00278.E - 005

13 RADIO PROTECTION SWITCHING (RPS)
13.1 RADIO PROTECTION SWITCHING FOR N+1 OR N+1&M+1
13.1.1 Radio Switching Capacity
Protection ratio per rack
Radio switching capacity for terminal and double terminal is In accordance with Tab.106 and Tab.107.
Tab.106 - Radio Switching Capacity for Terminal
GP1-RPS GP2-RPS
Switching
Remarks
RPS system RPS function RPS system RPS function Capacity
n+0 Disable - - Max. n=16
N+1 Enable - - Max. N=15

Combined
n+0 Disable m+0 Disable Max. n+M=16 ACCP/ACAP/
CCDP for Single/
N+1 Enable m+0 Disable Max. N+m=15 Dual RF availa-
ble
Tab.107 - Radio Switching Capacity for Double Terminal
GP1-RPS for Eastern route GP1-RPS for Western route

Switching Capa-
Remarks
city

Combined
N+1 Enable m+0 Disable Max. N+m=15 ACCP/ACAP/
CCDP for Single/
n+0 Disable M+1 Enable Max. n+M=15 Dual RF availa-
ble
MN.00278.E - 005 289

13.1.2 Switching Function
• Uni-polar stage, IC switch (SW)
• Uni-Directional switching (USW) for propagation fade
• Bi-Directional switching (BSW) for equipment failure

19
• Hitless (Error less) switching for USW
• Hit switching for BSW
13.1.3 Switching Section
Switching per hop.
13.1.4 Switching Configuration
Fig.173, Fig.174, Fig.175, Fig.176 and Fig.177 show the schematic block diagram of radio protection
switching (RPS) for all system configuration.
Fig.173 -Typical RPS System for N+1 ACCP/ACAP/CCDP Operation

(In case of Single RF Band for GP1-RPS)
19 Definition of Hitless switching in accordance with ITU-R F.750-3 below:

“Switch event between a working and a protection channel which does not add any errors to those already
produced by the propagation medium during the switching procedure."
290 MN.00278.E - 005

Fig.174 - Typical RPS System for N+1 or N+0 ACCP/ACAP/CCDP Operation
(In case of Dual RF Band for GP1-RPS)
MN.00278.E - 005 291

Fig.175 - Typical RPS System for 2x(N+1) or 2x(N+0) Operation
(In case of Single RF Band for GP1/2-RPS)
292 MN.00278.E - 005

Fig.176 - Typical RPS System for N+1/N+0 & M+1/M+0 Operation
(In case of Dual RF Band for GP1/2-RPS)
MN.00278.E - 005 293

Fig.177 - Typical RPS System for N+1 Double Terminal Operation
(In case of Single/Dual RF Band for GP1-RPS)
294 MN.00278.E - 005

13.1.5 Switching
Function
• Automatic switching function
• Manual switching function
• FORCE switching function
• LOCK OUT function
• Occasional traffic switching function on PRT channel (Low priority)
• Wait-To-Restore (WTR)
• Radio Protection Switching Function Enable/Disable
Initiation for USW switching
• U-FLOSS:
- OR of Out-Of-Frame and MIS-RID from TRMD
- Out-Of-Frame from BB INTF
• U-BER ALM
- BER alarm before / after LDPC FEC (BER ALM1/2)
Initiation for BSW switching
• BER ALM
- CARD-FAIL
Unit Failure from TRMD and Loss of Input from BB INTF
- CARD-OUT
Removal of TRMD and PS Failure
Priority
• Lock-out switchover
• Forced switchover
• Automatic switchover
• Manual switchover
• Occasional traffic switchover on PRT channel
MN.00278.E - 005 295

13.1.6 Automatic Switching Priority
Hi BSW switching by Priority CH

l
l BSW switching by Preceding CH
l
BSW switching by Following CH
l
l U-FLOSS switching by Priority CH
l
l U-FLOSS switching by Preceding CH
l
l U-FLOSS switching by Following CH
l
l U-BER ALM switching by Priority CH
l
V U-BER ALM switching by Preceding CH
Lo U-BER ALM switching by Following CH
13.1.7 Automatic DADE - Manual DADE - Control Signal
• +/- 200 nsec between Protection channel and any of working channels
• 0 to 1,550 nsec between Protection channel and any of Working channels

• Communication between terminals using RFCOH transmission line.
• Redundant transmission both protection and main 1 RF channel
13.1.8 Switching Completion Time
Errorless switch
• Without extra traffic: Less than 5 ms excluding BER ALM detection time and propagation time.
• With extra traffic: Less than 9.5 ms excluding BER ALM detection time and propagation time.
Warning: Switching time is defined as total average time during protection switching.
13.1.9 Switching Initiator
Signal fail
Loss of radio frame
296 MN.00278.E - 005

Signal degrade
BER ALM1 before LDPC FEC
Setting No. BER threshold
1 Higher than 1x10(-3) default value
2 Higher than 5x10(-4)
13.1.10 WTR function
WTR (Wait-To-Restorer) time
The WTR time is between 0 and 20 minutes (in minutes)

The WTR time setting applies to USW.
However, in the case that any other RF channel fails during the wait-to-restore interval, wait-to-restore
operation is reset automatically.
13.2 RADIO PROTECTION SWITCHING FOR GE LINK AGGREGATION
13.2.1 Radio Switching
Protection ratio per rack
• m+0 GE Link aggregation in the absence of N+1 RPS operation. In this case, m = maximum 8.
• In the m+0 GE Link Aggregation, GE SW card has the switching control function of switch-off and
switch-back from m working channels independently from N+1 RPS. When any of working channel
quality degrades below the threshold level, GE SW card switch off the degraded working channel
and after switch back again when the quality becomes normal.
• Maximum number of working channels is determined by radio frequency band utilized, however
maximum capacity of GE Link Aggregation is m=8.
MN.00278.E - 005 297

13.2.2 m+0 Switching Stage
Uni-polar
Bi-directional switching
IC switch
13.2.3 Switching
Switch-off and switch-back from/to m+0 streams.
Switching control is activated by GE SW card apart from SV unit.
Fig.178, Fig.179 and Fig.180 show schematic block diagram of GE Link Aggregation.
13.2.4 Circuit Switching
Type
Switching per hop
13.2.5 Switch Initiation
• Loss of Signal (LOS)

• Loss of frame (LOF)
• Signal degrade (ERR)
LOS
LOS alarm is initiated after losing signal and recovered after establishing normal signal state.
LOF
LOF alarm is initiated after losing frame synchronization and recovered after establishing synchronization.
ERR
ERR alarm is initiated after detecting BER of packet data below the threshold and restored when RSL be-
comes normal.
298 MN.00278.E - 005

OC C B B IN TF TR M D BR U BR U TR M D B B IN TF OC C
S TM1 E le c (S W ) (S W ) S TM1 E le c
W1 B B IN TF TR M D TR M D B B IN TF W1
S TM! E le c (S W ) (S W ) S TM1 E le c
3+ 1 S TM-1protec ted
W2 B B IN TF TR M D TR M D B B IN TF W2 w ith O C C
S TM1 O p t (S W ) (S W ) S TM1 O p t
GE TR M D TR M D GE
GE SW G E A DP T G E A DP T GE SW
TR M D TR M D
W5 G E A DP T G E A DP T W5
4+ 0 GE Multi-Link
TR M D TR M D
W6 G E AD P T G E AD P T W6
TR M D TR M D
Mixture of C onventional and Multi-Link operation

SV SV
Fig.178 - Hybrid Operation of N+1 SDH with OCC and m+0 GE Multi-Link
(In case of 3+1 SDH and 4+0 GE Multi-Link)
OC C SPC TR M D BR U BR U TR M D SPC OC C
GESW (S W ) (S W ) GESW
S TM! E le c (S W ) (S W ) S TM1 E le c
3+ 1 S TM-1protec ted
W2 B B IN TF TR M D TR M D B B IN TF W2 w ithout O C C
S TM1 O p t (S W ) (S W ) S TM1 O p t
GE TR M D TR M D GE
GE SW G E A DP T G E A DP T GE SW
TR M D TR M D
W5 G E A DP T G E A DP T W5
5+ 0 GE Multi-Link
TR M D TR M D us ing P R T C H as O C C
TR M D TR M D
Mixture of C onventional and Multi-Link operation

SV SV
Fig.179 - Hybrid Operation of N+1 SDH and m+0 GE Multi-Link

(In case of 3+1 SDH without OCC and 5+0 GE Multi-Link)
MN.00278.E - 005 299

Fig.180 - Multi-Hop Configuration for GE Link Aggregation
300 MN.00278.E - 005

14 SYNCHRONOUS EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT
FUNCTION (SEMF)
14.1 GENERAL
TL radio has the monitoring and control functions using Data Communication Channel (DCC). DCC is trans-
ferred on section overhead byte of STM-1 frame structure for STM-1 interface and on radio frame comple-
mentary (RFCOH) byte for Native IP interface. For TL radio, Synchronous equipment management function
(SEMF) is made by Web-based local craft terminal (Web LT). Web LT is a local terminal that is the main
human machine interface for operation, maintenance, system setup and tune-up. The TL Web LT is de-
signed as an embedded web server using HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol) protocol and HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language) document format on an IP (Internet Protocol) network. An operator can manage
the TL NE by accessing with ordinary web browser client software. Tab.108 shows outline of TL Web LT
major function.
Tab.108 - TL Web LT Major Functions
Setting of system configurations, usage of SOH (Section Over-

Provisioning
head) facilities and optional functions, and NE parameters.
Display of alarms and conditions and Control of RPS (Radio Pro-

Condition & Control
tection Switching) and maintenance functions.
Performance Monitor Display of performance monitors and analog monitors.
History & File Stores History Log and download/Upload the files
14.2 WEB LT
To use the TL Web LT, the PC hardware and software should meet or exceed the requirements listed in
Tab.109.
Tab.109 - System Requirements
HTTP/1.0 or later
JavaScriptTM a
Cascade Style Sheet (CSS2)

Client Requirements
Least one working Ethernet port support-
ing 10/100Base-T
1024x768 or 1280x768 pixel Display rec-
ommended
Microsoft Windows 7, Internet Explorer b,
Recommended Browser
Version 8.0 or later
Recommended OS English version OS
a. JavaScript is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., and refers to Sun's Java program-
ming language.
b. Microsoft Internet Explorer is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United State
and/or other countries.
MN.00278.E - 005 301

14.3 CONNECTION
Connect your PC to a LAN port on SV card of the target NE (Network Element). Normally, crossover cable
should be used for the connection, if you want to connect the PC to the NE directly. The SV card supports
both 10Base-T and 100Base-T Ethernet connection. It is recommended to use CAT5 (Category 5) UTP (Un-
shielded Twisted Pair) crossover cable for the connection. There are two Ethernet ports on the SV card,
and they are connected to a HUB internally 20. Therefore, you can use whichever you like better. Fig.181
shows an example of the connection between the PC and the NE.
Warning: The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into objec-
tive-oriented messages for transmission over DCC
Web LT
Fig.181 - Connection between PC and NE by LAN Ports on SV unit
20 HUB is a simple repeater HUB, so that packet routing of any protocol layer is NOT supported by TL.
302 MN.00278.E - 005

14.4 NE
The term 'NE (Network Element)' means the communication equipment from the network administrator's
point of view. The definition of NE of TL is as follows:
• N+1 or N+0 Point-to-Point Terminal
- Terminal: 1 NE
- Repeater: 2 NE
- Back-to-Back Terminal 2 NE
• N+1 or N+0 & M+1 or M+0 Point-to-Point Terminal
- Terminal: 1 NE
- Repeater: 2 NE
- Back-to-Back Terminal 2 NE
• N+1 or N+0 & M+1 or M+0 Dual / Double Terminal
- Dual Terminal: 1 NE
- Double Terminal: 1 NE
• 1+1 Hot-Standby operation
- Terminal: 1 NE
• 2-Directional 1+1 Hot-Standby operation
- Dual Terminal: 1 NE
- Double Terminal: 1 NE
Fig.182, Fig.183, Fig.184, Fig.185 and Fig.186 show the management target range.
B B IN (P ) TR MD R F output (C H 1)
SV
B B IN (W 1) (R P S 1) TR MD R F output (C H 2)
B B IN (W 1) TR MD R F output (C H 3) N+1 or
n+0
B B IN (W 2) TR MD R F output (C H 4)
m+0
GP1-RPS
1 NE
N+1 Mixed ACCP/ACAP/CCDP Operation (Max. 16 systems)

Point-to-Point Terminal Appalication
Fig.182 - Management Target Range for N+1 Point-to-Point Terminal
MN.00278.E - 005 303

SV
N+1 or
B B IN (W 4) TR MD R F output (C H 5) n+0
B B IN (W #N ) TR MD R F output (C H #N )
GP1-RPS
B B IN (P ) TR MD R F output (C H 1x )
SV
B B IN (W 1) (R P S 2) TR MD R F output (C H 2x )
B B IN (W 2) TR MD R F output (C H 3x )
M+1 or
B B IN (W 4) TR MD R F output (C H 5x ) m+0
B B IN (W #M ) TR MD R F output (C H #M x )
GP2-RPS
1 NE
N+1 & M+1 Mixed ACCP/ACAP/CCDP Operation (Max. 16 systems)

Point-to-Point Terminal Application
Fig.183 - Management Target Range for N+1 & M+1 Point-to-Point Terminal
304 MN.00278.E - 005

SV
N+1 or
B B IN (W 4) TR MD R F output (C H 5) n+0
B B IN (W #N ) TR MD R F output (C H #N )
GP1-RPS (Eastern)
SV
M+1 or
B B IN (W 4) TR MD R F output (C H 5) m+0
B B IN (W #M ) TR MD R F output (C H #M )
GP2-RPS (Western)
1 NE
N+1 & M+1 mixed ACCP/ACAP/CCDP Operation (Max. 16 systems)

Dual or Double Terminal Application
Fig.184 -Management Target Range for N+1 & M+1 Dual/Double Terminal
MN.00278.E - 005 305

V
1V 2V 3V 4V 5V 6V 7V 8V
W /P
T R M D (W
B B IN P U T HYB SW R F o u tp u t
T R M D (P
T R M D (W
BB OUTPUT SW HYB R F in p u t
T R M D (P
SV RPS
1 NE
Fig.185 - Management Target Range for 1+1 Hot-Standby
1V 2V 3V 4V 5V 6V 7V 8V
V (H ) W /P
RPS1 (Eastern)
T R M D (W
T R M D (P
T R M D (W
T R M D (P
RPS1 (Eastern)
T R M D (W
T R M D (P
T R M D (W
T R M D (P
SV RPS2 (Western)
1 NE
1V 2V 3V 4V 5V 6V 7V 8V
V (H ) W /P
RPS2 (Western)
Fig.186 - Management Target Range for 2-Directional 1+1 Hot-Standby
306 MN.00278.E - 005

14.5 HOUSE KEEPING
TL has input and output ports for external equipment supervision and control as House keeping (H.K.) func-
tion.
• Number of H.K. inputs (External Alarm Input): 16 items standard
• Number of H.K. outputs (External Equipment Control): 8 items standard
Fig.187 - Block diagram of H.K. input

Interface specification of H.K. input
• Type: On-Off, using LED photo-coupler, Two wire
• Connector: D-SUB multi-pin Connector

• Source Voltage: -48 V DC (-36 to -72 VDC)
• Source Current: 4 to 12.5 mA
Fig.188 - Block diagram of H.K. output
MN.00278.E - 005 307

Interface specification of H.K. output
• Type: Relay contact closure, Latch type, 2W
• Connector: D-SUB multi-pin Connector

• Maximum Continuous Current (closed): Max. 100 mA
• Maximum Voltage between Lines: Max. DC: 110 V
14.6 RACK ALARM BUS (RAB)
RAB information is available as standard.
• Alarm Cut Off (ACO) input
• NE Alarm (NE ALM) output

Interface specification
• Connector: D-SUB 15-multi-pin Connector
14.7 RACK ALARM BUS (RAB)
RAB information is available when optional RAB module is installed on SV card..
• Audible Critical Alarm (AUD CR) output

• Visible Critical Alarm (VIS CR) output
• Audible Major Alarm (AUD MJ) output
• Visible Major Alarm (VIS MJ) output
• Audible Minor Alarm (AUD MN) output

• Visible Minor Alarm (VIS MN) output
• Audible Warning (AUD WR) output
• Visible Warning (VIS WR) output
• RAB Maintenance (RAB-MNT) output
Interface specification
• Connector: D-SUB 15-multi-pin Connector
308 MN.00278.E - 005

15 MAIN FUNCTION OF WEB LT (SNMP-SV FIRM-
WARE VERSION: V7.54)
15.1 MENU TREE FOR GESW V2
Fig.189, Fig.190 and Fig.191 show the menu tree of SNMP-SV firmware version V7.54 when GESW v2 card
is installed and set to GESW v2 in the GESW Setting menu.
MN.00278.E - 005 309

Menu Tree when GESW v2 is set in the GESW setting menu.
Menu
C ondition D is play
ALL
TR MD
B B INTF S lot C onfig
COM R F C onfig
IF R es pons e Modulation C onfig
C ontrol RPS C H C onfig
Loopbac k S ervic e S tate
RCI TX S etting
HK D elay E qualiz er S elec t
S et D ate RSPI
R evis e D ate R UC
R es tart S V R P S (GP )
RPI RSC
D AD E Adjus t WS
AD J E quipm ent Trac e (S D H J0 byte)
ALS Trac e (D ata)
O rder W ire B as eband Interfac e
ALS S etting
GE GE S W S etting
P rovis ioning GE C om pos ition S etting
GE R adio P ort S etting
䠝䠞
Fig.189 - Menu Tree for GESW v2
310 MN.00278.E - 005

䠝䠞
P erform anc e D ata GP < 1/2> -P GE S W -1 (*1)
D ata GP < 1/2> -W n GE S W -2 (*1)
Thres hold NA D C C /O W C H S etting
Thres hold 15m in O rder W ire
Thres hold 1day P hys ic al Inventory NE
Analog Monitor P hys ic al Inventory Unit
Initial R egis teor Netw ork S etting (IP )
His tory & File His tory C ondition Netw ork S etting (O thers )
H is tory C ontrol& P rovis ionin Login S etting
D ow nload C ondition HK D es c ription
Dow nload C ontrol& P rovis ion R F D es c ription
D ow nload P erform anc e C H D eas c ription
D ow nload D atabas e AC T/D AC T
Dow nload P hy s ic al Inventor Analog Monitor Adjus t
D ow nload S everity Lis t LE D Mode
Upload S V/FIR M S TP C onfig
Upload FP GA/FIR M S TP S tatus
Upload D atabas e
Upload Lis enc e K ey
Upload S everity Lis t
N ote-*1: S k ip to P roc edure C .
Fig.190 - Menu Tree for GESW v2 (Cont'd)
MN.00278.E - 005 311

C
GE S W -< 1/2> C onfiguration P orts
Aggregation S tatic
LAC P
S panning Tree B ridge S ettings
C IS T P orts
IP MC IGMP S nooping B as ic C onfiguration
S ync E VLAN C onfiguration
MAC Table P ort Group Filtering
VLANs VLAN Mem bers hip
P orts
Q oS P ort C las s ific ation
Mirroring P ort P olic ing
P TP P ort S c heduler
P ort S haping
Q oS C ontrol Lis t
S torm C ontrol
Monitor P orts S tate
Traffic O verview
Q oS S tatis tic s
Q C L S tatus
D etailed S tatis tic s
LAC P S ys tem S tatus
P ort S tatus
P ort S tatis tic s
S panning Tree B ridge S tatus
P ort S tatus
P ort S tatis tic s
IP MC IGMP S nooping S tatus
P TP Groups Inform ation
MAC Table IP v4 S FM Inform ation
VLANs VLAN Mem bers hip
D iagonos tic s P ing VLAN P ort
Maintenanc e R es tart D evic es
Fac tory D efaults
S oftw are Upload
Im age S elec t
C onfiguration S ave
Upload
312 MN.00278.E - 005

15.2 MENU TREE DESCRIPTION
Tab.110 shows the menu description of SNMP-SV firmware version V7.54 when GESW v2 card is installed
and set to GESW v2 in the GESW Setting menu.
Tab.110 - Menu Description when GESW v2 installed
Menu Description
Condition
Display Display current unit allocation and RF channel allocation
ALL Display current (occurring) condition on NE
TRMD Display current (occurring) condition on TRMD(s)
BB INTF Display current (occurring) condition on BB INTF(s)
COM Display current (occurring) condition on SV and auxiliary unit
IF Response Display current amplitude/delay response of IF-IF transmission line
Control
RPS Control RPS (AID/Direction/Action)
BB INTF Control BB INTF (AID/Action)
Loopback Control Loopback (AID/Action/Direction)
RCI Control RCI (Remote Card Identifier)
HK Control HK (housekeeping) digital output port
Set Date Set date and time to the real time clock on SV
Revise Date Time adjustment by SNTP server
Restart SV Restart date and time of network layer protocol sub program
RPI Operate/Release - CW / XPICRST
DADE Adjust Auto DADE'ing - RPS DADE/SD DADE/XSD DADE/XPIC DADE
ADJ Equipment TX power output adjustment - TXPWR (Up/Down)
ALS ALS setting (Manual Restart/Test Restart)
Order Wire Control LED ON/OFF and buzzer ON/OFF when telephone calling
Synchronous Ethernet Control clock priority of GESW1/2: Auto, priority1/2/3 clock
Provisioning
Slot Configuration Unit slot configuration for GP1-RPS and GP2-RPS
RF Configuration RF frequency type (RF band, Lower/Upper)
Modulation Configuration
CH Configuration RF channel arrangement (RF CH, Lower/Upper)
Service State Equipment service state (OOS/IS/IS-MT)
TX Setting TX setting (TXPWER/TPC/MTPC)
Delay equalizer Select Delay equalizer select (Flat/None/Lowe/Upper/Both)
RSPI RSPI (ATPC/MTCP/Route ID/BER Initiator)
MN.00278.E - 005 313

Menu Description
RUC RUC (VF / DGTL / V.11 and Co-directional/Contra-directional)
RPS (GP) RPS (GP1/GP2/OCC/Priority CH/WTR)
RSC GP1-X/Y / GP2-X/Y
WS Use/No use of WS(SOH) and WS (RFCOH)
Trace (SDH J0 byte) Jo Line / Radio
Trace (Data) Direction (Line-X/Radio) / Change or no change / Alarm Mask
Base Band Interface None/STM-1 electrical/STM-1 optical/Giga Ether/SPC
ALS Setting ALS (Automatic Restart/Disable), AR Time (60 to 300s)
GE GESW Setting GESW version: GESW v1/v2, SFP code, MAC address
Slot setting of GE ADPT card (GP1/GP2), Port1/2 setting

GE Composition Setting
EXT CLK setting
GE Radio Port Setting RadioAgg1/2, Priority1/2/3/4, Ratio: 10% to 50%
Sync mode (Enable/Disable)

GE Synchronous Ethernet
Priority1/2/3 setting (Internal, GESW-L-1/2 CLK, GESW-R-1/2 CLK
GESW-1 Refer to Tab.111
GESW-2 Refer to Tab.111
DCC/OW CH Setting DCC/OW CH selection (Use CH/Direction/Through/Drop)
Order Wire OW use/MIC/Headset/Volume setting
Physical Inventory Data for NE - System Name / System Contact /

Physical Inventory NE System Location / Site Code / Equipment Code / Local Number / Re-
source State / Equipment Note / NE Type
Physical Inventory Unit SIU type/SIU BLD HW/Firm/FPGA1/FPGA2/SIUserial No.
Unit/Radio Branch Label/SIU type/Item Code/HW Build Status/SW

Hardware Inventory
Build Status/Manufacture Date/Serial Number
Network Setting (IP) IP address / Sub net address / Default Gateway
SNMP Manager #n / Type Community Name #n / Community Name

for Read-Write / Community Name for Read-Only / SNTP Server Ad-
Network Setting (Others)
dress / SNTP Revising Time / Time Zone / Daylight Saving Time Mode
/ Term of Daylight Saving Time / SV Firmware Version / MAC Address
Login Setting User ID type / New ID / New Password / Enter again
HK Description Set description for HK digital input/output port
RF Description Set Description for RF band and Lower/Upper band
CH Description Set Description for RF channel and Lower/Upper
ACT/DACT Alarm activation time/Alarm de-activation time for alarm fluctuation
Analog Monitor Adjust Edit Analog Monitor Level Adjust Setting for TX/RX/SD level (dBm)
LED Mode LED colour of Yellow or Green
STP Parameters: Switch priority / Port priority / Port cost / Bandwidth/

STP Config
Hello time / Forward delay time / Maximum delay time
STP Status STP parameter status
Performance
Data GP<1/2>-P Current performance of GP<1/2>-P)
314 MN.00278.E - 005

Menu Description
Data GP<1/2>-<W1-Wn> Current performance of GP<1/2>-<W1-Wn>
Threshold NA SEV / NSES / Receive Level-1 / Receive Level-2 / Transmit Level
15 minutes value - RLTS-M-1 / RLTS-M-2 / RLTS-SD-1 / RLTS-SD 2 /

Threshold 15min
TLTS
Threshold 1day 1 day value - RLTS-M-1 / RLTS-M-2 / RLTS-SD-1 / RLTS-SD 2 / TLTS
Analog Monitor RL-M / RL-SD / TL
Clear current & Historical PM register, historical Condition and Control

Initial Register
& Provisioning history
History & File
History Condition History condition occurred and restored
History Control&Provisioning History condition of control & provisioning occurred and restored
Download Condition Download condition
Download Control&Provisioning Download condition of control & provisioning
Download Performance Download condition of performance
Download Database Download condition of SYS/NET/HK/RF/MT/ADJ database
Download Physical Inventory Download condition of physical inventory
Download Severity List Download condition of severity list
Upload SV FIRM Upload condition of SV firmware version
Upload FPGA/FIRM Upload condition of FPGA/Firmware version
Upload Database Upload condition of Database
Upload License Key Upload condition of License Key
Upload Severity List Upload condition of severity list
MN.00278.E - 005 315

Tab.111 - Menu Description when GESW-<1/2> is selected
Menu Description
Configuration
Ports Speed/Max. frame size/Ex collision/power control, Save/Reset
Aggregation
Static Aggregation mode/group configuration, Save/Reset
LACP LACP port configuration, Save/Reset
Link OAM
Port Setting Link OAM port configuration, Save/Reset
Event Setting Link event configuration for port1 to port8, Save/Reset
Spanning Tree
Bridge Setting Basic/Advanced setting, Save/Reset
MSTI Mapping Configuration identifier/MSTI mapping, Save/Reset
MSTI Priority MSTI priority configuration, Save/Reset
CIST Ports CIST aggregation/port configuration, Save/Reset
MSTI Ports Select MSTI
IPMC
IGMP Snooping
Basic Configuration IGMP snooping/Port Related Configuration, Save/Reset
VLAN Configuration IGMP snooping VLAN configuration, Save/Reset
Port Group Filterring IGMP snooping Port Group Filter Configuration, Save/Reset
MLD Snooping
Basic Configuration MLD snooping/Port Related Configuration, Save/Reset
VLAN Configuration MLD snooping VLAN configuration, Save/Reset
Port Group Filtering MLD snooping Port Group Filter Configuration, Save/Reset
SyncE SyncE configuration
MAC Table MAC Address Table Configuration
VLAN Translation
Port to GrouP Mapping Port to Group Mapping Table
VID Translation Mapping VLAN Translation Table
VLANs
VLAN Membership VLAN Membership Table
Ports VLAN Port Configulation
QoS
Port Classification QoS Ingress Port Classification
Port Policing QoS Ingress Port Policer
Queue Policing QoS Ingress Queue Policer
Port Scheduler QoS Ingress Port Scheduler
316 MN.00278.E - 005

Menu Description
Port Shaping QoS Engress Port Tag Remarking
Port Tag Remarking QoS Engress Port DSCP Configulation
DSCP-Based QoS QoS Ingress Classification
DSCP Translation DSCP Translation
QoS Control List QoS Control List Configulation
Storm Control QoS Port Storm Control
WRED Weighted Random Early Detection Configulation
Mirroring Mirror Configulation
PTP FTP External Clock Mode
Monitor
Ports
State Port Status
Traffic Overview Port Statistics Overview
QoS Statistics Queuing Counters
QCL Status QoS Control list status
Detailed Statistics Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 to Port8
Link OAM
Statistics Detailed Link OAM Statistics for Port1 to Port8
Port Status Detailed Link OAM Status for Port1 to port8
Event Status Detailed Link OAM Link Status for Port1 to Port8
LACP
System Status LACP System Status
Port Status LACP Port Status
Port Statistics LACP Port Statistics
Spanning Tree
Bridge Status STP Bridge
Port Status STP Port Status
Port Statistics STP Statistics
IPMC
IGMP Snooping
Status IGMP Snooping Status/Statistics/Router port
Groups Information IGMP Snooper Groups Information
IPv4 SFM Information IGMP SFM Information
MLD Snooping
Status MLD Snooping Status/Statistics/Router port
Groups Information MLD Snooper Groups Information
IPv6 SFM Information MLD SFM Information
MN.00278.E - 005 317

Menu Description
Ethernet Services
EVC Statistics EVC Statistics
ECE Statistics ECE Statistics
FTP FTP External Clock Mode/PTP Clock Configuration
PTP PTP External Clock Mode/PTP Clock Configuration
MAC Table MAC Address Table
VLANs
VLAN Membership VLAN Membership Status for Combined Users
VLAN Port VLAN Port Status for Static User
Diagnosis
Ping ICMP Ping
Maintenance
Restart Devices Restart Devices, Yes/No
Factory Default Factory Default, Yes/No
Software
Upload Firmware Update
Image Select Software Image Selection
Configuration
Save Configuration Save
Upload Configuration Upload
318 MN.00278.E - 005

15.3 MENU TREE FOR GESW V1
Fig.192 and Fig.193 show the menu tree of SNMP-SV firmware version V7.54 when GESW v1 card is in-
stalled and set to GESW v1 in the GESW Setting menu.
Menu Tree when GESW v1 is set in the GESW Setting menu.

Menu S lot C onfig
C ondition D is play R F C onfig
ALL Modulation C onfig
TR MD C H C onfig
B B INTF S ervic e S tate
COM TX S etting
IF R es pons e D elay E qualiz er S elec t
C ontrol RPS RSPI
B B INTF R UC
Loopbac k R P S (GP )
RCI RSC
HK WS
S et D ate Trac e (S D H J0 byte)
R evis e D ate Trac e (D ata)
R es tart S V B as e B and Interfac e
RPI ALS S etting
D AD E Adjus t GE GE S W S etting
AD J E quipm ent GE C om pos ition S etting
ALS GE S ync hronous E thernet
O rder W ire GE P ort S etting
S ync hronous E thernet GE Link Aggregation Aggregation Mode
P rovis ioning S tatic Aggregation
D ynam ic Aggregation
GE MAC MAC R egis tration
GE Max Fram e S etting MAC Table
Age Tim e
䠝䠞
Fig.192 - Menu Tree for GESW v1
MN.00278.E - 005 319

䠝䠞
P erform anc e D ata GP < 1/2> -P GE VLAN ID S etting
D ata GP < 1/2> -W n Item S etting
D ata GE S W < 1/2> GE R S TP R S TP C onfiguration
E xtra L2S W D ata Item S etting
Thres hold NA R S TP S tatus
Thres hold 15m in GE Q oS Item S etting
Thres hold 1day GE R ate C ontrol Q oS Tag P riority
Analog Monitor GE C ons ole Input DSCP
Initial R egis tor D C C /O W C H S etting
His tory & File His tory C ondition O rder W ire
H is tory C ontrol& P rovis ioning P hys ic al Inventory NE
D ow nload C ondition P hys ic al Inventory Unit
Dow nload C ontrol& P rovis ioning Netw ork S etting (IP )
D ow nload P erform anc e Netw ork S etting (O thers )
D ow nload D atabas e Login S etting
Dow nload P hy s ic al Inventory HK D es c ription
D ow nload S everity Lis t R F D es c ription
Upload S V/FIR M C H D es c ription
Upload FP GA/FIR M AC T/D AC T
Upload D atabas e Analog Monitor Adjus t
Upload Lic enc e K ey LE D Mode
Upload S everity Lis t S TP C onfig
S TP S tatus
320 MN.00278.E - 005

15.4 MENU TREE DESCRIPTION
Tab.112 shows the menu description of SNMP-SV firmware version V7.54 when GESW v1 card is installed
and set to GESW v1 in the GESW Setting menu.
Tab.112 - Menu Description when GESW v1 installed
Menu Description
Condition
Display Display current unit allocation and RF channel allocation
ALL Display current (occurring) condition on NE
TRMD Display current (occurring) condition on TRMD(s)
BB INTF Display current (occurring) condition on BB INTF(s)
COM Display current (occurring) condition on SV and auxiliary unit
IF Response Display current amplitude/delay response of IF-IF transmission line
Control
RPS Control RPS (AID/Direction/Action)
BB INTF Control BB INTF (AID/Action)
Loopback Control Loopback (AID/Action/Direction)
RCI Control RCI (Remote Card Identifier)
HK Control HK (housekeeping) digital output port
Set Date Set date and time to the real time clock on SV
Revise Date Time adjustment by SNTP server
Restart SV Restart date and time of network layer protocol sub program
RPI Operate/Release - CW / XPICRST
DADE Adjust Auto DADE'ing - RPS DADE/SD DADE/XSD DADE/XPIC DADE
ADJ Equipment TX power output adjustment - TXPWR (Up/Down)
ALS ALS setting (Manual Restart/Test Restart)
Order Wire Control LED ON/OFF and buzzer ON/OFF when telephone calling
Synchronous Ethernet Control clock priority of GESW1/2: Auto, priority1/2/3 clock
Provisioning
Slot Configuration Unit slot configuration for GP1-RPS and GP2-RPS
RF Configuration RF frequency type (RF band, Lower/Upper)
Modulation Configuration
CH Configuration RF channel arrangement (RF CH, Lower/Upper)
Service State Equipment service state (OOS/IS/IS-MT)
TX Setting TX setting (TXPWER/TPC/MTPC)
Delay equalizer Select Delay equalizer select (Flat/None/Lowe/Upper/Both)
MN.00278.E - 005 321

Menu Description
RSPI RSPI (ATPC/MTCP/Route ID/BER Initiator)
RUC RUC (VF / DGTL / V.11 and Co-directional/Contra-directional)
RPS (GP) RPS (GP1/GP2/OCC/Priority CH/WTR)
RSC GP1-X/Y / GP2-X/Y
WS Use/No use of WS(SOH) and WS (RFCOH)
Trace (SDH J0 byte) Jo Line / Radio
Trace (Data) Direction (Line-X/Radio) / Change or no change / Alarm Mask
Base Band Interface None/STM-1 electrical/STM-1 optical/Giga Ether/SPC
ALS Setting ALS (Automatic Restart/Disable), AR Time (60 to 300s)
GE GESW Setting GESW version: GESW v1/v2, SFP code, MAC address
Slot setting of GE ADPT card (GP1/GP2), Port1/2 setting

GE Composition Setting
EXT CLK setting
Sync mode (Enable/Disable)

GE Synchronous Ethernet
Priority1/2/3 setting (Internal, GESW-L-1/2 CLK, GESW-R-1/2 CLK
GE Physical Information SFP code/MAC address
Port: FE port / Radio port1/2 / Line port1/2, Item & Value: Port state
GE Port Setting
/ Flow control / Transfer mode
GE Link Aggregation
Aggregation Mode Aggregation mode: Static / Dynamic / XOR
Control: Add / Delete, Group port: Group port1/2, FE port / Radio

Static Aggregation
port1/2 / Line port1/2: Disable/Enable
Port: FE port / Radio port1/2 / Line port1/2Item Value: Protocol / Key

Dynamic Aggregation
value
GE MAC
MAC Registration Control: Add / Delete, VLAN ID: 1-5, Port: FE / Radio 1/2 / Line 1/2
MAC Table VLAN ID: 1-5
Age Time Set-up: 0 - 65535
GE Max Frame Setting Port: FE / Radio1/2 / Line1/2, Max frame size: 1518 - 9600
GE VLAN
ID Setting Control: Add/Delete, VLAN ID: 1-4096, Port: Disable/Enable
Item: VLAN aware/Ingress filtering/Packet type/Port VLAN ID

Item Setting
Value: Disable/Enable or All/Tagged Only or NONE/1/2
GE RSTP
Item: System priority/Hello time/Max age/Forward delay/Forced ver-

RSTP Configuration
sion/Port aggregations
Port: FE / Radio1/2 / Line1/2, Item: Port Protocol/Port edge/Port path

Item Setting
cost, Value: Disable/Enable etc.
RSTP Status -
GE QoS
Port: FE / Radio1/2 / Line1/2, Item: QoS mode/QoS default/QoS user

Item Setting
priority, Value for each item
322 MN.00278.E - 005

Menu Description
Port: FE / Radio1/2 / Line1/2,Tag: 0-7, Priority: Low/Normal/Medium/

QoS Tag Priority
High
DSCP DSCP: 0-63, Priority: Low/Normal/Medium/High
Port: FE / Radio1/2 / Line1/2, Item: Policer/Shaper, Value: 128-3968

GE Rate Control
kbps, No limit
GE Console Input CLI command string
DCC/OW CH Setting DCC/OW CH selection (Use CH/Direction/Through/Drop)
Order Wire OW use/MIC/Headset/Volume setting
Physical Inventory Data for NE - System Name / System Contact /

Physical Inventory NE System Location / Site Code / Equipment Code / Local Number / Re-
source State / Equipment Note / NE Type
Physical Inventory Unit SIU type/SIU BLD HW/Firm/FPGA1/FPGA2/SIUserial No.
Unit/Radio Branch Label/SIU type/Item Code/HW Build Status/SW

Hardware Inventory
Build Status/Manufacture Date/Serial Number
Network Setting (IP) IP address / Sub net address / Default Gateway
SNMP Manager #n / Type Community Name #n / Community Name

for Read-Write / Community Name for Read-Only / SNTP Server Ad-
Network Setting (Others)
dress / SNTP Revising Time / Time Zone / Daylight Saving Time Mode
/ Term of Daylight Saving Time / SV Firmware Version / MAC Address
Login Setting User ID type / New ID / New Password / Enter again
HK Description Set description for HK digital input/output port
RF Description Set Description for RF band and Lower/Upper band
CH Description Set Description for RF channel and Lower/Upper
ACT/DACT Alarm activation time/Alarm de-activation time for alarm fluctuation
Analog Monitor Adjust Edit Analog Monitor Level Adjust Setting for TX/RX/SD level (dBm)
LED Mode LED colour of Yellow or Green
STP Parameters: Switch priority / Port priority / Port cost / Bandwidth/

STP Config
Hello time / Forward delay time / Maximum delay time
STP Status STP parameter status
Performance
Data GP<1/2>-P Current performance of GP<1/2>-P)
Data GP<1/2>-<W1-Wn> Current performance of GP<1/2>-<W1-Wn>
Data GESW-<1/2> Current performance of GESW-<1/2>
Extra L2SW Data Current performance of L2SW
Threshold NA SEV / NSES / Receive Level-1 / Receive Level-2 / Transmit Level
15 minutes value - RLTS-M-1 / RLTS-M-2 / RLTS-SD-1 / RLTS-SD 2 /

Threshold 15min
TLTS
Threshold 1day 1 day value - RLTS-M-1 / RLTS-M-2 / RLTS-SD-1 / RLTS-SD 2 / TLTS
Analog Monitor RL-M / RL-SD / TL
Clear current & Historical PM register, historical Condition and Control

Initial Register
& Provisioning history
MN.00278.E - 005 323

Menu Description
History & File
History Condition History condition occurred and restored
History Control&Provisioning History condition of control & provisioning occurred and restored
Download Condition Download condition
Download Control&Provisioning Download condition of control & provisioning
Download Performance Download condition of performance
Download Database Download condition of SYS/NET/HK/RF/MT/ADJ database
Download Physical Inventory Download condition of physical inventory
Download Severity List Download condition of severity list
Upload SV FIRM Upload condition of SV firmware version
Upload FPGA/FIRM Upload condition of FPGA/Firmware version
Upload Database Upload condition of Database
Upload License Key Upload condition of License Key
Upload Severity List Upload condition of severity list
324 MN.00278.E - 005

15.5 CONDITION
Tab.113 shows the condition item and description.
Tab.113 - Condition Item Description List

No Card AID T ype Con diti on Type Status Description SA NSA
1 PSF AIL PS Failure CR CR
2 CARD-FAIL Card Failure CR MN
3 RMVD Card is removed CR NA
4 MISMOUNT Card is mismount ed CR MN
5 RCI Remote Card Identifier - NA
6 TX F LR TX Block Failure CR MN
7 TCA-TLTS-15M Threshold Crossing Alert (TLTS-15m ) - NA
8 TCA-TLTS-24H Threshold Crossing Alert (TLTS-24h) - NA
9 TCA-RLTS-M-1-15M Threshold Crossing Alert (RLTS-M-1-15m) - NA
10 EQPT TCA-RLTS-M-1-24H Threshold Crossing Alert (RLTS-M-1-24h) - NA
11 TCA-RLTS-M-2-15M Threshold Crossing Alert (RLTS-M-2-15m) - NA
12 TCA-RLTS-M-2-24H Threshold Crossing Alert (RLTS-M-2-24h) - NA
13 TCA-RLTS-SD-1-15M Threshold Crossing Alert (RLTS-SD-1-15m) - NA
14 TCA-RLTS-SD-1-24H Threshold Crossing Alert (RLTS-SD-1-24h) - NA
15 TCA-RLTS-SD-2-15M Threshold Crossing Alert (RLTS-SD-2-15m) - NA
16 TCA-RLTS-SD-2-24H Threshold Crossing Alert (RLTS-SD-2-24h) - NA
17 ACTCW Carrier Wave Control in Active - NA
18 XPIC-OFF XPIC is OF F Control in Active - NA
19 TX-OFF TX is OFF Cont rol in Active - NA
TRMD
20 SD-RCV-DN SD RX Received Level Down (BER= 1.0E-3) MJ NR
21 MN-RCV-DN Main RX Received Level Down (BER=1.0E-3) MJ NR
22 LOF Loss of Frame CR NR
23 UAS-RP Unavailable St ate (RP) CR NR
24 TCA-RP-BBE15M Threshold Crossing Alert (RP-BBE-15m) - NA
25 TCA-RP-ES15M Threshold Crossing Alert (RP-ES-15m) - NA
26 TCA-RP-SES15M Threshold Crossing Alart (RP-SES-15m) - NA
27 TCA-RP-BBE24H Threshold Crossing Alert (RP-BBE-24H) - NA
RSPI
28 TCA-RP-ES24H Threshold Crossing Alert (RP-ES-24H) - NA
29 TCA-RP-SES24H Threshold Crossing Alart (RP-SES-24H) - NA
30 TCA-OFS15M Threshold Crossing Alert (OFS-15m) - NA
31 TCA-OFS24H Threshold Crossing Alart (OFS-24H) - NA
32 RADRM Radio Route ID Mismatch CR NR
33 RP-ERR-BP Excessive Bit Error Rate (BP Before FEC) - NR
34 RP-ERR-AP Excessive Bit Error Rate (BP After F EC) MJ NR
35 SN-DEGRADE SN Degradation CR MN
36 XPIC-LOS-MN Loss of Signal in XPIC (MN XIF) MJ NR
CNCT
37 XPIC-LOS-SD Loss of Signal in XPIC (SD IF ) MJ NR
38 PSF AIL PS Failure CR CR
39 CARD-FAIL Card Failure CR MN
40 RMVD Card is removed CR NA
EQPT
41 MISMOUNT Card is Mismount ed CR MN
42 RCI Remote Card Identifier - NA
43 FRCD Card is F orced Switched - NA
44 LOF Loss of Frame CR -
45 STIM Section Trace ID Mismatch CR -
46 UAS-B1 Unavailable St ate (B1) CR NR
47 TCA-B1-BBE15M Threshold Crossing Alert (B1-BBE-15m) - NA
48 TCA-B1-ES15M Threshold Crossing Alert (B1-ES-15m) - NA
49 TCA-B1-SES15M Threshold Crossing Alert (B1-SES-15m) - NA
50 Baseband TCA-B1-BBE24H Threshold Crossing Alert (B1-BBE-24h) - NA
51 TCA-B1-ES-24H Threshold Crossing Alert (B1-ES-24h) - NA
52 TCA-B1-SES24H Threshold Crossing Alert (B1-SES-24h) - NA
53 STM1RS TCA-OFS15M Threshold Crossing Alert (OFS-15m) - NA
54 TCA-OFS24H Threshold Crossing Alert (OFS-24h) - NA
55 LOOPBACK Loopback in Active Condition - NA
56 B1-SD Signal Degrade (B1) MJ -
57 LOS Loss of Signal CR -
58 LASER-TEMP Laser Temperature High MJ WR
59 LASER-BIAS Laser Bias Out of Limits MJ WR
60 OPT-DEGRADE Optical Power Transmitted Degrade MJ WR
61 OPT-OUT-RANGE Optical Power Transmitted Out of Range CR CR
62 OPT-ALS Aut omat ic Laser Shutdown NA NA
MN.00278.E - 005 325

No C ar d AID Ty pe Condition Ty pe Statu s Descrip tion SA N SA
63 CA RD -FAIL Ca rd Fai lu re - MJ
64 RC I Re mo te Ca rd Id en tifie r - NA
65 AC TA CO Al arm C ut Off in Ac tive Co nd itio n - NA
66 MA C-FA IL MA C Ad dre ss Fa il ure - MJ
67 NE TD B-FAIL Da tab ase Fil e Fai lu re (NE TD B) - MJ
68 HK DB -FAIL Da tab ase Fil e Fai lu re (HK DB ) - MJ
69 AD JDB -FA IL Da tab ase Fil e Fai lu re (AD JDB) - MJ
70 E QP T GED B1 -FA IL Da tab ase Fil e Fai lu re (GED B1) - MJ
71 GED B2 -FA IL Da tab ase Fil e Fai lu re (GED B2) - MJ
72 COM M-FAIL GP 1R Co mmu ni ca tion Fai l GP1 -R - MN
73 COM M-FAIL GP 1L Co mmu ni ca tion Fai l GP1 -L - MN
74 COM M-FAIL GP 2R Co mmu ni ca tion Fai l GP1 -R - MN
75 COM M-FAIL GP 2L Co mmu ni ca tion Fai l GP2 -L - MN
76 CA LL ON Ca ll On in Ac tive - NR
77 VE NT-FAIL Ve nti lati on Fail ure - WR
78 WS LOS Lo ss of S ig na l - MN
79 R SC LOF Lo ss of Fra me - MN
80 LOS R Lo ss of S ig na l fro m R adi o CR -
81 LOP S Lo ss of P rote ctio n S ign al - MN
C NCT
82 SE IN T-FAIL Se ria l In terfac e Fai lu re CR
83 SE IN T-B Z Se ria l In terfac e Bu sy - NA
84 HK IN 1 HK IN 1 - MN
E NV
93
C om m on HK IN 10 HK IN 10 - MN
(SV ) HK IN 11 HK IN 11
94 - MN
1 00 HK OUT1 HK OUT1 - MN
C ON T
1 08 LK O-BS W Lo ck out o f B SW - NA
1 09 LK O-US W Lo ck out o f U SW - NA
1 10 LK O-BS W FEN D Lo ck out o f B SW (FE ND) - NA
1 11 SW RE Q-B SW Sw itc h Re qu est i n B SW - NR
1 12 SW RE Q-U SW Sw itc h Re qu est i n U SW - NR
1 13 SW -FAIL BS W Sw itc hin g Fa il ure i n B SW - MJ
1 14 SW -FAIL US W Sw itc hin g Fa il ure i n U SW - MJ
1 15 FORC E-BS W Forc ed S wi tch o f B SW - NA
R PS
1 16 FORC E-US W Forc ed S wi tch i n U SW - NA
1 17 MA N-B SW Ma nu al S wi tch i n B SW - NA
1 18 MA N-U SW Ma nu al S wi tch i n U SW - NA
1 19 T-P BS W Tra ffic to Pro tecti on by B SW - NA
1 20 T-P US W Tra ffic to Pro tecti on by U SW - NA
1 21 FORC E-BS W FEN D Forc ed S wi tch o f B SW (FE ND) - NA
1 22 FORC E-US W FEN D Forc ed S wi tch o f U SW (FE ND) - NA
1 23 PR I-C H MIS Pri ori ty Ch an nel Mi sma tch - NA
1 24 PS -FAIL PS Fail ure - MN
1 25
C om m on E QP T
RC I Re mo te Ca rd Id en tifie r - NA
(AU X) R UC LOS Lo ss of S ig na l
1 26 - MN
1 27 CA RD -FAIL Ca rd Fai lu re CR -
1 28 E QP T RM VD Ca rd i s Re mo ved CR -
1 29 MISM OUNT Ca rd i s Mi sm atch ed CR -
1 30 C om m on RC I Re mo te Ca rd Id en tifie r - NA
1 31 (G ESW ) LINK -DOWN R Ra di o Li nk Do wn - MN
1 32 E ther LINK -DOWN L Li ne Lin k D ow n CR -
1 33 BW -RE DUC ED Ba nd wid th R edu ce d CR MN
1 34 CL K-D OWN Ex terna l C lo ck D ow n CR MN
Warning: SA and NSA are default.
326 MN.00278.E - 005

15.6 CONTROL
Tab.114 shows the control item and item description.
Tab.114 - Control Item and Item Description
As of April 2011
Control AID Keyw ord Doma in
RPS GP<1/2>- Direction Uni-Direction/Bi-Direction

<P, W1-W7> Action Operate Manual/Operate Forced/
Operate Lockout/Releas e Manual/
Releas e Forced/Releas e Lockout
BB INTF GP<1/2>- Action Operate Forced-X/Operate Forced-Y/
<P, W1-W7> Releas e Forced
Loopback GP<1/2>- Direction Line-X/Line-Y/Radio
<P, W1-W7> Action Operate/Releas e
RCI GP<1/2>- AID GP<1/2>-<P, W1-W7>-TRMD/
<P, W1-W7> GP<1/2>-<P, W1-W7>-BB INTF-X/
GP<1/2>-<P, W1-W7>-BB INTF-Y/
SV/AUX1/AUX2/Releas e ALL
HK HKO-<1-8> A ction ON/OFF
Set Date - Year Range: 2002 to 2035
Month Range: 1 to 12
Day Range: 1-31
Hour Range: 0 to 23
Minute Range: 00 to 59
Second Range: 00 to 59
Revise Date - Operate
Restart SV - Year Range: 2002 to 2035
Month Range: 1 to 12
Day Range: 1-31
Hour Range: 0 to 23
Minute Range: 00 to 59
Second Range: 00 to 59
Boot Select ACT/STBY
RPI GP<1/2>- Comm and CW/XPICRST/TXOFF
<P, W1-W7> Action Operate/Releas e
DADE Adjus t GP<1/2>- DADE Adjus t SD DADE/XSD DADE/XPIC DADE/
<P, W1-W7> BPSDADE
ADJ Equipment GP<1/2>- TXPWR UP/DOWN
<P, W1-W7>
ALS GP<1/2>- ALS Manual Res tart/Test R es tart
<P,W1-W7>-
(X/Y>
Order Wire - Call ON ON/OFF
Synchronous Ethernet GP<1/2>- AID GESW1/2
Priority Auto
Priority1/2/3 Clock
MN.00278.E - 005 327

15.7 PROVISIONING
Tab.115 shows the Provisioning item and item description for GESW v2.
Tab.115 - Provisioning Item and Item Description List for GESW v2

Provi si on ing AID Keyw ord Dom ai n
Slot Configuration GP<1/2>- Flexible Slot Allocation Mode Enable/Dis able

<P,W1-W16> Slot allocation for fixed m ode Slot 1-8 for GP1 & s lot 9-16 for GP2
Slot allocation for flexible mode Slot 1 for GP1-P, s lot 9 or 16 for GP2-P
Other s lot is free to allocate for GP1/2
RF Configuration GP1/GP2 RF band & type 4 to 13 GHz band & Type
<P,W1-W16> independently for GP1/2, P, W1 to W16
Modulation Configuration GP1/GP2- SDH/Ether SDH / Ether
<P, W1-W16> Mode T-FIX / Adaptive
Adaptive Modulation Range(MAX/MIN) QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM
T-QAM QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM
R-QAM QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM
CH Configuration GP<1/2>- RF channel No. CH1 to CH18 & Lower/Upper
<P,W1-W16> independently for GP1/2, P, W1 to W16
Service State GP<1/2>- Service state IS/OOS/IS-MT
<P,W1-W16>
TX Setting GP<1/2>- TX power NORMAL POWER/HIGH POWER
<P,W1-W16> TX Overdrive Enable/Dis able
TPC ATPC-65 dBm /ATPC-55 dBm/
ATPC-45 dBm /MTPC
MTPC +2 to -20 dB, 1 dB-step
Delay Equalizer Select GP<1/2>- A djacent channel allocation None/Lower/Upper/Both
<P,W1-W16>
RSPI GP<1/2>- RPS Enable/Dis able
<P,W1-W16> Space Diversity Enable/Dis able
XPIC Enable/Dis able
Route ID 0 to 15
BER 1.0E-3/5.0E-4/1.0E-4/5.0E-5/
1.0E-5/5.0E-6/1.0E-6
RUC GP<1/2>- 64K IF (only for G.703 interface) Co-directional/directional
RUC-<1-3>
RPS (GP) GP1/GP2 GP GP1/GP2
OCC Enable/Dis able
Priority Ch W1 to W16/Dis able
Wait To Res tore None/1 to 20
RSC GP1/GP2 GP1-X Disable/GP1-P, W1-W16
GP1-Y Disable/GP1-P, W1-W16
GP2-X Disable/GP2-P, W1-W16
GP2-Y Disable/GP2-P, W1-W16
WS GP<1/2>- WS(SOH) Enable/Dis able
<P, W1-W16> WS(RFCOH) Enable/Dis able
Trace (SDH J0 byte) GP<1/2>- J0 Line-X Through/Section Trace
<P, W1-W16> J0 Line-Y Through/Section Trace/-
Jo Radio Through/Section Trace
Trace (Data) GP<1/2>- Direction Line-X/Radio
<P, W1-W16> Data Change/No change
Send Data 15 alphanumerical characters
Expect Data 15 alphanumerical characters
Alarm Mas k Enable/Dis able
Base Band Interface GP<1/2>- BaseBand Interface None/STM-1 electrical/STM-1 optical
<P, W1-W16> Giga Ether/SPC
ALS Setting GP<1/2>- ALS Autom atic Res tart/Disable
<P, W1-W16>- AR Time 60s/120s /180s /240s/300s
<X/Y>
328 MN.00278.E - 005

Provisioning AID Keyword Doma in
GE GESW Setting GESW1/2 GESW vers ion GESW v1/GESW v2

Port Shutdown Disable/Enable
SFP code -
MAC address -
GE Compos ition Setting GESW1/2 GESW-1/2-R-1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 RadioAgg1/RadioAgg2
GESW-1/2-L-1/2/3/4 Enable/Dis able
GESW1/2 EXT CLK Enable/Dis able
GE Radio Port Setting GESW1/2 GESW-1/2-RadioPort1/2/3/4 RadioAgg/Priority/Ratio
RadioAggregation RadioAgg1/RadioAgg2
Priority -/Priority1/Priority2/Priority3/Priority4
Ratio -/10%/20%/30% /40% /50%
GESW-1 L2SW For details , refer to Appendix-A
GESW-2 L2SW For details , refer to Appendix-A
DC C/OW CH Setting GP1/2 Us e Channel W1/W3/W5/W7

DCC/OW DCC/OW
Direction Line/Radio
Us e Through/Drop
Order Wire - OW Enable Enable/Dis able
MIC/H eadset MIC/Heads et
Volum e Minim um/1 to 9/Maxim um
Phys ical Inventory NE - Sys tem Name Max. 60 alphanum erical characters
Sys tem Contact Max. 60 alphanum erical characters
Sys tem Location Max. 60 alphanum erical characters
Site C ode Max. 9 alphanumerical characters
Equipment Code Max. 5 alphanumerical characters
Local Num ber Max. 6 alphanumerical characters
Res ource State Max. 9 alphanumerical characters
Equipment Note Max. 60 alphanum erical characters
NE Type Read Only
Phys ical Inventory Unit G P<1/2>- UNIT GP1/2-P, W1-W16, SV, GESW, AUXINTF
<P, W1-W7> Radio Branch Label Max. 32 alphanum erical characters
SIU Type -
Hardw are Build Status -
Software Build Status -
Manufacture Date -
Serial Number 6 digits
MN.00278.E - 005 329

Provisioning AID Keyword Doma in
Network Setting (IP) - IP default: 192.168.0.10

Sub Netmas k default: 255.255.255.0
Gate Way default: 192.168.0.1
Network Setting (Others ) - SNMP Trap Mode Bipmap/Object
SNMP Manager#1/#2/#3 default: 0.0.0.0
Type of Com munity Name#1/#2/#3 Read-Write/Read-Only
Comm unication Nam e for Sysm anager
Comm unity Nam e for Read-Write
Comm unity Nam e for Read-Only
Standard Trap Enable/Dis able
SNTP Server Addres s default: 0.0.0.0
SNMP Revis ing Tim e (Range: 0 to 23) : (Range: 0 to 59)
Last Synchronization Time y, m, d - h, m, s
Time Zone (Range: 0 to 13) : (Range: 0/15/30/45)
Daylight Saving Time Mode Enable/Dis able
DTS Start Month/Day/Hour
DTS End Month/Day/Hour
MAC Address
Login Setting - New Pas s word 12 alphanum eric characters
Enter Pas sword Again 12 alphanum eric characters
HK Description I-<1-16> IN/OU T IN/OUT
O-<1-8> No. 1 to 16 for DI (Digitai input, SV)
1-8 for DO (Digital output, C ONT)
D esc ription Max. 10 alphanum erical characters
RF Des cription - RF Type 4 to 13 GHz, Low er/Upper
Des cription max. 16 alphanumerical characters
CH Des cripti on - RF CH No. CH1 to CH16, Lower/Upper
Des cription max. 8 alphanum erical characters
ACT/DACT RSPI/STM1/RPS ACT 0 to 10
DACT 0 to 10
Analog Monitor Ajus t GP<1/2>- RL-M -10 to +10
<P, W1-W16> RL-SD -10 to +10
TL -10 to +10
LED Mode - Provis ioning value Yellow/Green
STP Configuration - Enable Status Enable/Dis able
Switch Priority 0 to 65535
Port Priority o to 255
Port Cos t o to 65535
Bandwidth
Hello Time 1 to 10
Forward Delay Tim e 4 to 30
Maxim um Aging Time 6 to 40
STP Status - STP Status Root Switch Priority/MAC Address
Port State/Switch Status /Topology
330 MN.00278.E - 005

15.8 PROVISIONING
Tab.116 shows the Provisioning item and item description for GESW v1.
Tab.116 -Provisioning Item and Item Description List for GESW v1

Pr ovi sio ning AID Keyword Dom ai n
Slot Configuration GP<1/2>- Flexible Slot Allocation Mode Enable/Dis able

<P,W1-W16> Slot allocation for fixed mode Slot 1-8 for GP1 & slot 9-16 for GP2
Slot allocation for flexible mode Slot 1 for GP1-P & slot 9 or 16 for GP2-P
Other slot is free to allocate for GP1/2
RF Configuration GP1/GP2 RF banf & Type 4 to 13 GHz band & type
<P,W1-W16> independently for GP1/2, P, W1-16
Modulation Configuration GP1/GP2- SDH/Ether SDH / Ether
<P, W1-W16> Mode T-FIX / Adaptive
Adaptive Modulation Range(MAX/MIN) QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM
T-QAM QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM
R-QAM QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM
CH Configuration GP<1/2>- RF channel number CH1 to CH18 & Lower/Upper
<P,W1-W16> independently for GP1/2, P, W1-16
Service State GP<1/2>- Service state IS/OOS/IS-MT
<P,W1-W16>
TX Setting GP<1/2>- TX power NORMAL POWER/HIGH POWER
<P,W1-W16> TX Overdrive Enable/Dis able
TPC ATPC-65 dBm/ATPC-55 dBm/
ATPC-45 dBm/MTPC
MTPC +2 to -20 dB, 1 dB-step
Delay Equalizer Select GP<1/2>- A djacent channel allocation None/Lower/Upper/Both
<P,W1-W16>
RSPI GP<1/2>- RPS Enable/Dis able
<P,W1-W16> Space Diversity Enable/Dis able
XPIC Enable/Dis able
Route ID 0 to 15
BER 1.0E-3/5.0E-4/1.0E-4/5.0E-5/
1.0E-5/5.0E-6/1.0E-6
RUC GP<1/2>- 64K IF (only for G.703 interface) Co-directional/directional
RUC-<1-3>
RPS (GP) GP1/GP2 GP GP1/GP2
OCC Enable/Dis able
Priority Ch W1 to W16/Dis able
Wait To Restore None/1 to 20
RSC GP1/GP2 GP1-X Dis able/GP1-P, W1-W16
GP1-Y Dis able/GP1-P, W1-W16
GP2-X Dis able/GP2-P, W1-W16
GP2-Y Dis able/GP2-P, W1-W16
WS GP<1/2>- WS(SOH) Enable/Dis able
<P, W1-W16> WS(RFCOH) Enable/Dis able
Trace (SDH J0 byte) GP<1/2>- J0 Line-X Through/Section Trace
<P, W1-W16> J0 Line-Y Through/Section Trace/-
Jo Radio Through/Section Trace
Trace (Data) GP<1/2>- Direction Line-X/Radio
<P, W1-W16> Data Change/No change
Send Data 15 alphanumerical characters
Expect Data 15 alphanumerical characters
Alarm Mas k Enable/Dis able
Base Band Interface GP<1/2>- BaseBand Interface None/STM-1 electrical/STM-1 optical
<P, W1-W16> Giga Ether/SPC
ALS Setting GP<1/2>- ALS Automatic Res tart/Disable
<P, W1-W16>- AR Time 60s /120s /180s /240s /300s
<X/Y>
MN.00278.E - 005 331

Provisioning AID Keyword Domain
GE GESW Setting GESW1/2 GESW version GESW v1/GESW v2

SFP code -
MAC address -
GE Composition Setting GESW1/2 GESW1/2-R RadioPort Connection RadioPort1/RadioPort2
GESW port1/2 setting Enable/Dis able
GESW1/2 EXT CLK Enable/Dis able
GE Synchronous Ethernet GESW1/2 Sync Mode Enable/Dis able
Priority1/2/3 Clock GESW-1/2-L-1/2 Clock
GESW-1/2-R-1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 Clock
Internal / External clock
GE Port Setting GESW1/2 Port FE Port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2/
Line Port1/Line Port2
Item Port State/Flow Control/Transfer Mode
Value for Port Status/Flow Control Enable/Dis able
Value for Transfer Mode Aoto/10 Half duplex/10 Full Duplex/
100 Half Duplex/100 Full Duplex/
1000 Full Duplex
GE Link Aggegation GESW1/2 Provisioning Value Source MAC/Destination MAC/XOR
- Aggregation Mode
- Static Aggregation GESW1/2 Control Add/Delete
Group Port Group-1/Group-2
FE Port Enable/Dis able
Radio Port1 Enable/Dis able
Line Port1 Enable/Dis able
- Dynamic Aggregation GESW1/2 Port FE Port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2/
Item Protocol/Key Value
Value for Protocol Enable/Dis able
Value for Key Value xxxxxxx
GE MAC GESW1/2 Add/Delete Add/Delete
- MAC Regis tration VLAN ID 1-5 for Add, 1-3 for Delete
Port for Add None/FE port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2
Port for Delete Always
Address xxxxxxx
- MAC Table GESW1/2 VLAN ID 1-5
- Age Time GESW1/2 Provisioning Value 0 - 65535
GE Max Frame Setting GESW1/2 Port FE Port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2/
LinePort1/LinePort2
Max Frame Setting 1518 - 9600
GE VLAN GESW1/2 Control Add/Delete
- ID Setting VLAN ID 1 - 4096
FE Port Enable/Dis able
- Item Setting GESW1/2 Port FE Port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2/
Item VLAN Aware/Ingress Filtering/
Packet Type
Value for VLAN Aware/Ingress FilteringDisable/Enable
Value for Packet Type All/T agged Only
Value for Port VLAN ID NONE/1/2
332 MN.00278.E - 005

GE RSTP GESW1/2 System Priority 0 - 61440, 4096 s tep

- RSTP Configuration Hello Time 1 - 10
Max Age 6 - 40
Forward Delay 4 - 30
Force Vers ion Normal/Compatible
Port Aggregation Disable/Enable
- Item Setting GESW1/2 Port FE Port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2/
Item Port Protocol/Port Edge/Port Path Cos t
Value for Port Protocol/Port Edge Disable/Enable
Value for Port Path Cos t xxxxxxx
- RSTP Status GESW1/2
GE QoS GESW1/2 Port FE Port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2/
- Item Setting Line Port1/Line Port2
Item QoS Mode/QoS Default/
QoS Us er Priority
Value for QoS Mode Tag/Port/Diffserve
Value for QoS Default Low/Normal/Medium/High
Value for QoS User Priority 0- 7
- QoS Tag Priority GESW1/2 Port FE Port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2/
Tag 0- 7
Priority Low/Normal/Medium/High
- DSCP GESW1/2 DSCP xxxxxxx
Priority Low/Normal/Medium/High
GE Rate Control GESW1/2 Port FE Port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2/
Item Policer/Shaper
Value 128 - 3968 kbps, 128 kbps s tep/
No Limit
GE Console Input GESW1/2 Enter CLI Com mand Strings xxxxxxx
DCC/OW CH Setting GP1/2 Us e Channel P, W1 to W7
DCC/OW DCC/OW
Direction Line/Radio
Us e Through/Drop
Order Wire - OW Enable Enable/Dis able
MIC/Headset MIC/Heads et
Volume Minimum/1 to 9/Maximum
Phys ical Inventory NE - System Name Max. 60 alphanum erical characters
System Contact Max. 60 alphanum erical characters
System Location Max. 60 alphanum erical characters
Site Code Max. 9 alphanumerical characters
Equipm ent Code Max. 5 alphanumerical characters
Local Num ber Max. 6 alphanumerical characters
Resource State Max. 9 alphanumerical characters
Equipm ent Note Max. 60 alphanum erical characters
NE Type Read Only
Phys ical Inventory Unit GP<1/2>- UNIT GP1/2-P, W1-W16, SV, GESW, AUXINTF
<P, W1-W7> Radio Branch Label Max. 32 alphanum erical characters
SIU Type -
Hardware Build Status -
Software Build Status -
Manufacture Date -
Serial Number 6 digits
MN.00278.E - 005 333

Network Setting (IP) - IP default: 192.168.0.10

Sub Netmas k default: 255.255.255.0
Gate Way default: 192.168.0.1
Network Setting (Others ) - SNMP Trap Mode Bipm ap/Object
SNMP Manager#1/#2/#3 default: 0.0.0.0
Type of Com munity Name#1/#2/#3 Read-Write/Read-Only
Communication Name for Sys manager
Community Nam e for Read-Write
Community Nam e for Read-Only
Standard Trap Enable/Dis able
SNTP Server Addres s default: 0.0.0.0
SNMP Revis ing Time (Range: 0 to 23) : (Range: 0 to 59)
Las t Synchronization Tim e y, m, d - h, m, s
Time Zone (Range: 0 to 13) : (Range: 0/15/30/45)
Daylight Saving Time Mode Enable/Dis able
DTS Start Month/Day/Hour
DTS End Month/Day/Hour
MAC Address
Login Setting - New Pass word 12 alphanumeric characters
Enter Pas sword Again 12 alphanumeric characters
HK Des cription I-<1-16> IN/OUT IN/OUT
O-<1-8> No. 1 to 16 for DI (Digitai input, SV)
1-8 for DO (Digital output, CONT)
D escription Max. 10 alphanum erical characters
RF Des cription - RF Type 4 to 13 GHz, Lower/Upper
Description max. 16 alphanumerical characters
CH Description - RF CH No. CH1 to CH16, Lower/Upper
Description max. 8 alphanumerical characters
ACT/DACT RSPI/STM1/RPS ACT 0 to 10
DACT 0 to 10
Analog Monitor Ajust GP<1/2>- RL-M -10 to +10
<P, W1-W16> RL-SD -10 to +10
TL -10 to +10
LED Mode - Provis ioning value Yellow/Green
STP Configuration - Enable Status Enable/Dis able
Switch Priority 0 to 65535
Port Priority o to 255
Port Cos t o to 65535
Bandwidth
Hello Time 1 to 10
Forward Delay Time 4 to 30
Maximum Aging Time 6 to 40
STP Status - STP Status Root Switch Priority/MAC Addres s
Port State/Switch Status/Topology
334 MN.00278.E - 005

15.9 PM
Tab.117 show the Performance Monitoring item and item description.
Tab.117 - Performance Monitoring Item and Item Description List
Section AID PM Item Performance Monitoring Item Description

BBE Near-end Background Block Error at STM1RS
ES Near-end Errored Second at STM1RS
SES Near-end Severely E rrored Second at STM1RS
UAS Near-end Unavailable Second at STM1RS
S TM1 RS
OFS Near-end Out of Frame Second at STM1RS
BBER Near-end Background Block Error Ratio at STM1RS
ESR Near-end Errored Second Ratio at STM1RS
SESR Near-end Severely E rrored Second Ratio at STM1RS
RADIO
RS PI
PSAC Radio Protection Switch Acttivation Count
FS RC Failed Radio Protection Switch Request Count
RPS
PSAD Radio Protection Switch Activation Duration
FS RD Failed Radio Protection Switch Request Duration
LINE-X STM1RS
LINE-Y STM1RS
RLTS-M-1 Recei ver Level Threshold crossed Section of Main RX specified by M-1
RLTS-M-2 Recei ver Level Threshold crossed Section of Main RX specified by M-2
RL-M-MAX Recei ver Level of Main RX Maximum
RL-M-MIN Recei ver Level of Main RX Minimum
RLTS-S D-1 Recei ver Level Threshold crossed Section of SD RX specified by S D-1
TRMD EQPT RLTS-S D-2 Recei ver Level Threshold crossed Section of SD RX specified by S D-2
RL-SD-MAX Recei ver Level of SD RX Maximum
RL-SD-MIN Recei ver Level of SD RX Minimum
TLTS Transmitter Power Output Level Threshold crossed Section
TL-MAX Transmitter Power Output Level Maximum
TL-MIN Transmitter Power Output Level Minimum
RL-M Recei ver Level of Main RX

Analog
EQPT RL-SD Recei ver Level of SD RX
Monitor
TL Transmitter Power Output Level
Note: P M item and descri ption are based on ITU-T G.784, ITU-T G.828 and ITU-R F750-4.
MN.00278.E - 005 335

Monitoring Type
Monitor Type Condition Description
15-Minite 24-Hour
Number of Errored Bloc k (EB) whic h is detected during the normal operation
BBE 0 to 16777215 units 0 to 4294967295 units
period except the duration of SES and UAS.
Number of sec onds which obtains at least one block error during the
ES 0 to 900 s econds 0 to 86400 seconds
Available time
Number of sec onds which contains error blocks more than Severely Errored 0 to 900 s econds 0 to 86400 seconds
SES
Threshold (SES) during the Available Time (default = 900) (default = 86400)
Continuing period of exceeding Severely Errored Threshold (SES) which is
defined by the Unavailability Filter (UAF). In case of UAF = 10 seconds, a
0 to 900 s edonds 0 to 86400 seconds
UAS period of UAS starts when Errored Bloc k (EB) in each second exc eeded
(default = 900) (default= 86400)
SEV for 10 c onsecutive seconds, and terminates when EB does not exceed
SEV for 10 c onsecutive second.
The number of sec onds which contains at leas t one occ asion of 0 to 900 s econds 0 to 86400
OFS
sync hronization los s of the frame alignment signal (default = 900) (default = 86400)
BBER Bac kground Block Error Ratio 0 to 1.4E-7 0 to 1.4E-9
ESR Errored Sec ond Ratio 0 to 1.1E-3 0 to 1.2E-5
SESR Severely Errored Second Ratio 0 to 1.1E-3 0 to 1.2E-5
PSAC Radio Protection Switch Actual Count 0 to 1612800 times 0 to 154828800 times
FSRC Failed Radio Protection Switc h Request 0 to 1612800 times 0 to 154828800 times
PSAD Radio Protection Switch Actual Duration 0 to 900 s econds 0 to 86400 seconds
FSRD Failed Radio Protection Switc h Request Duration 0 to 900 s econds 0 to 86400 seconds
1 to 900 s econds 1 to 86400 seconds
RLTS-M-1 Rec eive level thres hold crossed seconds of Main RX by M-1
(default = 900) (default = 86400)
RLTS-M-2 Rec eive level thres hold crossed seconds of Main RX by M-2
RLTS-SD-1 Rec eive level thres hold crossed seconds of SD RX by SD-1
RLTS-SD-2 Rec eive level thres hold crossed seconds of SD RX by SD-2
RL-M-MAX Max imum rec eive level of Main RX during the monitoring period -15 to -80 dBm -15 to -80 dBm
RL-SD-MAX Max imum rec eived level of SD RX during the monitoring period -15 to -80 dBm -15 to -80 dBm
RL-M-MIN Minimum received level of Main RX during the monitoring period -15 to -80 dBm -15 to -80 dBm
RL-SD-MIN Minimum received level of SD RX during the monitoring period -15 to -80 dBm -15 to -80 dBm
TLTS Transmitter power output level threshold c ros sed sec onds
TL-MAX Max imum transmitter power output level during the monitoring periods +5 to +37 dBm +5 to +37 dBm
TL-MIN Mimimum transmitter power output level during the monitoring periods +5 to +35 dBm +5 to +35 dBm
Analog MON Condition Desc ription Range & Toleranc e
-15 to -65 dBm, +/-3 dB

RL-M Actual Receiver signal level of Main RX in normal s tate
-65 to -80 dBm, +/-5 dB
-15 to -65 dBm, +/-3 dB

RL-SD Actual Receiver signal level of SD RX in normal s tate
-65 to -80 dBm, +/-5 dB
TL Actual Transmitter power output Level at normal s tate +5 to +37 dBm, +/-1 dB
Note: For analog monitoring, monitoring point is spec ified at Point A, A' and AD in accordance with ETSI EN301 217-1 V1.2.1 (2007-06)
336 MN.00278.E - 005

15.10 PHYSICAL INVENTORY
Tab.118 and Tab.119 show the Physical Inventory Item and item description.
Tab.118 - Physical Inventory NE Item and Item Description List

No. ITE M KE YW ORD DESCRIPTION DO MAIN USE R OP EN
1 System Name S YS -NAME S yste m Name 60 ascii R/W
2 System Contact S YS -CONTACT S yste m E quipment Contact 60 ascii R/W
3 System Location S YS -LOC S yste m equi pme nt loc ati on 60 ascii R/W
S ite c ode where the equipment is
4 Site Code S ITE-CODE 9 ascii R/W
install ed
5 Equipment Code E QPT-CODE E quipment code 5 ascii R/W
Custo mer's serial number within
6 Local No. LOCAL-NO 6 ascii R/W
equipment for each site
7 Equipment Note E QPT-NOTE Memo 60 ascii R/W
E quipment type used for
8 NE Type NE-TY PE customer's maintenance and 1 ascii R
operation
NE build status used for customer
9 Resource State RES RC-S TT 8 ascii R/W
maintenance and operation
Note*: R/W: Readable & Writable, R: only Readable
MN.00278.E - 005 337

Tab.119 - Physical Inventory UNIT Item and Item Description List
No. ITEM KEYWORD DESCRIPTION DOMAIN USER OPEN

1 SIU Code SIU-CODE SIU specific identification code 2 byte N
Manufact urer controlled SIU name
2 SIU Type SIU-TYPE 20 ascii R
and drawing code
3 F requency Type F REQ-TYPE F requency type of TRMD 1 hex N
Manufact ure cont rolled SIU
4 Hardware Build Status SIU-BLD-HW 2 ascii R
hardware design change control
5 Manufact ure Date SIU-MANU-DATE SIU manufacture data 5 ascii R
Manufact urer controlled SIU serial
6 Serial Number SIU-SERIAL-NO 6 ascii R
number
Manufact urer controlled SIU
7 Customer Barcode SIU-BARCODE 10 ascii R
customer barcode
Manufact urer SIU acceptance
8 Acceptance Data SIU-ACPT-DATE 8 ascii R
date
Manufact ure SIU warranty period
9 Warranty End dat e SIU-WARR-END-DATE 8 ascii R
date
NE release/ build status used for
10 Release/Build Status SIU-BLD-STT customer's maintenance and 2 ascii R
operat ion
SIU software/firmware design
11 Soft ware Build St atus SIU-BLD-SW1 10 ascii R
change control 1
Manufact ure cont rolled field
12 F ield Update F lag1 - 10 byte R/W(*1)
update history flag1
Manufact ure cont rolled field
13 F ield Update F lag2 - 10 byte R/W(*1)
update history flag2
Manufact urer controlled F PGA
14 F PGA Build Version ACT - 10 ascii R
version ACT
F PGA Build Version Manufact urer controlled F PGA
15 - 10 ascii R
STBY version STAND-BY
Manufact urer controlled F IRM
16 F IRM Build Version ACT - 10 hex R
version ACT
Manufact urer controlled F IRM
17 F IRM Build Version STBY - 10 hex R
version STAND-BY
Activation key 1 of optional
18 Capability Code1 CAPA-CODE1 1 byte N
function
function
function
function
function
function
function
function
function
Note-*1: Only open to the maintenance staff
338 MN.00278.E - 005

Section 2.
LISTS AND SERVICES
16 LIST OF FIGURES
Fig.1 - General tree ....................................................................................................... 14
Fig.2 - N+1 or n+0 mixed ACCP/ACAP/CCDP operation

point-to-point application ................................................................................................ 15

point-to-point application ................................................................................................ 16
dual/double terminal application....................................................................................... 17
Fig.5 - TRDM card configuration ...................................................................................... 18
Fig.6 - Gigabit Ethernet interface configuration.................................................................. 18
Fig.7 - BBINTF (SPC) card configuration ........................................................................... 19
Fig.8 - Optional Ext-BB shelf and card configuration ........................................................... 19

Fig.9 - Optional module configuration on AUX INTF ............................................................ 20
Fig.10 - Optional module configuration on SV card ............................................................. 20
Fig.11 - Typical rack layout............................................................................................. 24
Fig.12 - Functional Block Diagram for STM-1 interface........................................................ 25
Fig.13 - Functional Block Diagram for STM-1 electrical 1+1 redundancy................................ 26
Fig.14 - Functional block diagram for STM-1 Optical with 1+1 Line Protection ........................ 27
Fig.15 - Functional block diagram for STM-4 Optical Interface ............................................. 28

In case of GESW v1 ........................................................................................................ 29

In case of GESW v2 ........................................................................................................ 30
Fig.18 - Functional block diagram for Native IP and STM-1 hybrid interface
(in case of GESW v2) ...................................................................................................... 31
Fig.19 - Functional block diagram for STM-1 interface, double terminal................................. 32
MN.00278.E - 005 339

Fig.20 - Functional block diagram of BB INTF (SDH)........................................................... 35
Fig.21 - Functional block diagram of GE SW v1 card........................................................... 38
Fig.22 - Functional block diagram of GE SW v2 card........................................................... 39
Fig.23 - Functional block diagram of TRMD v1 transmitter side ............................................ 42
Fig.24 - Functional block diagram of TRDM v2 transmitter side ............................................ 43
Fig.25 - Functional block diagram of TRDM v1 receiver side................................................. 44
Fig.26 - Functional block diagram of TRDM v2 receiver side................................................. 45

Fig.27 - Schematic Block Diagram of Auxiliary signal transmission for STM-1interface............. 48
(GESW v1) .................................................................................................................... 49
(GESW v2) .................................................................................................................... 50

ITU-R Rec. F.635-6 Annex-I (2001-05) ............................................................................. 63

ITU-R Rec. F.382-8 (2006-04) ......................................................................................... 64

ITU-R Rec. F.635-6 (2001-05) ......................................................................................... 65

ITU-R Rec. F.635-6 (2001-05) ......................................................................................... 66
ITU-R Rec. F.1099-4 Annex-I (2007-09)............................................................................ 67

ITU-R Rec. F.383-8 (2007-09) ......................................................................................... 68

ITU-R Rec. F.383-8 (2007-09) ......................................................................................... 69

ITU-R Rec. F.384-10 (2007-09)........................................................................................ 70

ITU-R Rec. F.384-10 (2007-09)........................................................................................ 71

Modified ITU-R Rec. F.384-10 (2007-09) raster .................................................................. 72

Modified ITU-R Rec. F.384-10 (2007-09) raster .................................................................. 73

ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 (2005-01) ......................................................................................... 74

ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 (2005-01) ......................................................................................... 75

ITU.R Rec. F.385-9 (2005-01).......................................................................................... 76

ITU-R F.385-9 Annex-3 (2005-01).................................................................................... 77

(ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 Annex-1 (2005-01)............................................................................ 78

ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 (2005-01) ......................................................................................... 79

ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 (2005-01) ......................................................................................... 80

ITU-R Rec. F385-9 Annex-5 (2005-01).............................................................................. 81
340 MN.00278.E - 005

ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 (2005-01) ......................................................................................... 82

Modified ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 Annex-5 (2005-01), +7 MHz shift plan...................................... 83
Fig.51 - 8G Type1 (L8G) band frequency allocation

ITU-R Rec. F.386-8 Annex-6 (2007-07)............................................................................. 84

ITU-R Rec. F.386-8 Annex-3 (2007-07)............................................................................. 85

ITU-R Rec. F.386-8 Annex-6 (2007-07)............................................................................. 86

Based on ITU-R Rec. F.386-8 Annex-3 (2007-07), 14 MHz shift ............................................ 87

CEPT/ERC Rec2-06 Annex-2 (2007-06) ............................................................................. 88

ITU-R Rec. F.387-10 recommendations 1.1 (2006-07)......................................................... 89

ITU-R Rec. F.387-10 recommends 1.2 (2006-02) ............................................................... 90

ITU-R Rec. F.387-10 recommends 1.1 (2006-07) ............................................................... 91

Modified CEPT/ERC Recommendation 12-06 E (2010-02) ..................................................... 92
Fig.60 - 13G Type1 frequency allocation

ITU-R Rec. F.497-7 (2007-09) ......................................................................................... 93
Fig.61 .......................................................................................................................... 98
Fig.62 .......................................................................................................................... 99
In case that Tx RF channel is in the lower half band .......................................................... 102
In case that Tx Rf channel is in the higher half band ......................................................... 104
In case that Tx RF channel is in the higher half band......................................................... 105
In case that Tx RF channel is in the upper half band.......................................................... 111
Fig.73 - Loss equalized RF branching network for 7+1 protection system ............................ 112
Fig.74 - Mechanical configuration .................................................................................. 113

Fig.75 - Typical BRU configuration of 7+1 ACAP double terminal ........................................ 114
Fig.76 - TX/RX/SD BPF on TRMD adaptor........................................................................ 115
Fig.77 - Insertion Loss Breakdown (7+1 ACCP as an example) .......................................... 120
Fig.78 - Insertion loss breakdown (7+1 ACCP as an example) ........................................... 122
MN.00278.E - 005 341

Fig.79 - Insertion loss breakdown (7+1 ACAP as an example) ........................................... 123
Fig.80 - Out-band attenuation outside Fa +/-140 MHz ...................................................... 125
Fig.81 - Out-Band Attenuation outside Fa +/- 140 MHz .................................................... 126
Fig.82 - Typical filter characteristics ............................................................................... 127
Fig.83 ........................................................................................................................ 128
Fig.84 ........................................................................................................................ 129
Fig.85 - SDH multiplexing structure ............................................................................... 139

Fig.86 -...................................................................................................................... 142

B.3.2, System B.3, Class 5B .......................................................................................... 148

C.3.2, System C.1, Class 5B .......................................................................................... 149
Fig.89 - Typical Example of CW Lines exceeding the RF Spectrum Mask

(In accordance with ETSI EN 302 217-2-2 V1.4.1 (2010-07) .............................................. 150
Fig.90 - Generic Spurious Emission Reference Bandwidth Limit Mask

(In accordance with ETSI EN 301 390 V1.2.1 (2003-11) Fig.A.1) ........................................ 151

B.3.2, System B.3, Class 5B .......................................................................................... 152

C.3.2, System C.1, Class 5B .......................................................................................... 153
Fig.93 - BER vs RSL (64QAM System) for STM-1.............................................................. 163
Fig.94 - BER vs RSL (128QAM System) for STM-1 ............................................................ 164
Fig.95 -...................................................................................................................... 165

Fig.96 -...................................................................................................................... 169
Fig.97 ........................................................................................................................ 185
Fig.98 ........................................................................................................................ 186
Fig.99 ........................................................................................................................ 186
Fig.100 - One Example of 15+1 GP1 Point-to-Point Terminal ............................................. 188
Fig.101 - One Example of N+1 GP1 & M+1 GP2 Point-to-Point Terminal.............................. 189
Fig.102 - One Example of N+1 GP1 & M+1 GP2 Double Terminal ....................................... 190
Fig.103 - Climatogram for class 1.3: Not weather protected storage locations...................... 193
Fig.104 - Climatogram for class 3.2 - Partly temperature-controlled locations ...................... 194
Fig.105 - Inrush current specification ............................................................................. 203
Fig.106 - Immunity to narrow band specification ............................................................. 204
Fig.107 - Emission of narrowband noise specification ....................................................... 204
Fig.108 - DC power supply connection to the UIA block

(SIAE recommended PS dual-feed system) ...................................................................... 205
Fig.109 - Available DC Power Feed System ..................................................................... 206
Fig.110 - DC power supply feed to each card (mechanically) ............................................. 207
Fig.111 - DC power supply feed to each card (photos)...................................................... 208
Fig.112 - DC power supply feed to each card (electrical)................................................... 209
Fig.113 - BBINTF card with SPF-1 for STM-1 electrical ...................................................... 214
342 MN.00278.E - 005

Fig.114 - Mechanical Dimension of SFP Module ................................................................ 214
Fig.115 - BBINTF Card without SPF for STM-1 electrical .................................................... 215
Fig.116 - BBINTF with SFP-2......................................................................................... 217
Fig.117 - SFP mechanical dimension .............................................................................. 217
Fig.118 - STM4O Overview for 1+1 SFP.......................................................................... 220
Fig.119 - SFP mechanical dimension .............................................................................. 221
Fig.120 - .................................................................................................................... 226

Fig.121 - 1000BASE-T electrical interface ....................................................................... 227
Fig.122 - 1000BASE-SX/LX optical interface.................................................................... 228
Fig.123 - Functional Block Diagram of GESW v1 .............................................................. 233
Fig.124 - Functional Block Diagram of GESW v2 .............................................................. 233
Fig.125 - Jitter Transfer Characteristic (f0 = 10 Hz) ......................................................... 235
Fig.126 - Clock Source Selector Diagram of GESW v2....................................................... 237
Fig.127 - Block diagram of the NMS facilities on SV.......................................................... 239
Fig.128 - Optimized Framing for STM-1 and Native IP Signal Interface................................ 242
Fig.129 - STM-1 Frame Structure .................................................................................. 243
Fig.130 - STM-1 signal construction ............................................................................... 245

Fig.131 - Functional Block Diagram of GE SW v1 Card
(When set SDH/Ether to SDH on WebLT) ......................................................................... 246
Fig.132 - Ethernet MAC Frame Structure (84 to 1,538 bytes) ............................................ 247
Fig.133 - Converted MAC frame Structure....................................................................... 247
Fig.134 - Virtual Concatenation (VCAT) to/from TRMD ...................................................... 248
Fig.135 - Pseudo STM-1 Frame Structure........................................................................ 248
Fig.136 - Radio Multi-Frame Structure for 128QAM, 30 MHz CS System .............................. 249
Fig.137 - Radio Multi-Frame Structure for 64QAM, 40 MHz CS System ................................ 250
Fig.138 - Functional Block Diagram of STM-1 on Radio ..................................................... 251

Fig.139 - Functional Block Diagram of Native IP on Radio ................................................. 252
Fig.140 - Schematic Function of GESW v2 Card

(having two radio aggregation group, RAG1 & RAG2) ........................................................ 254
Fig.141 - Ethernet MAC Frame Structure (84 to 1,538 bytes) ............................................ 254
Fig.142 -Generation of Variable-Length Ethernet Packet Signal .......................................... 255
Fig.143 - Super Frame Structure for Ethernet Packet Signal .............................................. 255
Fig.144 - Relationship between Radio Frame, LVDS frame and information frame structure for 30
MHz CS system ............................................................................................................ 257
Fig.145 - Relationship between radio frame, LVDS frame and infomation frame structure for 40 MHz
CS system................................................................................................................... 258
Fig.146 - Image of Dynamic Mapping (VCAT) inside GESW................................................ 259
Fig.147 - Image of Radio Frame Structure inside TRMD .................................................... 260
Fig.148 - Functional block diagram of Native IP on Radio in case of TRMD v2 & GESW v2 ...... 261
Fig.149 - Radio frame construction for QPSK, 30 MHz CS system ....................................... 262
Fig.150 - Radio frame construction for 8QAM, 30 MHz CS system ...................................... 263
Fig.151 - Radio frame construction for 16QAM, 30 MHz CS system..................................... 264
MN.00278.E - 005 343

Fig.154 - Radio frame construction for 128QAM, 30 MHz CS system ................................... 267
Fig.157 - Radio frame construction for QPSK, 40 MHz CS system ....................................... 270
Fig.158 - Radio frame construction for 8QAM, 40 MHz CS system ...................................... 271

Fig.165 - Schematic Function of Adaptive Modulation Algorithm ......................................... 278
Fig.166 - QAM Control Algorithm per Hop ....................................................................... 281
Fig.167 - Relationship between EYE SNR and Hop CNR ..................................................... 282
Fig.168 - QAM Order Change Timing after TQAM Activation ............................................... 283
Fig.169 - QAM Order Change Flow Chart in the moderate propagation condition .................. 285
Fig.170 - DEM_QAM&PQAM Change Flow when loss of frame and fixed modulation............... 286
Fig.171 - DEM_QAM & PQAM Change Flow when loss of frame and adaptive modulation........ 287
Fig.172 - MOD_QAM Change Flow when loss of frame ...................................................... 288
Fig.173 -Typical RPS System for N+1 ACCP/ACAP/CCDP Operation

(In case of Single RF Band for GP1-RPS) ......................................................................... 290
Fig.174 - Typical RPS System for N+1 or N+0 ACCP/ACAP/CCDP Operation

(In case of Dual RF Band for GP1-RPS)............................................................................ 291
Fig.175 - Typical RPS System for 2x(N+1) or 2x(N+0) Operation

(In case of Single RF Band for GP1/2-RPS) ...................................................................... 292
Fig.176 - Typical RPS System for N+1/N+0 & M+1/M+0 Operation

(In case of Dual RF Band for GP1/2-RPS)......................................................................... 293
Fig.177 - Typical RPS System for N+1 Double Terminal Operation

(In case of Single/Dual RF Band for GP1-RPS) .................................................................. 294
Fig.178 - Hybrid Operation of N+1 SDH with OCC and m+0 GE Multi-Link
(In case of 3+1 SDH and 4+0 GE Multi-Link) ................................................................... 299
Fig.179 - Hybrid Operation of N+1 SDH and m+0 GE Multi-Link

(In case of 3+1 SDH without OCC and 5+0 GE Multi-Link) ................................................. 299
Fig.180 - Multi-Hop Configuration for GE Link Aggregation ................................................ 300
Fig.181 - Connection between PC and NE by LAN Ports on SV unit ..................................... 302

Fig.182 - Management Target Range for N+1 Point-to-Point Terminal................................. 303
Fig.183 - Management Target Range for N+1 & M+1 Point-to-Point Terminal ...................... 304
Fig.184 -Management Target Range for N+1 & M+1 Dual/Double Terminal ......................... 305
Fig.185 - Management Target Range for 1+1 Hot-Standby................................................ 306
Fig.186 - Management Target Range for 2-Directional 1+1 Hot-Standby ............................. 306
Fig.187 - Block diagram of H.K. input............................................................................. 307
Fig.188 - Block diagram of H.K. output........................................................................... 307
Fig.189 - Menu Tree for GESW v2 .................................................................................. 310
Fig.190 - Menu Tree for GESW v2 (Cont'd) ..................................................................... 311

344 MN.00278.E - 005

Fig.192 - Menu Tree for GESW v1 .................................................................................. 319
MN.00278.E - 005 345

346 MN.00278.E - 005
17 LIST OF TABLES
Tab.1 - System Application, Rack and Shelf Configuration ....................................................11
Tab.2 - Available System Operation ..................................................................................12
Tab.3 - ITU-R Recommendations ......................................................................................51

(STM-1, 64QAM with 40 MHz CS System) ...........................................................................94
(STM-1, 128QAM with 30 MHz CS System) .........................................................................95

(STM-1, 128QAM with 30 MHz CS System) .........................................................................96
Tab.7 - Number of BEF when Innermost CHs are ACCP or CCDP operation .............................98
Tab.8 - Number of BEF when Innermost CHs are ACAP operation ..........................................98
Tab.9 - Filter chain configuration for 40 MHz channel spacing system .................................. 100
Tab.10 - Filter chain configuration for 28/29/29.65 MHz .................................................... 101

(40 MHz channel spacing system).................................................................................... 116


Tab.15 - Insertion Loss Breakdown for each component .................................................... 121
Tab.16 - Insertion loss breakdown for each component ..................................................... 124
Tab.17 - Insertion loss breakdown for each component ..................................................... 124
Tab.18 - Specification ................................................................................................... 125
Tab.19 - Specification ................................................................................................... 126
Tab.20 - Main parameters ............................................................................................. 127
Tab.21 - Main parameter............................................................................................... 128
Tab.22 - RF Band and Switching Capacity in case of single RF application ............................ 131
Tab.23 - Available QAM for TRMD/BBINTF/GESW Combination ........................................... 133
Tab.24 - Theoretical Parameter of DTR, TDTR & Ether Rate (Throughput) ............................ 135
Tab.25 - Throughput for 30 MHz CS per RF channel (Mbit/s) ............................................. 136
Tab.26 - Throughput for 40 MHz CS per RF channel (Mbit/s) .............................................. 136
Tab.27 - Typical Latency for One-Way & 1+0 Operation..................................................... 137
Tab.28 - Radio switching capacity for terminal (TERM) ...................................................... 138
Tab.29 - Radio Switching Capacity for Dual/Double Terminal (DT)....................................... 138

Tab.30 - Transmit Output Power for STM-1 interface (dBm) ............................................... 141
Tab.31 - Transmit Output Power for Native IP interface and 30 MHz CS (dBm) ..................... 141
Tab.32 - Transmit Output Power for Native IP interface and 40 MHz CS (dBm) ..................... 142
MN.00278.E - 005 347

Tab.33 - Calibration Value for Transmit Output Power at Ta=25°C ...................................... 142
Tab.34 - Calibration Value for BER Performance at Ta=25°C .............................................. 165
Tab.35 - Explanation of Measured Point A of TL and Point C of ETSI standard ....................... 165
Tab.36 - Calibration Value for BER Performance at Ta=25°C .............................................. 168
Tab.37 - Explanation of Measured Point A of TL and Point C of ETSI standard ....................... 169
Tab.38 - QAM Order Change vs. RSL for Adaptive Modulation ............................................ 171
Tab.39 - System Gain for STM-1 Interface at Ta=25°C

(TX output power – RSL threshold at BER of 10(-6) at Point A- A’) ....................................... 172
Tab.40 - System Gain for Native IP Interface at Ta=25°C

(TX output power - RSL threshold at BER of 10(-6) at Point A-A') ........................................ 173
Tab.41 - Calibration Value for System Gain at Ta=25°C..................................................... 173
Tab.42 - Co-Channel Interference Sensitivity at BER of 10-6 for 30/40 MHz CS .................... 175
Tab.43 - First Adjacent Interference Sensitivity at BER of 10-6 for 30 MHz CS ....................... 176
Tab.44 -First Adjacent Interference Sensitivity at BER of 10-6 for 40 MHz CS ....................... 176
Tab.45 - System Application and Rack Configuration ......................................................... 187
Tab.46 - Unit & Card Construction .................................................................................. 187
Tab.47 - Typical Weight of Each Unit and TL Equipment..................................................... 191

Tab.48 - Environmental Condition when not in-use ........................................................... 192
Tab.49 - Environmental Condition when in-use................................................................. 193
Tab.50 - EMC Emission Test Method and Limits ................................................................ 195

Tab.51 - Immunity Test Method and Conditions................................................................ 196
Tab.52 - Limits for stationary equipment used in weather protected locations ....................... 197
Tab.53 - Test specification T3.2: Partly temperature-controlled locations - climatic tests ........ 197
Tab.54 - Test specification T3.2: Partly temperature-controlled locations - mechanical tests .. 198
Tab.55 ........................................................................................................................198
Tab.56 ........................................................................................................................199
Tab.57 - MTBF of Slide-in-Unit ....................................................................................... 199
Tab.58 - MTBF of shelf ................................................................................................... 200
Tab.59 - MTBF of BRU................................................................................................... 200
Tab.60 - Power Supply Interface Requirement.................................................................. 202
Tab.61 - Safety information of DC power supply feed ........................................................ 210
Tab.62 - Typical card power consumption at Ta=25°C ....................................................... 210

Tab.63 - Equipment Power Consumption using TRMD v2
(Standard Power Output with SD, 4-13 GHz, STM-1 electrical) ............................................ 211
Tab.64 - Typical Equipment Power Consumption using TRMD v2

(High Power Output with SD, 4-8 GHz, STM-1 electrical)..................................................... 212
Tab.65 - SFP Module for STM-1 electrical......................................................................... 215
Tab.66 - Electrical Specification on BBINTF Card............................................................... 216
Tab.67 - SFP Module Used ............................................................................................. 218
Tab.68 - Electrical Specification of BBINTF (S-1.1) ............................................................ 218
Tab.69 - Electrical Specification of S-1.1 SFP (Only reference)............................................ 218
Tab.70 - Electrical Specification of BBINTF (L-1.1) ............................................................ 219
Tab.71 - Electrical Specification of L-1.1 SFP (Only reference) ............................................ 219
348 MN.00278.E - 005

Tab.73 - Electrical Specification on STM4O card (S-4.1)..................................................... 222
Tab.74 - Electrical Specification of S-4-1 SFP Module (Only reference)................................. 222
Tab.75 - Electrical Specification of STM4O card (L-4.1)...................................................... 222
Tab.76 - Electrical Specification of L-4.1 SFP Module (Only reference) ................................. 223
Tab.77 - Maximum permissible jitter at network interfaces................................................. 223
Tab.78 - STM-1 input jitter tolerance limit ....................................................................... 224
Tab.79 - STM-1e input jitter tolerance limit...................................................................... 224

Tab.80 - STM-4 input jitter tolerance limit ....................................................................... 224
Tab.81 - STM-1 output jitter limit ................................................................................... 225
Tab.83 - Electrical Specification of 1000BASE-T SFP .......................................................... 228
Tab.84 - Electrical Specification of 1000BASE-SX SFP........................................................ 228
Tab.85 - Electrical Specification of 1000BASE-LX SFP ........................................................ 229
Tab.86 - Main parameter of preliminary IP feature list ....................................................... 230
Tab.87 - Electrical Specification of Radio User Channel (RUC) ............................................. 234
Tab.88 - Electrical Specification of Wayside Traffic (WS) .................................................... 234
Tab.89 - 2.048 Mbit/s tributary output jitter limit.............................................................. 235

Tab.90 - 2.048 Mbit/s Minimum jitter tolerance limit ......................................................... 235
Tab.91 - Synchronous Ethernet Characteristics................................................................. 236
Tab.92 - Electrical Specification of FE Channel (FE) ........................................................... 237

Tab.93 - Electrical Specification of FE Channel (FE) ........................................................... 237
Tab.94 - Electrical Specification of Orderwire Signal Interface............................................. 238
Tab.95 - Selective Calling Method of OW Calling ............................................................... 238
Tab.96 - Electrical Specification of Housekeeping Signal Interface (HK)................................ 238
Tab.97 - Rack Alarm Bus Signal Interface (RAB) ............................................................... 239
Tab.98 - LAN Interface on SV Unit ................................................................................. 240

Tab.99 - RF Flange Specification..................................................................................... 240
Tab.100 - Return Loss at Equipment Antenna Port ............................................................ 241
Tab.101 - Main Function of Section Overhead

(ITU-T G.707, 708 and 709) ........................................................................................... 244
Tab.102 - One Example of Humming Coding .................................................................... 280
Tab.103 - QAM Change Table (Preliminary)...................................................................... 283

Tab.104 - QAM Change Operation when DEM is Loss of Synchronization .............................. 284
Tab.105 - QAM Change Operation when re-synchronized ................................................... 284
Tab.106 - Radio Switching Capacity for Terminal .............................................................. 289

Tab.107 - Radio Switching Capacity for Double Terminal.................................................... 289
Tab.108 - TL Web LT Major Functions.............................................................................. 301
Tab.109 - System Requirements .................................................................................... 301
Tab.110 - Menu Description when GESW v2 installed ........................................................ 313
Tab.111 - Menu Description when GESW-<1/2> is selected ............................................... 316
Tab.112 - Menu Description when GESW v1 installed ........................................................ 321

Tab.113 - Condition Item Description List ........................................................................ 325
Tab.114 - Control Item and Item Description ................................................................... 327
MN.00278.E - 005 349

Tab.115 - Provisioning Item and Item Description List for GESW v2 .................................... 328
Tab.116 -Provisioning Item and Item Description List for GESW v1 ..................................... 331
Tab.117 - Performance Monitoring Item and Item Description List....................................... 335
Tab.118 - Physical Inventory NE Item and Item Description List ......................................... 337
Tab.119 - Physical Inventory UNIT Item and Item Description List ...................................... 338
350 MN.00278.E - 005

18 ASSISTANCE SERVICE
For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the com-
pany manufacturing the product.
MN.00278.E - 005 351

352 MN.00278.E - 005

Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TL IP/TDM

1 GENERAL INFORMATION & CONFIGURATION TREE................................................... 9

2 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM ........................................................................................22

4 RF BRANCHING NETWORK .......................................................................................97

5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION ................................................................................131

6 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION ...............................................................................179

7 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATION .........................................................................192

9 SIGNAL INTERFACE SPECIFICATION......................................................................213

10 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ON SDH ON RADIO .......................................................242

11 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ON NATIVE IP ON

12 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ON ADAPTIVE MODULATION ........................................278

13 RADIO PROTECTION SWITCHING (RPS) ................................................................289

14 SYNCHRONOUS EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT FUNCTION (SEMF) .............................301

16 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................339

17 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................347

1 GENERAL INFORMATION & CONFIGURATION

Main features are as follows:

• super high density packaging

a. N+1 or n+0 combined ACCP/ACAP/CCDP with/without SD/TSD

d. 1+1 Hot-Standby (2 systems per rack, Point-to-Point Terminal)

- +33 to +30 dBm (up to 512QAM, 4-8 GHz) for 40 MHz CS

• Lower power consumption.

• Fixed or adaptive modulation applied

3.QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256QAM/512QAM adaptive modulation (dynamic change of modulation

• 21-tap powerful adaptive time domain equalizer (ATDE)

• 1+1 baseband redundant operation available 1

• One platform and versatile system upgrade available by license key

• Easier on-site test and maintenance without measuring instruments

• Event management facility

• Configuration management facility

• Resource management facility

• Performance management facility

3.Monitoring items on SV are PSAC, FSAD, PSRC and FSRD.

• Security management facility

• SNMP and HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol) NMS

Tab.1 - System Application, Rack and Shelf Configuration

TRMD shelf used Ext-BB

1+1 HSB P-P 1 1

a. Type-1/2/3/4/5 setting of Basic shelf is set by WebLT

Typical RF CH Allocation/Recommended Working

5. CCDP with XPIC

N+1/N+0 & Mixture of 6. Single/Dual RF Band

6. CCDP with XPIC

Fig.1 - General tree

Fig.2 - N+1 or n+0 mixed ACCP/ACAP/CCDP operation

Fig.5 - TRDM card configuration

Configuration tree of Gigabit Ethernet Interface

Fig.6 - Gigabit Ethernet interface configuration

Fig.7 - BBINTF (SPC) card configuration

Configuration tree of optional Ext-BB shelf and card

Fig.8 - Optional Ext-BB shelf and card configuration

Fig.9 - Optional module configuration on AUX INTF

Configuration tree of optional module on SV

Fig.10 - Optional module configuration on SV card

- operating frequency band

- assigned RF channel number and frequency

- system configuration (GP1-RPS or GP1/GP2-RPS)

- operation mode: ACCP, ACAP or CCDP operation

- required TRMD adaptors

- with/without BEF for innermost channels.

- assigned RF channel numbers

To specify the TRMD, it is necessary to confirm the detailed requirement as follows:

- Operating frequency band and RF channel number